Home

TeSys T LTM R Modbus - Motor Management Controller

1. Master PLC PC or communication module with line terminator Modbus shielded cable TSX CSA 00 Modbus shielded cable with 1 RJ45 connector VW3 A8 306 D30 Grounding of the Modbus cable shield Withdrawable drawer Withdrawable drawer part of the auxiliary connector Fixed part of the auxiliary connector Line terminator VW3 A8 306 DR 120 ONOahWDND 1639501EN 04 09 2014 223 Installation LTM R Controllers Installed in Withdrawable Drawers With T Junction Boxes The wiring diagram for connection of LTM R controllers installed in withdrawable drawers to the RS 485 bus via the RJ45 connector and T junction boxes is as follows Master PLC PC or communication module with line terminator Modbus shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R Modbus shielded cable with 1 RJ45 connector VW3 A8 306 D30 Grounding of the Modbus cable shield Withdrawable drawer Withdrawable drawer part of the auxiliary connector Fixed part of the auxiliary connector Modbus T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFs with cab
2. Logic Inputs LTM R Logic Pie _ TCS Functions ie _ _ _ M gt E Predefined OutputCommands ees ore Control Monitoring Be Functions System Status z HMI commands Signal LEDs rotection Functions GO L_ S tte Lp VO Control Logic l Custom Logic TES Predefined _ Equations ee messages Toc Logic Inputs and Outputs The LTM R controller provides 6 logic inputs and 4 logic outputs By adding an LTM E expansion module you can add 4 more logic inputs Selecting a predefined operating mode automatically assigns the logic inputs to functions and defines the relationship between logic inputs and outputs Using the custom logic editor you can change these assignments 1639501EN 04 09 2014 143 Motor Control Functions Predefined Operating Modes Overview The LTM R controller can be configured in 1 out of 10 predefined operating modes Each operating mode is designed to meet the requirements of a common application configuration When you select an operating mode you specify both the e operating mode type which determines the relationship between logic inputs and logic outputs and e control circuit type which determines logic input behavior based on the control wiring design Operating Mode Types There are 10 types of operati
3. Master PLC PC or communication module with line terminator Modbus shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 Ree Grounding of the Modbus cable shield Modbus T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFe with cable Grounding of the Modbus T junction boxes Line terminator for RJ45 plug VW3 A8 306 R 120 9 OORUN LTM R Controllers Installed in a Blokset or Okken Motor Control Switchboard The installation of LTM R controllers in withdrawable drawers of a switchboard presents constraints specific to the type of switchboard e For installation of LTM R controllers in an Okken switchboard see the Okken Communications Cabling amp Wiring Guide available on request e For installation of LTM R controllers in a Blokset switchboard see the Blokset Communications Cabling amp Wiring Guide available on request e For installation of LTM R controllers in other types of switchboard follow the specific EMC instructions described in this manual and refer to the relative instructions specific to your type of switchboard 222 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation LTM R Controllers Installed in Withdrawable Drawers With Hardwired Cables The wiring diagram for connection of LTM R controllers installed in withdrawable drawers to the RS 485 bus via the RJ45 connector and hardwired cables is as follows
4. Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 510 Ulnt Controller port ID 511 Ulnt Time to trip x 1 s 512 Ulnt Motor last start current ratio FLC 513 Ulnt Motor last start duration s 514 Ulnt Motor starts per hour count 515 Word Phase imbalances register bit O L1 current highest imbalance bit 1 L2 current highest imbalance bit 2 L3 current highest imbalance bit 3 L1 L2 voltage highest imbalance 1 bit 4 L2 L3 voltage highest imbalance 1 bit 5 L3 L1 voltage highest imbalance 1 bits 6 15 Not significant 516 523 Reserved 524 539 Forbidden 314 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Configuration Variables Configuration Overview Configuration variables are grouped according to the following criteria Configuration variable groups Registers Configuration 540 to 649 Setting 650 to 699 Configuration Variables The configuration variables are described below Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 540 Ulnt Motor operating mode 2 2 wire overload 3 3 wire overload 4 2 wire independent 5 3 wire independent 6 2 wire reverser 7 3 wire reverser 8 2 wire 2 step 9 3 wire 2 step 10 2 wire 2 speed 11 3 wire 2 speed 256 511 Custom logic program 0 255 B 541 Ulnt Motor transition timeout s 542 544 Reserved 545
5. Contactor Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Contactor rating 1 1 000 A in increments of 0 1 A 810A Motor Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Motor nominal voltage 110 690 V 400 V Motor nominal power 0 134 1339 866 HP 10 05 HP Motor nominal power 0 1 999 9 kW in increments of 0 1 kW 7 5 kW Motor auxiliary fan cooled e Disable Disable e Enable Motor full load current ratio FLC1 5 100 FLCmax in increments of 1 5 FLCmax Motor full load current Motor high speed full load current ratio FLC2 5 100 FLCmax in increments of 1 5 FLCmax Motor high speed full load current FLC2 0 100 A in increments of 1 A 5A Load Current Transformer Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Load CT primary 1 65 535 in increments of 1 1 Load CT secondary 1 500 in increments of 1 1 Load CT multiple passes 1 100 passes in increments of 1 1 Ground Current Transformer Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Ground current mode Internal e External Internal Ground CT primary 1 65 535 in increments of 1 Ground CT secondary 1 65 535 in increments of 1 350 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Configurable Parameters Control Operating Mode Inputs Outputs Rapid Cycle Parameter Setting R
6. Parameters Setting range Factory setting Over power factor fault enable e Disable Disable e Enable Over power factor fault threshold 0 1 in increments of 0 01 0 9 Under power factor fault timeout 1 25 s in increments of 0 1 s 10s Over power factor warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Over power factor warning threshold 0 1 in increments of 0 01 0 9 1639501EN 04 09 2014 359 Configurable Parameters HMI HMI Display HMI Keyboard HMI Display Scroll View Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting HMI language setting English HMI display contrast setting 0 255 127 HMI display brightness setting 0 255 127 HMI motor status LED color e Red Red e Green Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Control remote local buttons enable e Disable Disable e Enable Stop HMI disable e Yes No e No Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting HMI display motor status enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display date enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display time enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display operating time enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display starts per hour enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display I O status enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display control mode enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display thermal capacit
7. H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control 1639501EN 04 09 2014 393 Wiring Diagrams Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a L1 L2 L3 D E N A E i Start Stop i eel ee B1 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram 394 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram Al A2 A3 H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The f
8. 1639501EN 04 09 2014 65 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Description When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Inverse Thermal and select a motor trip class the LTM R controller monitors the motor s utilized thermal capacity and signals e a warning when utilized thermal capacity exceeds a configured warning threshold e a fault when utilized thermal capacity is greater than 100 A CAUTION RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING The Motor Trip Class parameter must be set to the thermal heating characteristics of the motor Refer to the motor manufacturer s instructions before setting this parameter Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage There is no time delay for the thermal overload warning The LTM R controller calculates the Thermal Capacity Level in all operating states When power to the LTM R controller is lost the LTM R controller retains the last measurements of the motor s thermal state for a period of 30 minutes allowing it to estimate the motor s thermal state when power is re applied Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled e The thermal overload warning is cleared by the LTM R controller when the utilized thermal capacity falls 5 below the warning threshold e The thermal overload fault can be reset by the user when the utilized thermal capacity falls below the fault rese
9. Start Command J l 1 Stop Command ey I pa Main Circuit Current j Y L 4 tp st Normal operation Fault or warning condition The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect current The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect no current The LTM R controller reports a Start Command Check fault and or warning if current is not detected after 1 second The LTM R controller reports a Stop Command Check fault and or warning if current is detected after 1 second The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Run Check Back and Stop Check Back N Start Command l Run Check Back B Stop Command Stop Check Back t y Ld Main Circuit Current a at aad Normal operation Fault or warning condition After the motor enters the run state the LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect current until a Stop command is given or the function is disabled The LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect no current until a Start command is given or the function is disabled The LTM R controller reports a Run Check Back fault and or warning if the current is not detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Stop command The LTM R controller reports a Stop Check Ba
10. N Network TS Terminal strip 368 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a KM1 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram 1639501EN 04 09 2014 369 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control 370 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram Fell KM2 Start Start A1 A2 FW RV TE i Dasal dasad d
11. Topic Page Fault Management Introduction 165 Manual Reset 167 Automatic Reset 169 Remote Reset 172 Fault and Warning Codes 174 LTM R Controller Clear Commands 176 164 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Fault Management Introduction Overview When the LTM R controller detects a fault condition and activates the appropriate response the fault becomes latched Once a fault becomes latched it remains latched even if the underlying fault condition is eliminated until cleared by a reset command The setting of the Fault Reset Mode parameter determines how the LTM R controller manages faults The fault reset mode selections listed below are described in the topics that follow e Manual see page 167 Factory setting e Automatic see page 169 e Remote see page 172 The fault reset mode cannot be changed while a fault remains active All faults must be reset before the fault reset mode can be changed Fault Reset Methods A Reset command can be issued using any of the following means cycling power reset button on the LTM R controller reset button on the HMI keypad reset command from the HMI engineering tool logic input 1 5 a network command automatic reset A WARNING RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION When the LTM R controller is operating in 2 wire control with an active Run command a Reset command will immediately restart the motor Failure to follow these i
12. Topic Page Hardware Configurations 243 Stand Alone Configuration 244 242 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Hardware Configurations Overview The LTM R controller either alone or connected to an LTM E expansion module can be operated with or without a user interface device In any configuration the LTM R controller can be configured to perform monitoring fault management motor protection and control functions Communications User interface devices and their communications interfaces include User interface device Communicates via the PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or LTM E expansion module Network PLC Network port on the LTM R controller via the network RJ45 connector or terminal wiring NOTE For any instructions about the LTM CU see the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User s Manual 1639501EN 04 09 2014 243 Use Stand Alone Configuration Overview Configurations Before the LTM R controller can operate in a stand alone configuration parameters must be set via an HMI device or SoMove with the TeSys T DTM When parameters are set the device can be detached and you can use the following controls to operate the LTM R controller Use this control To e LEDs Monitor the state of the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion e 7LTMR controller LEDs module e
13. 122 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Technical Characteristics The underpower function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an underpower fault P A Fault timeout Ps2 Ps2 Underpower fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 123 Motor Protection Functions Overpower Description The overpower function signals e a warning when the value of active power exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the value of active power exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting Pnom The overpower function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Parameter Settings The overpower function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Overpower Warning Threshold e Overpower Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Overpower Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Overpower Warning e Overpower Fault e 1 counting statistic
14. 1639501EN 04 09 2014 375 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control 376 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a Stop Baal E se se Or III i B1 KM1 fkm3 KM1 1 B2 QO 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram 1639501EN 04 09 2014 377 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The followi
15. B2 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram Stop Start FAA 1639501EN 04 09 2014 373 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control 374 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a A1 A2 Start Stop anandi can Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram
16. Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Motor Nom Voltage Motor Nominal Voltage Nom Power kW Motor Nominal Power expressed in kW Nom Power hp Motor Nominal Power expressed in hp DirTrans Control Direct Transition TransTime Motor Transition Timeout 2step Level Motor Step 1 to 2 Threshold 2step Time Motor Step 1 to 2 Timeout Aux Fan Motor Auxiliary Fan Cooled TEMP SENSOR Fault Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable Fault Level Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold Warn Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable Warn Level Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold Local Control Control Local Channel Setting Transfer Mode Control Transfer Mode 1639501EN 04 09 2014 269 Use Fault Reset Settings Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following fault reset settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Reset Manual Fault Reset Mode Remote Automatic Net Port Network Port Endian Setting AUTO GROUP 1 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout AUTO GROUP 2 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout AUTO GROUP 3 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 3 Timeout 270 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Current Settings From the settings p
17. 1639501EN 04 09 2014 13 Introduction Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System Aim of the Product The TeSys T motor management system offers protection control and monitoring capabilities for single phase and 3 phase AC induction motors The system is flexible modular and can be configured to meet the requirements of applications in industry The system is designed to meet the needs for integrated protections systems with open communications and a global architecture Highly accurate sensors and solid state full motor protection provide better utilization of the motor Complete monitoring functions enable analysis of motor operating conditions and faster responses to prevent system downtime The system offers diagnostic and statistics functions and configurable warnings and faults allowing better prediction of component maintenance and provides data to continuously improve the entire system Examples of Supported Machine Segments The motor management system supports the following machine segments Machine Segment Examples Process and special machine segments Water and waste water treatment water treatment blowers and agitators Metal Minerals and Mining cement e glass e steel ore extraction Oil and gas oil and gas processing petrochemical e refinery offshore platform Microelectronic Pharmaceutical Chemical industry cosmetics e detergents e f
18. X Monitored Not monitored 166 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Manual Reset Introduction When the Fault Reset Mode parameter is set to Manual the LTM R controller allows resets usually performed by a person via a power cycle of the control power or by using a local reset means including e Terminal Strip logic input 1 5 e Reset button on the LTM R controller e Reset commands from the HMI A manual reset provides on site personnel the opportunity to inspect the equipment and wiring before performing the reset NOTE A manual reset blocks all reset commands from the LTM R controller s network port even when the Control Channel is set to Network Manual Reset Methods The LTM R controller provides the following manual reset methods Protection Category Monitored Fault Control Channel Terminal Strip HMI Network Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Wiring configuration errors PTC connection RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB P
19. 1639501EN 04 09 2014 281 Use Section 7 5 Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM Overview The following topics show you how to use the LTM R controller when it is connected to a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM 283 Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library 284 282 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM Aim of the Software SoMove software is a Microsoft Windows based application using the open FDT DTM technology SoMove contains DTMs for different devices The TeSys T DTM is a specific DTM that enables the configuration monitoring control and customization of the control functions of the LTM R controller as part of the TeSys T motor management system Functions The TeSys T DTM can be used to e configure parameters for the LTM R controller e display information about the LTM R controller configuration and operation e display the status of detected faults and warnings in the LTM R controller e control the motor e customize operating modes For More Information See the TeSys T DTM for SoMove FDT Container Online Help embedded in the DTM software 1639501EN 04 09 2014 283 Use Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library Overview The installation of SoMove includes some DTMs such a
20. 641 Ulnt Auto reset attempts group 3 setting resets 642 Ulnt Auto reset group 3 timeout s 643 Ulnt Motor step 1 to 2 timeout x 0 1 s 644 Ulnt Motor step 1 to 2 threshold FLC 645 Ulnt HMI port fallback setting see DT_OutputFallbackStrategy page 300 646 649 Reserved 1639501EN 04 09 2014 319 Use Setting Variables The setting variables are described below Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 650 Word HMI language setting register bits 0 4 HMI language setting see DT_Language5 page 300 bits 5 15 Not significant 651 Word HMI display items register 1 bit 0 HMI display average current enable bit 1 HMI display thermal capacity level enable bit 2 HMI display L1 current enable bit 3 HMI display L2 current enable bit 4 HMI display L3 current enable bit 5 HMI display ground current enable bit 6 HMI display motor status enable bit 7 HMI display current phase imbalance enable bit 8 HMI display operating time enable bit 9 HMI display I O status enable bit 10 HMI display reactive power enable bit 11 HMI display frequency enable bit 12 HMI display starts per hour enable bit 13 HMI display control mode enable bit 14 HMI display start statistics enable bit 15 HMI motor temperature sensor enable
21. H Long start fault timeout i 1 T T gt t l I qma G MH Ready Start state J Run state state 1 Threshold Cross In this start cycle scenario the start cycle fails e Current rises above but fails to drop below the Long Start Fault Threshold e f Long Start protection is enabled the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault Timeout is reached e f Long Start protection is disabled the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired e Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault Timeout e The LTM R controller reports start cycle time as 9999 indicating that current exceeded and remained above the fault threshold e The LTM R controller reports the maximum current detected during the start cycle Start cycle with 1 threshold cross Start time 20 FLC Long start fault timeout t 1 tt lt a gt Ready state Start state Fault condition 140 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions 0 Threshold Cross In this start cycle scenario the start cycle fails e Current never rises above the fault threshold e f Long Start protection is enabled the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault Timeout is reached e fLong Start protection is disabled the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins
22. Motor Protection Functions Internal Ground Current Description The internal ground current function is enabled when the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to Internal and disabled when set to External A A DANGER IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION Internal ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury The internal ground current function sums the current readings from the secondary of the internal current transformers and signals e a warning when the summed current exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the summed current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time The internal ground current function has a single fault time delay The internal ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state start state or run state This function can be configured so that it is disabled during start state and enabled only during ready state and run state Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The internal ground current function includes the following features e 1 measure of ground current in amperes e Ground Current
23. Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC 100 of FLC Technical Characteristics The long start function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 90 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a single threshold cross long start fault 10 FLCmin Long start fault timeout Fault condition Is2 Long start fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 91 Motor Protection Functions Jam Description The jam function detects a locked rotor during run state and signals e a warning when current in any phase exceeds a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when current in any phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period of time after the motor has reached run state The jam function is triggered when the motor is jammed during run state and stops or is suddenly overloaded and draws excessive current Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Parameter Settings The jam function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Th
24. Control Transfer Mode Setting LTM R Controller Behavior When Changing Control Channel Bump Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 open if closed or remain open if already open until the next valid signal occurs The motor stops Note In overload predefined operating mode logic outputs O 1 and O 2 are user defined and therefore may not be affected by a Bump transfer Bumpless Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 are not affected and remain in their original position until the next valid signal occurs The motor does not stop When you start the motor in Remote control mode with the PLC the LTM R controller changes to Local control mode 1 6 1 to 6 0 and the status of the motor changes depending on the control transfer mode as follows If the LTM R controller configuration is Then the control mode changes from Remote to Local and the motor 3 Wire Bumpless keeps running 2 Wire Bumpless keeps running if the logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 are activated 3 Wire Bump stops 2 Wire Bump When the LTM R controller changes from Local to Remote control mode 1 6 0 to I 6 1 the status of the motor in Local control mode whether running or stopped remains unchanged The control transfer mode selected does not affect the status of the motor as the LTM R controller only takes account of the last control command logic outputs O 1 or O 2 sent by the PLC CAUTION FAILURE TO STOP AND RISK OF UNINTENDED OP
25. Register Variable type Read only variables Note see page 294 1280 Word Custom logic monitoring register 1 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 Custom logic system ready bits 2 15 Reserved 1281 1300 Reserved Register Variable type Read Write variables Note see page 294 1301 1399 Word 99 General purpose registers for logic functions 1639501EN 04 09 2014 325 Use 326 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Chapter 8 Maintenance Overview This chapter describes the maintenance and self diagnostic features of the LTM R controller and the expansion module A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION all local and national safety codes and standards The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program install alter and apply this product Follow Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Detecting Problems 328 Troubleshooting 329 Preventive Maintenance 331 Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module 333 Communication Warnings and Faults 334 1639501EN 04 09 2014 327 Maintenance Detecting Problems Overview Device LEDs The LTM R controller and the expansion module perform self diagnostic c
26. The Modbus communication status marked as PLC Comm is indicated by a yellow LED 2 If the yellow PLC Comm LED is Then OFF the LTM R is not communicating Blinking the LTM R is exchanging frames receiving or sending Step 2 If the product should be communicating but the LEDs are not lit check the cables and connectors and correct any connection problems Step 3 If the product is still not communicating check the configuration via e SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or e the HMI The communication failure can be the result of a wrong address speed or parity an incorrect PLC configuration etc 236 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Commissioning Verifying System Wiring Overview After all required and optional parameters have been configured be sure to check your system s wiring which can include e motor power wiring e LTM R controller wiring e external current transformer wiring e diagnostic wiring e O wiring Motor Power Wiring To verify the motor power wiring check the following Look at Action The motor nameplate Confirm that the motor generates current and voltage within the ranges of the LTM R controller The power wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual power wiring matches the intended power wiring as described in the power wiring diagram The list of faults and warnings in SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display of the HMI devic
27. A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection must be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Each protection group can be set to manual 1 2 3 4 or 5 Select 0 to disable automatic reset of protection fault groups and require a manual reset even though the Fault Reset Mode parameter is configured for automatic reset Select 5 to enable unlimited auto reset attempts After the time delay has expired the LTM R controller continually attempts to reset every fault in that reset group 1639501EN 04 09 2014 169 Motor Control Functions Auto Reset Group 1 AU G1 Group 1 faults require a predefined cooling time after the monitored parameter returns to and falls below a predefined threshold Group 1 faults include Thermal Overload and Motor Temp Sensor faults The cooling time delay is non configurable However you can e add to the cooling time delay by setting the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to a value greater than 0 or e disable auto reset by setting the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to 0 Auto reset group 1 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Auto Reset Attempt
28. Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can be used to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers ina 1 HMI to many LTM R controllers 1 to many physical configuration The HMI presents a unique user interface including both LCD display and keypad and requires the use of e a software application file and e akeypad label This section shows you how to obtain and install a software application in the Magelis XBTN410 for a 1 to many configuration Refer to the XBT N Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI for instructions on selecting and installing the keypad label that is appropriate for your configuration After connecting the HMI port refer to instructions about configuring the HMI port see page 248 What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software 250 Download 1 to many Software Application Files 251 Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI 252 1639501EN 04 09 2014 249 Use Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software Overview Installation Steps The LTM R controller comes with a copy of Magelis XBT L1000 programming software You need to e install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC and e use it to transfer a 1 to many software application to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI NOTE Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is a powerful programmi
29. Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram ote j B1 L Low H High Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram L Low speed O Off H High speed 400 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram LS Low speed HS High speed H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram LS Low speed HS High speed H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control 1639501EN 04 09 2014 401 Wiring Diagrams 402 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Glossary F FLC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC parameter settin
30. 452 Word Fault register 1 bits 0 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current fault bit 3 Thermal overload fault bit 4 Long start fault bit 5 Jam fault bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault bit 7 Undercurrent fault bit 8 Reserved bit 9 Test fault bit 10 HMI port fault bit 11 Controller internal fault bit 12 Internal port fault bit 13 Not significant bit 14 Network port config fault bit 15 Network port fault 453 Word Fault register 2 bit O External system fault bit 1 Diagnostic fault bit 2 Wiring fault bit 3 Overcurrent fault bit 4 Current phase loss fault bit 5 Current phase reversal fault bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault bit 10 Undervoltage fault bit 11 Overvoltage fault bit 12 Underpower fault bit 13 Overpower fault bit 14 Under power factor fault bit 15 Over power factor fault SE IE IE a oa 1639501EN 04 09 2014 309 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 454 Word Fault register 3 bit O LTM E configuration fault bit 1 LTM R configuration fault bits 2 15 Reserved Monitoring of status Variables for monitoring of status are described bel
31. 652 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio FLC1 FLCmax 653 Ulnt Motor high speed full load current ratio FLC2 FLCmax 654 Word HMI display items register 2 bit O HMI display L1 L2 voltage enable bit 1 HMI display L2 L3 voltage enable bit 2 HMI display L3 L1 voltage enable bit 3 HMI display average voltage enable bit 4 HMI display active power enable bit 5 HMI display power consumption enable bit 6 HMI display power factor enable bit 7 HMI display average current ratio enable bit 8 HMI display L1 current ratio enable bit 9 HMI display L2 current ratio enable bit 10 HMI display L3 current ratio enable bit 11 HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable bit 12 HMI display time to trip enable bit 13 HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable bit 14 HMI display date enable bit 15 HMI display time enable 655 658 Word 4 Date and time setting See DT_DateTime page 297 659 Word HMI display items register 3 bit O HMI display temperature sensor degree CF bits 1 15 Reserved 320 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 660 681 Reserved 682 Ulnt Network port fallback setting see DT_OutputFallbackStrategy page 300 683 Word Control setting regist
32. Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level 150 FLC Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level 160 FLC Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level 160 FLC 260 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Value List settings Alternatively after a setting is highlighted you can use the and S gt buttons to select only a single character within a field and edit that character as follows Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level 150 FLC Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level Fjsor FLc Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level Bs0 FLc Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level 250 FLC Py In a few cases a setting presents a list of value selections Selecting a value from the list is very much like incrementing or decrementing the entire value of a numerical setting as shown below Auto Group 1 Reset Time 0050 Auto Group 2 Auto Group 1 Attempts oal Reset Time 0050 Auto Group 2 Auto Group 1 Attempts 4 Reset Time 0050 Auto Group 2 1639501EN 04 09 2014 261 Use Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI in 1 to many configuration provides executable value write commands A value write command immediately executes a task The value write command line is identified by
33. Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage in 1 increments 85 Technical Characteristics The undervoltage function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a undervoltage fault v A Fault timeout Vs2 f rrr rt rr ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee Vs2 Undervoltage fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 111 Motor Protection Functions Overvoltage Description The overvoltage function signals e a warning when voltage in a phase exceeds a set threshold e a fault when voltage in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage Vnom parameter setting The overvoltage function is available in ready state and run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The overvoltage function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs
34. 469 Ulnt L3 current ratio FLC 470 Ulnt Ground current ratio x 0 1 FLC min 471 Ulnt Current phase imbalance 472 Int Controller internal temperature C 473 Ulnt Controller config checksum 474 Ulnt Frequency x 0 01 Hz 2 475 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor x 0 1 Q 476 Ulnt Average voltage V 1 477 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage V 1 478 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage V 1 479 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage V 1 480 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance 1 481 Ulnt Power factor x 0 01 1 482 Ulnt Active power x 0 1 kW 1 483 Ulnt Reactive power x 0 1 KVAR 1 484 Word Auto restart status register bit 0 Voltage dip occurred bit 1 Voltage dip detection bit 2 Auto restart immediate condition bit 3 Auto restart delayed condition bit 4 Auto restart manual condition bits 5 15 Not significant 485 Word Controller last power off duration 486 489 Word Not significant 490 Word Network port monitoring bit O Network port monitoring bit 1 Network port connected bit 2 Network port self testing bit 3 Network port self detecting bit 4 Network port bad config bits 5 15 Not significant 491 Ulnt Network port baud rate See DT_ExtBaudRate page 298 492 Not significant 493 Ulnt Network port parity See DT_ExtParity page 298 494 499 Not significant 500 501 UDint Average current x 0 01 A 502 503 UDint L1 current x 0 01 A 504 505 UDint L2 current x 0 01 A 506 507 UDint L3 current x 0 01 A 508 509 UDint Ground current mA 1639501EN 04 09 2014 313 Use
35. A command can be executed only when its text line has focus A text line has focus when the lt or gt at either end of the text line plus any additional command character is blinking The 1 to many menu structure presents 4 different kinds of command lines depending upon the command character if any next to the command line arrow as follows Command line characters Left Right Description 4 gt Links to a page With no character next to the blinking arrow click the e keypad button to move to the page indicated by the left arrow e D keypad button to move to the page indicated by the right arrow N A o gt or Toggle bit commands With a 0 or a 1 next to the blinking arrow click the gt keypad button to toggle the boolean setting value v gt Value write commands With a v next to the blinking arrow click the e keypad button to execute the command indicated by the left arrow e gt keypad button to execute the command indicated by the right arrow For example e Reset to Defaults Statistics e Reset to Defaults Settings e Self Test 2 gt Command cannot execute There is no connection between the HMI and the indicated LTM R controller 1639501EN 04 09 2014 257 Use Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many Overview Use the HMI keypad a V D and buttons to e scroll within a page e link to a page in
36. Metering and Monitoring Functions Time to Trip Description When a thermal overload condition exists the LTM R controller reports the time to trip before the fault occurs in the Time To Trip parameter When the LTM R controller is not in a thermal overload condition to avoid the appearance of being in a fault state the LTM R controller reports the time to trip as 9999 If the motor has an auxiliary fan and the Motor Aux Fan Cooled parameter has been set the cooling period is 4 times shorter Characteristics The time to trip function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit s Accuracy 10 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 100 ms LTM R Configuration Fault Description The LTM R controller checks the Load CT parameters set in configuration mode An LTM R configuration fault is detected when the Load CT Primary Load CT Secondary and Load CT Multiple Passes parameters are not consistent and generates a System and Device Monitoring Fault The fault condition is cleared once the parameters are correct The LTM R controller remains in configuration mode as long as the parameters are not consistent LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning Description The LTM R controller checks the presence of the LTM E expansion module Its absence generates a System and Device Monitoring Fault LTM E Configuration Fault LTM E configuration fault e IfLTM E based protection faults are
37. The current phase imbalance function has the following parameters Current phase imbalance fault motor starting Current phase imbalance fault motor running Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 10 70 of the calculated imbalance in 1 increments 10 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 10 70 of the calculated imbalance in 1 increments 10 NOTE A time of 0 7 second is added to the Fault timeout starting parameter to avoid nuisance tripping during the start phase Technical Characteristics The current phase imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of fault or warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639501EN 04 09 2014 85 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the detection of a current phase imbalance occurring during run state Al A 0 7 s Fault timeout starting Fault timeout running vane a Dae Is2 P Ss best i i Ae seem a Start state Run state Al Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average Is2 Fault threshold 86 1639501EN 04 09 2014
38. e 1 measure of ground current as a of FLCmin e Ground Current Ratio e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout 2 function outputs e Internal Ground Current Warning e Internal Ground Current Fault e 1 counting statistic e Ground Current Faults Count Internal ground current warning and fault gt I gt I s1 Internal ground current warning H i by 15 13 La I gt IZs2 T o intemal ground current fault a 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current I Summed current I s1 Warning threshold I s2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout 1639501EN 04 09 2014 99 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings The internal ground current function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Internal ground current fault timeout 0 5 25 s in 0 1 s increments 1s Internal ground current fault threshold 50 500 of FLCmin in 1 increments 50 of FLCmin Internal ground current warning threshold 50 500 of FLCmin in 1 increments 50 of FLCmin Technical Characteristics The internal ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5
39. 19 Wiring diagnostic 20 Overcurrent 21 Current phase loss 22 Current phase reversal 23 Motor temp sensor 24 Voltage phase imbalance 25 Voltage phase loss 26 Voltage phase reversal 27 Undervoltage 28 Overvoltage 29 Underpower 30 Overpower 31 Under power factor 32 Over power factor 33 LTME configuration 34 Temperature sensor short circuit 35 Temperature sensor open circuit 36 CT reversal 37 Out of boundary CT ratio 46 Start check 47 Run checkback 48 Stop check 49 Stop checkback 51 Controller internal temperature error 55 Controller internal error Stack overflow 56 Controller internal error RAM error 57 Controller internal error RAM checksum error 58 Controller internal error Hardware watchdog fault 60 L2 current detected in single phase mode 64 Non volatile memory error 65 Expansion module communication error 66 Stuck reset button 67 Logic function error 174 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Warning Codes Fault code Description 100 104 Network port internal error 109 Network port comm error 111 Faulty device replacement fault 555 Network port configuration error Each detected warning is identified by a numerical warning code Warning code Description 0 No warning 3 Ground current 4 Thermal overload 5 Long start 6 Jam 7 Current phase
40. 308 ratio 268 average current ratio 53 265 n 0 304 n 1 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 average voltage 36 53 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 C command clear all 41 176 230 322 clear controller settings 176 266 322 clear network port settings 177 322 clear statistics 51 176 266 322 clear thermal capacity level 66 169 176 322 fault reset 266 322 logic outputs register 322 motor low speed 159 322 motor run forward 149 151 154 159 322 motor run reverse 151 154 159 322 self test 322 332 332 statistics 41 commissioning first power up 230 introduction 228 verify configuration 239 verify wiring 237 communication configuration via engineering tool enable 353 via HMI keyboard enable 353 via network port enable 353 communication loss 46 config via HMI engineering tool enable 229 317 HMI keypad enable 229 317 HMI network port enable 229 network port enable 317 configurable settings 62 configuration checksum 46 configuration file 163 contactor rating 318 350 control direct transition 153 159 269 321 principles 143 register 1 322 register 2 322 setting register 321 transfer mode 321 control channels 132 133 HMI 133 network 134 selecting 133 terminal strip 133 control circuit 2 wire 144 3 wire 144 control local channel setting 269 321 control remote channel setting 321 360 local buttons enable 321 local default mode
41. 321 control transfer mode 134 269 control via HMI 310 control voltage characteristics LTM R controller 341 control wiring 144 1639501EN 04 09 2014 405 Index controller AC inputs configuration register 315 AC logic inputs configuration 315 altitude derating 342 commercial reference 278 302 compatibility code 302 config checksum 373 firmware version 302 ID code 302 internal fault 40 internal faults count 53 internal temperature 47 373 internal temperature max 41 276 303 internal temperature warning enable 47 last power off duration 373 port ID 314 power 370 serial number 302 system config required 230 317 controller internal faults count 276 counters communication loss 53 internal faults 53 current average 32 313 ground 313 L1 373 L2 313 L3 313 phase imbalance 268 range max 302 scale ratio 302 sensor max 302 current highest imbalance L1 314 L2 314 L3 314 current phase imbalance 33 53 84 313 fault enable 85 271 355 fault threshold 85 271 317 355 fault timeout running 85 271 317 355 fault timeout starting 85 271 317 355 faults count 52 276 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 warning enable 85 271 355 warning threshold 85 271 317 355 current phase loss 87 fault enable 88 271 355 fault timeout 355 faults count 52 timeout 88 271 315 warning enable 88 271 355 current phase reversal 89 fault enable 8
42. Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overcurrent fault Start state Run state Fault condition ht m a Is2 a f o nnan r eee Fee ae ees current fault timeout Is2 Overcurrent fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 97 Motor Protection Functions Ground Current Overview The LTM R controller can be configured to detect ground current e internally by summing the 3 phase current signals from the secondary of the internal current transformers see page 99 e externally by measuring the current delivered by the secondary of an external ground fault current transformer see page 107 Use the Ground Current Mode parameter to select either internal or external ground fault protection Only one of these ground current mode settings can be activated at a time Parameter Settings The ground current protection function has the following configurable parameter settings which apply to both internal and external ground current protection Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Ground current mode Internal Internal External Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Ground fault disabled while starting Enable Disable Enable 98 1639501EN 04 09 2014
43. Not significant Last Fault n 0 Statistics Extension The last fault main statistics are listed at addresses 150 179 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 300 301 UDint Average current n 0 x 0 01 A 302 303 UDint L1 current n 0 x 0 01 A 304 305 UDint L2 current n 0 x 0 01 A 306 307 UDint L3 current n 0 x 0 01 A 308 309 UDint Ground current n 0 mA 310 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree n 0 C 1639501EN 04 09 2014 307 Use N 1 Fault Statistics Extension The n 1 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 180 209 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 330 331 UDInt Average current n 1 x 0 01 A 332 333 UDInt L1 current n 1 x 0 01 A 334 335 UDInt L2 current n 1 x 0 01 A 336 337 UDInt L3 current n 1 x 0 01 A 338 339 UDInt Ground current n 1 mA 340 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree n 1 C N 2 Fault Statistics Extension The n 2 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 210 239 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 360 361 UDInt Average current n 2 x 0 01 A 362 363 UDInt L1 current n 2 x 0 01 A 364 365 UDInt L2 current n 2 x 0 01 A 366 367 UDInt L3 current n 2 x 0 01 A 368 369 UDInt Ground current n 2 mA 370 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree n 2 C N 3 Fault Statistics Extension The n 3 fault main
44. Power Underpower RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Overpower RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Under Power Factor RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Over Power Factor RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Communication Loss PLC to LTM R RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 LTM E to LTM R RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 1639501EN 04 09 2014 171 Motor Control Functions Remote Reset Introduction Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Remote adds resetting faults from the PLC over the LTM R network port This provides centralized monitoring and control of equipment installations The Control channel parameter selection determines the available reset methods Both manual reset methods and remote reset methods reset a fault Remote Reset Methods The LTM R controller provides the following remote reset methods Protection Category Monitored Fault Control Channel Terminal Strip HMI Network Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Wiring configuratio
45. Under Power Factor 2 222 006 0020 Ge tiet bia eee eee ede eee wa ee 126 Over Power FactONec c 2024 22 04 250864 ORR ES PERS ati iiare Ea ia BARE Ee eT StS eR 128 Chapter 4 Motor Control Functions 0 000 c cee ee 131 4 1 Control Channels and Operating States 0 00000 eee 132 Control Channels 2 02 25 o ecs dae tea aveeaaedeade ve Gnd awenta Gens Paes ga ale a ni 133 Operating States 2 2 ened eee eee bee bee ee ee ee ee a eee oe 136 Slam CVCE shires ee ana rae aids anchor eh avd aren vane a E E tabi ne Lad ae ih Ree are 139 4 2 Operating Modes 00 eee eens 142 Control PhinCipl S 4 4 cua eee teas ead ae A Meee Aad heed E Aah 143 Predefined Operating Modes 00 cee teens 144 Control Wiring and Fault Management 000 eee 146 1639501EN 04 09 2014 4 3 Chapter 5 5 1 5 2 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 Overload Operating Mode Independent Operating Mode 0 cect ttt Reverser Operating Mode Two Step Operating Mode Two Speed Operating Mode 0 0 cette Custom Operating Mode Fault Management and Clear Commands 00000 0c eect eee eee eeaes Fault Management Introduction 00000 c cee eee Manual Reset Automatic Reset Remote Reset Fault and Warning Codes LTM R Controller Clear Commands 0 000 cece eee eee eee eee eens Installations
46. X X Stop Command Check X X Run Check Back X X Stop Check Back x x X Monitored Not monitored 1639501EN 04 09 2014 165 Motor Control Functions Protection Category Monitored Fault LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E Saved On Power Loss Wiring configuration errors PTC connection X X CT Reversal X X Voltage Phase Reversal X Current Phase Reversal x Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration Internal Stack Overflow Watchdog ROM Checksum EEROM CPU Internal Temperature Motor temp sensor PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog Thermal overload Definite Inverse Thermal Current Long Start Jam Current Phase Imbalance XIX X X X X X X X X XxX x Xx x XxX Xx XIX X X X XIXI X X X x Xx x x Xx x Xx XX X X X OK XI X Xx Current Phase Loss Overcurrent Undercurrent Internal Ground Current Xx Xx X Xx XxX X X Xx X X X External Ground Current x x x Voltage Overvoltage x x Undervoltage x x Voltage Phase Imbalance x x Power Underpower Overpower Under Power Factor Over Power Factor Communication loss PLC to LTM R HMI to LTM R x K XxX XxX Xx Xx Kx K K XxX X Xx
47. e e control the motor e container e aPC separate power source configure the system through menu entries display parameters warnings and faults enable customization of operating modes Additional components required for the SoMove FDT e LTMR LTME LTM CU to PC communication cables SoMove with the TeSys T DTM TCSMCNAM3M002P cable kit Load Current Transformers External load current transformers expand the current range for use with motors greater than 100 full load Amperes Schneider Electric Load Primary Secondary Inside Diameter Reference Number Current Transformers mm in ETS 100 1 35 1 38 LT6CT1001 200 1 35 1 38 LT6CT2001 i 400 1 35 1 38 LT6CT4001 gt 800 1 35 1 38 LT6CT8001 Note The following current transformers are also available Schneider Electric LUTC0301 LUTC0501 LUTC1001 LUTC2001 LUTC4001 and LUTC8001 Lug lug kit provides bus bars and lug terminals that adapt the pass through wiring windows and provide line and load terminations for the power circuit Square D Lug lug Kit Description Reference Number Square D Lug lug Kit MLPL9999 Ground Fault Current Transformers External ground fault current transformers measure ground fault conditions Schneider Electric Vi
48. e Overpower Faults Count Overpower warning and fault Vavg lavg te Power Factor jm Vavg Average rms voltage lavg Average rms current P Power Ps1 Warning threshold Ps2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout Runstate ___ amp Overpower warning m P gt Psi AND E aan P gt Ps2 a amp T o p Overpower fault Run state AND The overpower function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments 150 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments 150 124 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Technical Characteristics The overpower function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overpower fault P A PRE oe eee Ses eee eee ees Fault timeout td Ps2 Overpower fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 125 Motor Protection Functions Under Power Factor Description The under power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and si
49. e Overvoltage Warning e Overvoltage Fault e 1 counting statistic e Overvoltage Faults Count Overvoltage warning and fault Ready state m 21 pom Run state R Overvoltage warning OR J vi Vmax gt Vs1 V2 e Vmax AND V3 Vmax gt Vs2 gt amp all t Overvoltage fault Ready state Run state a AND OR V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout 112 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings The overvoltage function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage in 1 increments 110 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage in 1 increments 110 Technical Characteristics The overvoltage function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overvoltage fault Fault timeout lt _ _ _ _ Vs2 Overvoltage fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 113 Motor Prot
50. e Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions e System control paths may include communication links Consideration must be given to the implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of the link e Each implementation of an LTM R controller must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation before being placed into service Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1 For additional information refer to NEMAICS 1 1 latest edition Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control A WARNING UNEXPECTED RESTART OF THE MOTOR Check that the PLC application software e considers the change from local to remote control e manages appropriately the motor control commands during those changes When switching to the Network control channels depending on the communication protocol configuration the LTM R controller can take into account the latest known state of the motor control commands issued from the PLC and restart automatically the motor Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Modbus Protocol Principle 287 Configuration of the LTM R Modbus Network Port 288
51. formulas Calculated Measurement Formula Active power for three phase motor 8 x lavg x Vavg x cos Active power for single phase motor lavg x Vavg x cos Where lavg Average rms current e Vavg Average rms voltage The reactive power measurement is derived from the following formulas Calculated Measurement Formula Reactive power for three phase motor 8 x lavg x Vavg x sing Reactive power for single phase motor lavg x Vavg x sing Where lavg Average rms current e Vavg Average rms voltage Characteristics The active and reactive power functions have the following characteristics Characteristic Active Power Reactive Power Unit kW kVAR Accuracy 15 15 Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kVAR Refresh interval 100 ms 100 ms Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption Description The active and reactive power consumption functions display the accumulated total of the active and reactive electrical power delivered and used or consumed by the load Characteristics The active and reactive power consumption functions have the following characteristics Characteristic Active Power Consumption Reactive Power Consumption Unit kWh kVARh Accuracy 15 15 Resolution 0 1 kWh 0 1 KVARh Refresh interval 100 ms 100 ms 38 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering an
52. ignored no exception returned if the LTM R controller is out of the Sys Config State The write to the bits not constrained by the LTM R controller state shall however occur Exception Code 02 Illegal Data Address In general the LTM R controller shall return an illegal data address exception code if the address is out of range or inaccessible Specifically the LTM R controller shall return an illegal data address if e A Write request is sent to a Read only register e The permission to write a register is not granted because of the LTM R controller state this is the case for example when a register that can be written only in configuration mode is written while the LTM R controller is out of Sys Config state Exception Code 03 Illegal Data Value In general the LTM R controller shall return an illegal data value exception code if there is a problem with the structure of the message such as an invalid length The LTM R controller shall also use this exception code if e The data to be written is out of range for standard and bit field registers this is the case if a write request of 100 is sent to a R W register with a range of 0 to 50 e A reserved bit or register is written to a value different than 0 e Motor low speed command bit 704 6 is set while the motor controller mode selected is not a two speed mode of operation 292 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use User Map Variables User Defined Indirect Registers Ov
53. impulse independent mode A1 A2 Start A1 A2 LTM R controller power supply B1 B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs LTM R Controller Plug in Terminals and Pin Assignments The LTM R controller has the following plug in terminals and pin assignments Terminal Block Pin Description Control voltage logic input and A1 Supply voltage input 3 common source terminals A2 The negative of a power supply for DC models or the grounded secondary of a control power transformer for AC models 3 1 1 Logic input 1 1 2 Logic input 2 1 3 Logic input 3 1 4 Logic input 4 1 5 Logic input 5 1 6 Logic input 6 C Input common 0 4 Logic output terminals 97 98 NO contact 95 96 NC contact Note The 97 98 contacts and the 95 96 contacts are on the same relay so the open closed status of one pair of contacts is always the opposite of the status of the other pair 194 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Terminal Block Pin Description 0 1 to 0 3 Logic output terminals 13 14 NO contact logic output 1 23 24 NO contact logic output 2 33 34 NO contact logic output 3 Ground fault input and Z1 Z2 Connection for external ground fault current transformer temperature sensor input T1 T2 Connection for motor temperature sensors LTM E Expansion Module Plug in Terminals and Pin Assignments The LTM E expansion module has the fo
54. oii occ ao eece siano Saeed alee aid eck eee eed we ee Installation General Principles Dimensions Assembly Mounting Wiring Generalities Wiring Current Transformers CTS 0 00 0 c cece teenies Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers 00 0000 e eects Wiring Temperature Sensors 0 0 00 Wiring Power Supply Wiring Logic Inputs Wiring Logic Outputs Connecting to an HMI Device 1 2 teens Wiring of the Modbus Network 0 0 0 c cect tees Modbus Network Characteristics 2 0 eee Modbus Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics 00055 Wiring of the Modbus Network 0 0 e eet teens COMMISSIONING is saeide ders ievnds ie et do eeied imei ekw ees Introduction First Power up Required and Optional Parameters 0 0 0 0 ccc teens FLC Full Load Current Settings 0 0 0 cette Modbus Communication CHECKING esat 2 cient baled ata Sek boxe Sieve betas aE hee eeee Verifying System Wiring Verify Configuration Using the LTM R Controller Stand Alone 0 0 0 Hardware Configurations Stand Alone Configuration Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit 0 0 0 0 eee ee Presentation of the LTM CU Control Operator Unit 0 00 c eee eee eee Contiguration of the HMI POE eac 25 064 clive ci Seeeled dua
55. the relevant instructions must be followed Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in injury harm or improper operating results Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage 2014 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Safety Information About the Book Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System 0 000 eee eee ee System Selection Guide Physical Description of the LTM R Modbus Controller 0 0 00 c eee eee eee Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module 0 000 c eee eee Metering and Monitoring Functions 000 eee eee eee Measurement Line Currents Ground Current Average Current Current Phase Imbalance 0 0 ccc eee eee eens Thermal Capacity Level Motor Temperature Sensor 1 0 0 cette eee Frequency Line to Line Voltages Line Voltage Imbalance Average Voltage Power Factor Active Power and Reactive Power 0 00 c eee etna Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption 04 System and Device Monitoring Faults 0 0 0 ete ee Controller Internal Fault Controller Inter
56. voltage or thermal resistance must rise above or fall below a threshold setting e the monitored value must remain above or below the threshold setting for a specified time duration Counters When a fault occurs the LTM R controller increments at least 2 counters e acounter for the specific fault detecting function and e acounter for all faults When a warning occurs the LTM R controller increments a single counter for all warnings However when the LTM R controller detects a thermal overload warning it also increments the thermal overload warnings counter A counter contains a value from 0 to 65 535 and increments by a value of 1 when a fault warning or reset event occurs A counter stops incrementing when it reaches a value of 65 535 When a fault is automatically reset the LTM R controller increments only the auto resets counter Counters are saved on power loss Clearing Counters All fault and warning counters are reset to 0 by executing the Clear Statistics Command or Clear All Command All Faults Counter Description The Faults Count parameter contains the number of faults that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed The Faults Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any fault All Warnings Counter Description The Warnings Count parameter contains the number of warnings that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last execute
57. x 100 lavg Imbalance ratio of current in phase 3 in li3 L3 lavg x 100 lavg Current imbalance ratio for three phase in limb Max li1 li2 1i3 Characteristics The line current imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy e 1 5 for 8 A and 27 A models e 3 for 100 A models Resolution 1 Refresh interval 100 ms Thermal Capacity Level Description The thermal capacity level function uses two thermal models to calculate the amount of thermal capacity used one for copper stator and rotor windings of the motor and the other for the iron frame of the motor The thermal model with the maximum utilized capacity is reported This function also estimates and displays e the time remaining before a thermal overload fault is triggered see Time to Trip page 48 and e the time remaining until the fault condition is cleared after a thermal overload fault has been triggered see Minimum Wait Time page 58 Trip Current Characteristics The thermal capacity level function uses one of the following selected trip current characteristics TCCs e definite time e inverse thermal factory setting Thermal Capacity Level Models Both copper and iron models use the maximum measured phase current and the Motor Trip Class parameter value to generate a non scaled thermal image The reported thermal capacity level is calculated by
58. 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 thermal overload 65 configuration 315 definite time 70 fault 68 fault definite timeout 71 271 315 fault enable 65 271 354 354 fault reset mode 165 fault reset threshold 68 165 271 317 354 fault reset timeout 165 fault timeout 354 faults count 52 68 70 276 inverse thermal 66 mode 65 315 354 motor class 354 time to trip 48 warning 68 warning enable 65 271 354 354 warning threshold 68 71 271 317 354 warnings count 52 68 70 276 time stamp 332 time to trip 48 268 314 U under power factor 126 fault enable 126 274 359 fault threshold 126 274 316 359 359 fault timeout 126 274 316 359 faults count 52 warning enable 126 274 359 warning threshold 126 274 316 359 undercurrent 94 fault enable 94 272 356 fault threshold 94 272 317 356 fault timeout 94 272 317 356 faults count 52 276 warning enable 94 272 356 warning threshold 94 272 317 356 1639501EN 04 09 2014 413 Index underpower 122 fault enable 122 274 359 fault threshold 122 274 316 359 fault timeout 122 274 316 359 faults count 52 warning enable 122 274 359 warning threshold 122 274 316 359 undervoltage 110 fault enable 111 273 357 fault threshold 117 273 316 357 fault timeout 177 273 316 357 faults count 52 276 warning enable 111 273 357 warning threshold 177 273 316
59. 1 8 1 9 1 10 Test Reset SSISSSHSSG SSSSSS 21 22 Ti T2 SSSI This section describes how to assemble the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module in a switchboard If it is not possible to mount the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module side by side e Use only the shielded cables LTM9CEXP03 2 or LTM9CEXP10 3 cables to connect them e Ground the shielded cable e Separate the LTM9CEXP connection cables from all other power or control cables to avoid EMC disturbance 1m max 39 37 in max Sen w Power 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 c8 7 C7 18 Test Reset JOSSS SS 184 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Mounting a Contactor Close to the LTM R Controller The mounting recommendations of contactors close to LTM R controller are as follows e Mount a contactor at a distance of more than 10 cm 3 94 in from the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module e lf this is not possible mount the contactor on the right side of the LTM R controller The contactor must be mounted according to the clearance zone dimensions SVIIISHHSYS NOS al A2 1 C i213 C 1415 C lt lt A Do not mount a contactor in this zone an Mount a contactor in this zone if you cannot do otherwise 1639501EN 04 09 2014 185 Instal
60. 110 Ulnt Controller internal faults count 111 Ulnt Internal port faults count 112 Ulnt Not significant 113 Ulnt Network port config faults count 114 Ulnt Network port faults count 115 Ulnt Auto resets count 116 Ulnt Thermal overload warnings count 117 118 UDint Motor starts count 119 120 UDint Operating time s 121 Int Controller internal temperature max C 1639501EN 04 09 2014 303 Use LTM Monitoring Statistics The LTM monitoring statistics are described below Last Fault n 0 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 122 Ulnt Faults count 123 Ulnt Warnings count 124 125 UDInt Motor LO1 closings count 126 127 UDInt Motor LO2 closings count 128 Ulnt Diagnostic faults count 129 Ulnt Reserved 130 Ulnt Overcurrent faults count 131 Ulnt Current phase loss faults count 132 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor faults count 133 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance faults count 1 134 Ulnt Voltage phase loss faults count 1 135 Ulnt Wiring faults count 1 136 Ulnt Undervoltage faults count 1 137 Ulnt Overvoltage faults count 1 138 Ulnt Underpower faults count 1 139 Ulnt Overpower faults count 1 140 Ulnt Under power factor faults count 1 141 Ulnt Over power factor faults count 1 142 Ulnt Load sheddings count 1 143 144 UDInt Active power consumption x 0 1 kWh 1 145 146 UDInt R
61. 2 0 3 33 and 34 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Independent operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI Keys 2 Wire Maintained Assignment 3 Wire Impulse Assignment Aux 1 Control motor Start motor Aux 2 Control 0 2 Close 0 2 Stop Stop motor and open O 2 while pressed Stop motor and open O 2 Timing Sequence The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Independent operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration 1 1 Start 1 2 optional 1 4 Stop Yi y y d 0 1 KM1 Y y y 0 2 optional T a gt 1 Normal operation 2 Start command ignored stop command active Parameters Independent operating mode requires no associated parameters 150 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Reverser Operating Mode Description Use Reverser operating mode in direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Functional Characteristics This function includes the following features Accessible in 3 control channels Terminal Strip HMI and Network Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of the O 1 forward and O 2 reverse logic outputs in case of simultaneous forward and reverse commands only the logic output O 1 forwar
62. 25 s in increments of 0 1 s 1s External ground current fault threshold 0 01 20 A in increments of 0 01 A 1A External ground current fault timeout 0 1 25 s in increments of 0 01 s 0 5s Ground Current warning enable e Disable Enable e Enable Internal ground current warning threshold 50 500 FLCmin in increments of 1 50 FLCmin External ground current warning threshold 0 01 20 A in increments of 0 01 A 1A Parameters Setting range Factory setting Current phase imbalance fault enable e Disable Enable e Enable Current phase imbalance fault threshold 10 70 in increments of 1 10 Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in increments of 0 1 s 0 7 s Current phase imbalance fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in increments of 0 1 s 5s Current phase imbalance warning enable Disable Disable e Enable Current phase imbalance warning threshold 10 70 in increments of 1 10 Current phase loss fault enable Disable Enable e Enable Current phase loss timeout 0 1 30 s in increments of 0 1 s 3s Current phase loss warning enable e Disable Enable e Enable Current phase reversal fault enable Disable Disable e Enable Parameters Setting range Factory setting Long start fault enable e Disable Enable e Enable Long start fault threshold 100 800 FLC in increments of 1 100 FLC Long start fault timeout 1 200 s i
63. 3 The logic output O 1 and O 2 commands are accessible in Network control channel e Logic output 0 4 opens in response to a diagnostic error NOTE In Overload operating mode diagnostic error is disabled by default If needed it can be enabled by the user e The LTM R controller sets a bit in a status word when it detects an active signal e on logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 or 1 4 or e from the Aux 1 Aux 2 or Stop buttons on the HMI keypad NOTE When a bit is set in the input status word it can be read by a PLC which can write a bit to the LTM R controllers command word When the LTM R controller detects a bit in its command word it can turn on the respective output or outputs Overload Application Diagram The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control overload application 3a p A1 A2 B2 B1 For additional examples of overload operating mode IEC diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams page 365 For examples of overload operating mode NEMA diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams page 384 1639501EN 04 09 2014 147 Motor Control Functions VO Assignment Overload operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic Inputs Assignment 1 1 Free 1 2 Free 1 3 Free 1 4 Free 1 5 Reset 1 6 Local 0 or Remote 1 Overload operating mo
64. 3 Y Y Y Y Where e S second The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 59 in BCD e 0 unused e H hour The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 23 in BCD e m minute The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 59 in BCD e M month The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 01 12 in BCD e D day The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is in BCD 01 31 for months 01 03 05 07 08 10 12 01 30 for months 04 06 09 11 01 29 for month 02 in a leap year 01 28 for month 02 in a non leap year e Y year The format is 4 Binary Coded Decimal BCD digits The value range is 2006 2099 in BCD Data entry format and value range are Data entry format DT YYYY MM DD HH mm ss Minimum value DT 2006 01 01 00 00 00 January 1 2006 Maximum value DT 2099 12 31 23 59 59 December 31 2099 Note If you give values outside the limits the system will return an error Example Addresses 655 to 658 Word 4 Date and Time setting If date is September 4 2008 at 7 a m 50 minutes and 32 seconds Register 15 12 118 74 30 655 3 2 0 0 656 0 7 5 0 657 0 9 0 4 658 2 0 0 8 With data entry format DT 2008 09 04 07 50 32 1639501EN 04 09 2014 297 Use DT_ExtBaudRate DT_ExtParity DT_ExtbaudRate depends on the bus used DT_ModbusExtBaudRate format is an enume
65. 357 use 241 LTM R controller alone 242 programming the Magelis XBTN410 249 user map addresses 293 addresses setting 323 values 293 323 V voltage average 36 268 313 L1 L2 35 268 313 L2 L3 35 268 313 L3 L1 35 268 313 phase imbalance 268 313 voltage dip configuration 316 detection 313 mode 316 358 occurred 313 restart threshold 115 117 275 316 358 358 restart timeout 115 117 275 316 358 358 threshold 115 117 275 316 358 358 voltage dip mode 117 voltage highest imbalance L1 L2 314 L2 L3 314 L3 L1 314 voltage imbalance 35 voltage mode 115 voltage phase imbalance 35 53 104 fault enable 105 273 357 fault threshold 105 273 316 357 fault timeout running 105 273 316 357 fault timeout starting 105 273 316 357 faults count 52 276 n 0 277 305 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 307 n 4 307 warning enable 105 273 357 warning threshold 105 273 316 357 voltage phase loss 107 fault enable 108 273 357 fault timeout 108 273 316 357 faults count 52 warning enable 108 273 357 voltage phase reversal 109 fault enable 109 273 357 faults count 52 89 109 W warning controller internal temperature 312 current phase imbalance 312 current phase loss 312 current phase reversal 312 diagnostic 312 ground current 312 HMI port 372 jam 312 LTM E configuration 312 motor temperature sensor 312 network port 312 over power fact
66. 48 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F780 50 AC 110 120 127 AC 265 277 380 200 208 220 240 415 480 500 52 DC 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F800 15 AC 110 127 220 240 AC 380 440 25 DC 110 127 220 240 380 440 1 Dual parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay 2 Control circuit frequency may be 40 400 Hz but power to contactors monitored by CTs must be 50 Hz or 60 Hz in frequency NEMA Type S Contactors Catalog references and characteristics for NEMA Type S contactors are listed in the table below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required NEMA size VA maintained Control Circuit Coil voltages max Frequency interposing relay not interposing relay required Hz required 00 33 50 60 00 0 1 27 2 37 24 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 38 3 47 4 33 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 5 15 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 6 59 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 7 348 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Appendix B Configurable Parameters Overview The configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module are described below The sequence of parameter configuration depends on the configuration tool utilized either an HMI device or SoMove with the TeSys T DTM Parameters are grouped according
67. 6500 Q 5 44 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Characteristic Value Resolution 0 1Q Refresh interval 100 ms The fixed thresholds for the open circuit and short circuit detection functions are Detection Function Fixed Results For PTC Binary or PT100 or Accuracy PTC NTC Analog threshold 15Q 10 Short circuit detection re closing 20 Q 10 threshold 6500 Q 5 Open circuit detection re closing 6000 Q 5 1639501EN 04 09 2014 45 Metering and Monitoring Functions Configuration Checksum Description The LTM R controller calculates a checksum of parameters based on all configuration registers The EEPROM error code 64 is reported Communication Loss Description The LTM R controller monitors communication through e the network port e the HMI port Network Port Parameter Settings The LTM R controller monitors network communication creates both a fault and a warning report when the network communications are lost On LTM R Version LTMResMes the communication loss is detected if no communication exchanges occurred for a time period equal to or longer than the network port comm loss timeout The network port communications have the following configurable settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Network port fault enable Enable Disable Enable Network port w
68. CT Ratio Load CT Primary e Load CT Secondary e Load CT Multiple Passes Confirm that the Load CT Ratio parameter or the combination of Load CT Primary and Load CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the intended load CT ratio Visually confirm that the Load CT Multiple Passes parameter accurately reflects the number of passes the wiring makes through the LTM R controller s embedded CT windows 1639501EN 04 09 2014 237 Commissioning Diagnostic Wiring I O Wiring Look at Action The following load motor parameter setting using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e Motor Phases Visually confirm that the motor and LTM R controller are wired for the number of phases set in the Motor Phases parameter The following load motor parameter setting using either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display of the HMI device e Motor Phases Sequence If the motor is a 3 phase motor visually check that the phase wiring sequence matches the Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting Verify the wiring for any motor temperature sensing device or external ground current transformer if the application includes these devices by checking the following Look at Action The wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagram The external ground CT specifications and The following ground CT
69. Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an internal ground current fault occurring during run state E a Start state Run state Fault condition T q p a gt t I s2 internal ground current fault threshold 100 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions External Ground Current Description The external ground current function is enabled when e the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to External and e acurrent transformation ratio is set When Ground Current Mode is set to Internal the external ground current function is disabled A A DANGER IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION External ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury The LTM R controller has 2 terminals Z1 and Z2 that can be connected to an external ground current transformer The external ground current function measures ground current delivered by the secondary of the external current transformer and signals e a warning when the delivered current exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the delivered current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time The external ground current function has a single fault time
70. Functions Long Start Description Start Cycle The long start function detects a locked or stalled rotor in start state and signals a fault when current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for the same period of time Each predefined operating mode has its own current profile representing a successful start cycle for the motor The LTM R controller detects a long start fault condition whenever the actual current profile occurring after a start command varies from the expected profile Fault monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled This function has no warning The configurable parameters for the Long Start protection function Long Start Fault Threshold and Long Start Fault Timeout are used by the LTM R controller in defining and detecting the motor s start cycle See Start Cycle page 139 Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Parameter Settings The long start function includes the following features e 1 threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 1 function outputs e Long Start Fault e 1 counting statistic e Long Start Faults Count Long start fault 1 12 w lavg l lavg gt s2 1 amp T O __ Long start fault 13 S Start state AND 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The long start function has the following parameters
71. HMI port of the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion module IS Front view D1 DO t Common The RJ45 wiring layout is Pin no Signal Description 1 Reserved Do not connect 2 Reserved Do not connect 3 Not connected 4 D1 or D B Communication between HMI and LTM R controller 5 DO or D A Communication between HMI and LTM R controller 6 Reserved Do not connect 7 VP 7 VDC 100 mA power supply provided by the LTM R controller 8 Common Signal and power supply common 214 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Connecting to a PC Running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM in 1 to 1 Mode Using the HMI Port The diagrams below show a 1 to 1 connection from a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to the HMI port of the LTM R controller with and without the LTM E expansion module and the LTM CU kwWND NO ohWHD PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM TCSMCNAM3M0 Modbus USB RJ45 cable LTM R controller LTM E expansion module 4 3 SIGI GIGS SOOSSGS99GG HHQ Tim PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM Cable kit TCSMCNAM3M002P LTM R controller LTM E expansion module LTM CU Control Operator Unit Grounding collar LTM9CUss HMI device connection cable 16395
72. KM3 KM2 A1 A2 Start Stop 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks 0 1 and O 2 For additional examples of two step Wye Delta IEC diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams page 373 For examples of two step Wye Delta NEMA diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams page 392 1639501EN 04 09 2014 155 Motor Control Functions Two Step Primary Resistor Application Diagram The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two step 3 wire impulse terminal strip control primary resistance application 3a i A1 A2 Start For additional examples of two step primary resistor IEC diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams page 375 For examples of two step primary resistor NEMA diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams page 394 156 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Two Step Autotransformer Application Diagram The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two step 3 wire impulse terminal strip control autotransformer application 3a pm A1 A2 Start Stop E oo eee ee ee er 1 TheN C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LT
73. L1 current A e 1 for 8 A and 27 A models No L2 current A e 2 for 100 A models L3 current A L1 current ratio FLC L2 current ratio FLC L3 current ratio FLC Ground current ratio FLCmin Internal ground current No 10 to 20 for ground current greater than e 0 1A0n8A models e 0 2 Aon 27 A models e 0 3 A on 100 A models e External ground current greater of 5 or 0 01 A Average current A e 1 for 8 A and 27 A models No Average current ratio Y FLCmin e 2 for 100 A models Current phase imbalance imb e 1 5 for 8 A and 27 A models No e 3 for 100 A models Thermal capacity level trip level 1 No Time to trip s 10 No Minimum wait time s 1 No Motor temperature sensor Q 2 No Controller internal temperature C 4 No Frequency Hz 2 No L1 L2 voltage V 1 No L2 L3 voltage V L3 L1 voltage V Voltage phase imbalance imb 1 5 No Average voltage V 1 No Power factor cos 10 No Active power kW 15 No Reactive power kVAR 15 No Active power consumption kWh 15 No Reactive power consumption kVARh 15 No 1 Note The accuracy levels presented in this table are typical accuracy levels Actual accuracy levels may be lower or greater than these values Parameter Accuracy Value saved on power loss Motor starts count t 1 Yes Motor LO1 closin
74. LTM R controller DC power supply must have the following characteristics e AC DC converter galvanic isolation input AC output DC 4 KVAC minimum at 50 Hz input voltage 240 VAC 15 20 output voltage 24 VDC 10 A1 A2 The following Schneider Electric ABL8RPS24 power supplies are recommended Reference Number Input Voltage Output Voltage Current Maximum Number of LTM R Controllers Supplied ABL8RPS24100 200 500 VAC 24 VDC 10A 24 ABL8RPS24050 200 500 VAC 24 VDC 5A 12 ABL8RPS24030 200 500 VAC 24 VDC 3A 8 204 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation AC Power Supply A dedicated AC AC power supply or UPS is necessary to supply e one or several LTM R controllers including the logic inputs of the LTM R controller s e the logic inputs of the LTM E expansion module s An additional specific AC or DC power supply is necessary to supply e the LTM R controller logic outputs e other devices The LTM R controller AC power supply or UPS must have the following characteristics e isolation transformer e output voltage 115 or 230 VAC 15 20 e 115 VAC output voltage is recommended e with 230 VAC output voltage an additional LTM9F external filter may be necessary see page 205 power according to the number of LTM R controllers several AC supplies are recommended 1s m L N AC Power Supply With LTM9F External Filter The LTM9F external filter is a power filter d
75. Load CT primary Load CT secondary Passes Current sensor max Current range max Load CT ratio Current range max is determined by the LTM R controller commercial reference It is stored in units of 0 1 A and has one of the following values 8 0 27 0 or 100 0 A Contactor rating is stored in units of 0 1 A and is set by the user between 1 0 and 1000 0 A FLCmax is defined as the lower of the Current sensor max and the Contactor rating values FLCmin Current sensor max 20 rounded to the nearest 0 01 A FLCmin is stored internally in units of 0 01 A NOTE e The modification of the Contactor rating and or Load CT ratio modifies the value of the FLC e Do not set the FLC below the FLCmin Conversion of Amperes to FLC Settings FLC values are stored as a percentage of FLCmax FLC in FLC in A FLCmax NOTE FLC values must be expressed as a percentage of FLCmax resolution of 1 If you enter an unauthorized value the LTM R will round it up to the nearest authorized value For example on a 0 4 8 A unit the step between FLCs is 0 08 A If you try to set an FLC of 0 43 A the LTM R will round it up to 0 4 A Example 1 No External CTs Data FLC in A 0 43 A Current range max 8 0 A Load CT primary 1 Load CT secondary 1 Passes 1 Contactor rating 810 0 A Calculated parameters with 1 pass e Load CT ratio Load CT primary Load CT secondary passes 1 1 1 1 0 Current sensor max
76. Long start 6 Jam 7 Current phase imbalance 8 Undercurrent 10 HMI port 11 LTM R internal temperature 18 Diagnostic 19 Wiring 20 Overcurrent 21 Current phase loss 23 Motor temp sensor 24 Voltage phase imbalance 25 Voltage phase loss 27 Undervoltage 28 Overvoltage 29 Underpower 30 Overpower 31 Under power factor 32 Over power factor 33 LTM E configuration 46 Start check 47 Run checkback 48 Stop check 49 Stop checkback 109 Network port comm loss 555 Network port configuration 1639501EN 04 09 2014 301 Use Identification Variables Identification Variables Identification variables are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 0 34 Not significant 35 40 Word 6 Expansion commercial reference 1 See DT_CommercialReference page 296 41 45 Word 5 Expansion serial number 1 46 Ulnt Expansion ID code 47 Ulnt Expansion firmware version 1 See DT_FirmwareVersion page 300 48 Ulnt Expansion compatibility code 1 49 60 Not significant 61 Ulnt Network port ID code 62 Ulnt Network port firmware version See DT_FirmwareVersion page 300 63 Ulnt Network port compatibility code 64 69 Word 6 Controller commercial reference See DT_CommercialReference page 296 70 74 Word 5 Controller serial number 75 Ulnt Controller ID code 76 Ulnt Controller firmware version See DT_FirmwareVersion page 3
77. Page 1 to many page 268 1639501EN 04 09 2014 279 Use Fault Management 1 to many Overview When a fault occurs the Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically opens a fault display consisting of 1 page for each active fault Each page contains the e fault name e address of the LTM R controller experiencing the fault e total number of unresolved faults Fault Display Pages A typical fault display page looks like this Q 2 2 ayz THERMAL OVERLOAD Controller 1 lt 4 fault display page number total number of active faults fault name flashing address of LTM R controller experiencing the fault flashing khOwOhD If more than 1 fault is active use the S and keypad buttons to move back and forth through the fault display pages Because some fault messages contain more than 4 lines of text you may need to use the a and V keypad buttons to scroll up and down within a fault display page and display the entire fault message Opening Closing the Fault Display The 1 to many HMI automatically opens the fault display whenever a fault occurs When you remove the cause of a specific fault and execute a fault reset command that fault no longer appears in the fault display You can also close the fault display by clicking the keypad button This does not fix the underlying cause of any fault nor it does not clear any fault You can re open the fault display at any time by navi
78. Phase Imbalance Power Power Factor Over Power Factor Level Under Power Factor Level Overpower Level mK X X X X X X X X XxX KY x Xx Underpower Level X Monitored Not monitored 138 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Start Cycle Description The start cycle is the time period allowed for the motor to reach its normal FLC level The LTM R controller measures the start cycle in seconds beginning when it detects On Level Current defined as maximum phase current equal to 20 of FLC During the start cycle the LTM R controller compares e detected current against the configurable Long Start Fault Threshold parameter and e elapsed start cycle time against the configurable Long Start Fault Timeout parameter There are 3 start cycle scenarios each based on the number of times 0 1 or 2 maximum phase current crosses the Long Start Fault Threshold A description of each scenario is described below For information on the statistics the LTM R controller retains describing motor starts see Motor Starts Counters page 55 For information about the long start protection function see Long Start page 90 Start Cycle Operating States During the start cycle the LTM R controller transitions through the motor s operating states as follows Step Event Operating State 1 LTM R controller receives a s
79. R controller e detects a fault e is performing load shedding is counting down the rapid cycle timer Start The motor starts The LTM R controller detects that current has reached the On Level Current threshold e detects that current has not both crossed and re crossed the long start fault threshold continues to count down the long start fault timer Run The motor is running The LTM R controller detects that current has both crossed and re crossed the long start fault threshold before the LTM R controller fully counted down the long start fault timer 136 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Operating State Chart The operating states of the LTM R controller firmware as the motor progresses from Off to Run state are described below The LTM R controller verifies current in each operating state The LTM R controller can transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state al System Config initial state at Config needed Config complete Config needed a Se No fault Bo no load shed Yes i Yes rapid cycle timer ii Yy expired j Not Ready Ready eae lt _ A Yes load shed ci Yes lavg lt 5 FLC an Yes Start y Start complete oe Run Protection Monitoring by Operating States The motor operating states and the fault and war
80. Simplified Control and Monitoring 289 Modbus Request and Programming Examples 290 Modbus Exception Management 292 User Map Variables User Defined Indirect Registers 293 Register Map Organization of Communication Variables 294 Data Formats 295 Data Types 296 Identification Variables 302 Statistics Variables 303 Monitoring Variables 309 Configuration Variables 315 Command Variables 322 User Map Variables 323 1639501EN 04 09 2014 285 Use Topic Page Custom Logic Variables 324 286 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Modbus Proto Overview Modbus Dialog Transparent Ready col Principle The Modbus protocol is a master slave protocol Master Slaves iwletelelere s lefelele Only 1 device can transmit on the line at any time The master manages and initiates the exchange It interrogates each of the slaves in succession No slave can send a message unless it is invited to do so The master repeats the question when there is an incorrect exchange and declares the interrogated slave absent if no response is received within
81. SoMove Lite is used by all users of this computer or e Only for me if SoMove Lite is used only by you e Click the Next button 10 In the Destination Folder dialog box e f necessary modify the SoMove Lite destination folder by clicking the Change button e Click the Next button 11 In the Shortcuts dialog box e f you want to create a shortcut on the desktop and or in the quick launch bar select the corresponding options e Click the Next button 12 In the Ready to Install the Program dialog box click the Install button Result The SoMove Lite components are installed automatically e Modbus communication DTM library which contains the communication protocol e DTM libraries which contain different drive catalogs e SoMove Lite itself 13 In the Installation Wizard Completed dialog box click the Finish button Result SoMove Lite is installed on your computer 284 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Section 7 6 Using the Modbus Communication Network Overview This section describes how to use the LTM R controller via the network port using the Modbus protocol A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL e The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and for certain critical functions provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop
82. The LTM R controller clears the warning whenever the measured value no longer exceeds the warning threshold plus or minus a 5 hysteresis band 1639501EN 04 09 2014 61 Motor Protection Functions Motor Protection Characteristics Operation The following diagram describes the operation of a typical motor protection function This diagram and the following diagrams are expressed in terms of current However the same principles apply to voltage Ph i gt is1 ns p Waning Timer p gt ls2 inst p T 0 p Faut m Measurement of the monitored parameter Is1 Warning threshold setting Is2 Fault threshold setting T Fault timeout setting Inst Instantaneous warning fault detection Settings Some protection functions include configurable settings including e Fault threshold A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function fault e Warning threshold A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function warning e Fault timeout A time delay that must expire before the protection function fault is triggered The behavior of a timeout depends on its trip current characteristic profile e Trip curve characteristic TCC The LTM R controller includes a definite trip characteristic for all protection functions except the Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal protection function which has both an inverse trip and definite trip curve character
83. The function is available for all operating states NOTE The temperature is derived from the following equation T 2 6042 R 260 42 where R resistance Q NOTE To connect a 3 wire PT100 sensor to an LTM R controller simply do not wire the compensation pin of the 3 wire PT100 sensor Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The PT100 motor temperature sensor function includes the following features e 2 configurable thresholds e Motor Temperature Sensor Warning Threshold Degree e Motor Temperature Sensor Fault Threshold Degree e 2 function outputs e Motor Temperature Sensor Warning e Motor Temperature Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temperature Sensor Faults Count e 1 display configuration e Motor Temperature Sensor Display Degree CF Motor temperature sensor warning o 8 gt s1 e Motor temperature sensor warning PT100 Motor temperature sensor fault o 6 gt Os2 L Motor temperature sensor fault PT 100 Temperature measured by the PT100 sensor 8s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 15 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings The PT100 motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault threshold degree 0 200 C in 1 C increments 0 C Warning thresho
84. Unit User s Manual 1639501EN 04 09 2014 247 Use Configuration of the HMI Port HMI Port The HMI port is the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller or on the LTM E expansion module used to connect the LTM R controller to an HMI device such as a Magelis XBT or a TeSys T LTM CU or to aPC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM Communication Parameters Use the TeSys T DTM or the HMI to modify the HMI port communication parameters HMI port address setting HMI port baud rate setting HMI port parity setting HMI port endian setting HMI Port Address Setting The HMI port address can be set between 1 and 247 Factory setting is 1 HMI Port Baud Rate Setting Possible transmission rates are e 4800 Baud e 9600 Baud e 19 200 Baud Factory setting HMI Port Parity Setting The parity can be selected from e Even Factory setting e None Parity and stop bit behavior is linked If the parity is Then the number of stop bits is Even 1 None 2 HMI Port Endian Setting The HMI port endian setting allows to swap the 2 words in a double word e 0 least significant word first little endian e 1 most significant word first big endian factory setting HMI Port Fallback Setting HMI port fallback setting see page 47 is used to adjust the fallback mode in case of a loss of communication with the PLC 248 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Section 7 3 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410
85. XX X X X XIX x x x x Voltage phase imbalance Voltage phase loss Voltage phase reversal Undervoltage Overvoltage Load shedding Underpower Overpower Under power factor Over power factor XIX X X X XI XK X X X X X X X OK OK X X X x x X The function is available The function is not available 20 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Introduction Control Functions The following table lists the equipment required to support the control functions of the motor management system Control functions LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E Motor control channels Terminal strip x X HMI X xX Remote X X Operating mode Overload X X Independent x X Reverser X X Two step X x Two speed x x Custom X X Fault Management Manual reset X X Automatic reset X X Remote reset X X X The function is available The function is not available 1639501EN 04 09 2014 21 Introduction Physical Description of the LTM R Modbus Controller Overview The microprocessor based LTM R controller provides control protection and monitoring for single phase and 3 phase AC induction motors Phase Current Inputs The LTM R controller includes internal current transformers for measuring the motor load phase current directly from the motor load power cables or from secondaries of external c
86. after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired e Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault Timeout e The LTM R controller reports both the start cycle time and the maximum current detected during start cycle as 0000 indicating current never reached the fault threshold Start cycle with 0 threshold cross D l I I 1 I I l I I 1 I I 1 l I l Ji l I I 1 I 1 1 1 I l I I 1 I I l I I 1 if l l l I I a Start time Y 20 FLC H Long start fault timeout Fault condition Ready state Start state Is Long start fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 141 Motor Control Functions Section 4 2 Operating Modes Overview The LTM R controller can be configured to 1 of 10 predefined operating modes Selecting custom operating mode allows you to select one of the 10 predefined operating modes and customize it to your specific application The selection of a predefined operating mode determines the behavior of all LTM R controller inputs and outputs Each predefined operating mode selection includes a control wiring selection e 2 wire maintained or e 3 wire impulse What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Control Principles 143 Predefined Operating Modes 144 Control Wiring and Fault Management
87. application 3a KM2 AN LS HS Stop EA E _ ore aasa daai Anaa on on or oro OO O Q O B2 LS Low speed HS High speed 1 A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows The LTM R controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of two speed Dahlander IEC diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams page 379 For examples of two speed Dahlander NEMA diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding Consequent Pole page 398 160 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Two Speed Pole Changing Application Diagram The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two speed 3 wire impulse terminal strip control pole changing application j anes oe KM1 LS HS Stop a E ue ea eee ee ae LS Low speed HS High speed 1 Apole changing application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows The LTM R controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case all
88. behavior of the LTM R controller due to EMC The exhaustive list of wiring rules is described in the general recommendations see page 192 NOTICE UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Use Schneider Electric standard cables Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Connecting toa Magelis XBT HMI Device in 1 to Many Mode The diagram below shows a 1 to many connection from the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to up to 8 controllers with and without the LTM E expansion module Magelis XBTN410 HMI device Magelis connecting cable XBTZ938 T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFee Shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 Re Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R LTM R controller LTM E expansion module NO ohwWHD 1639501EN 04 09 2014 213 Installation Connecting to a TeSys T LTM CU HMI Device The diagrams below show the TeSys T LTM CU HMI device connected to the LTM R controller without and with the LTM E expansion module LTM CU Control Operator Unit Grounding collar LTM9CUs HMI device connection cable LTM R controller LTM E expansion module akhwhnd Connecting to a Generic HMI Device Connect the LTM R controller and the expansion module to an HMI device of your choice using a shielded cable for Modbus bus reference TSX CSA The RJ45 port pinouts to connect to the
89. cleared motor automatic restart 1639501EN 04 09 2014 119 Motor Protection Functions Timing Sequence Manual Restart The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when a manual restart occurs Voltage Dip Detection Voltage Dip Occurred Immediate Restart Delayed Restart Manual Restart Auto Restart Immediate Timeout Auto Restart Delayed Timeout Run Command Output Motor Current 1 Motor running 2 Voltage dip detected motor stopped 3 Voltage dip cleared motor automatic restart 0 ie Y 0 i yy a ara gt lt gt 120 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Section 3 5 Power Motor Protection Functions Overview This section describes the power motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Underpower 122 Overpower 124 Under Power Factor 126 Over Power Factor 128 1639501EN 04 09 2014 121 Motor Protection Functions Underpower Description The underpower function signals e a warning when the value of active power falls below a set threshold e a fault when the value of active power falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warn
90. command before the protection is active and a fault timeout duration as described below At A Fault no operation Y T2 L A l Delay F Ti p Im eee eee ee ee l Is Fault and warning threshold OC1 or OC2 T1 Start command T2 Elapsed time delay There is no time delay for the thermal overload definite time warning Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The definite time protection function is disabled following a start by a delay defined by the Long Start Fault Timeout setting The LTM R controller when configured for overload predefined operating mode uses the change in state from off to on level current to begin the Start state This delay allows the motor to draw current on startup required to overcome the inertia of the motor at rest NOTE Configuration of this protection function requires configuration of the Long Start protection function including the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter Functional Characteristics The thermal overload definite time function includes the following features e 2 configurable threshold settings one setting OC1 is used for single speed motors both settings are required for 2 speed motors e OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio or e OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio e 1 time delay e Overcurrent Time O Time set by the Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout parameter e 2 function outputs e Therm
91. delay The external ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state start state or run state This function can be configured so that it is disabled only during start state and enabled during ready state and run state Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The external ground current function includes the following features e 1 measure of ground current in amperes e Ground Current 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout 2 function outputs e External Ground Current Warning e External Ground Current Fault 1 counting statistic e Ground Current Faults Count External ground current warning and fault pe Igr gt Igrs1 m External ground current warning lgr Igr gt lgrs2 _ym Z o t External ground current fault Igr Ground current from external ground CT Igr s1 Warning threshold Igr s2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout 1639501EN 04 09 2014 101 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings The external ground current function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting External ground current fault timeout 0 1 25s in 0 01 s increments 0 5s External ground current fault threshold 0 02 20 Ain 0 01 A increments 1 A External ground current warning threshold 0 02 20 Ai
92. diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the two speed operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration when the Control Direct Transition bit is On 1 1 Low speed start 1 2 High speed start f A 1 4 Stop Y Y y l 0 1 KM1 Low speed ya O 2 KM2 and KM3 high speed ia i A A vy YY y ov Y Motor On bit a Y Y Y Vy y Motor transition timeout lt a al p p at Load 1 Normal operation with stop command 2 Normal operation without stop command 3 Low speed start command ignored motor transition timeout active 4 Low speed start command ignored stop command active Parameters The following table lists the parameters associated with the Two Speed operating mode Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Motor transition timeout high speed to low speed 0 999 9 s 100 ms Control direct transition On Off Off NOTE The low speed to high speed timer is fixed at 100 ms 162 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Custom Operating Mode Overview Configuration Files The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom logic editor in the TeSys T DTM to e customize the use of results of protection functions e ch
93. displays the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase voltages Formula The Power Factor parameter also called cosine phi or cos represents the absolute value of the ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power The following diagram displays an example of the average rms current sinusoidal curve lagging slightly behind the average rms voltage sinusoidal curve and the phase angle difference between the 2 curves 360 lt aa voltage 14 Wen current He a k3 7 7 S 4 4 phase angle q N ft as 4 After the phase angle is measured the power factor can be calculated as the cosine of the phase angle g the ratio of side a Active Power over the hypotenuse h Apparent Power A The active power function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristic Value Accuracy 10 for cos 2 0 6 Resolution 0 01 Refresh interval 30 ms typical 1 The refresh interval depends on the frequency 1639501EN 04 09 2014 37 Metering and Monitoring Functions Active Power and Reactive Power Description Formulas The calculation of the active power and reactive power is based on the e average rms phase voltage of L1 L2 L3 average rms phase current of L1 L2 L3 e e power factor e number of phases Active power also known as true power measures average rms power It is derived from the following
94. divided by the number of tap offs on the multiple junction box Bus polarization e A 450 to 650 Q pull up resistor at the 5 V e A 450 to 650 Q pull down resistor at the Common This polarization is recommended for the master There is no polarization at the RS 485 terminal on the LTM R controller Line terminator A 120 Qresistor 5 at both ends of the bus Common polarity The common polarity is connected to the protective ground in at least one point on the bus 218 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Modbus Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics General The main physical characteristics of a Modbus port are Physical interface Multipoint 2 wire RS 485 electrical networking Connector Terminal block and RJ45 Polarization At master level Physical Interface and Connectors The LTM R controller is equipped with 2 connector types on the front face 1 a female shielded RJ45 connector 2 an open style pull apart terminal block The figure shows the LTM R front face with the Modbus connectors TEN seos Al Ai C 1213 C 14 15 C 16 Io 95 96 LTMRO8VED a oWw Test NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34 Zi Z2 71 T D1 D0 S VY NC PSSS EEE OOSSS 2 24VDC 2705334 LTME HMI HM Comm PLC Comm Both connectors are electrically identic
95. each operating state A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION local and national safety codes and standards The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program install alter and apply this product Follow all Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Control Channels 133 Operating States 136 Start Cycle 139 132 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Control Channels Overview The LTM R can be configured for 1 control channel out of 3 e Terminal strip Input devices wired to the input terminals on the front face of the LTM R controller e HMI An HMI device connected to the LTM R controller s HMI port e Network A network PLC connected to the controller network port Control Channel Selection Terminal Strip HMI You can easily select between 2 control channels assigning one channel to be the local control source and the second channel to be the remote control source The possible channel assignments are Control Channel Local Remote Terminal strip factory Yes Only with an LTM CU present setting HMI Yes Only with an LTM CU present Network No Yes In local control the control
96. enable 320 L1 L2 voltage enable 320 L2 current enable 320 L2 current ratio enable 320 L2 L3 voltage enable 320 L3 current enable 320 L3 current ratio enable 320 L3 L1 voltage enable 320 language setting 360 motor status enable 320 motor temperature sensor enable 320 operating time enable 320 power consumption enable 320 power factor enable 320 reactive power enable 320 start statistics enable 320 starts per hour enable 320 temperature sensor degree CF 320 thermal capacity level enable 320 thermal capacity remaining enable 320 time enable 320 time to trip enable 320 voltage phase imbalance enable 320 HMI display temperature sensor degree CF 34 HMI keys independent operating mode 150 overload operating mode 148 reverser operating mode 153 two speed operating mode 162 two step operating mode 158 HMI motor status LED color 317 360 HMI port address setting 248 317 353 baud rate setting 248 267 317 353 comm loss 310 comm loss timeout 248 endian setting 275 317 353 fallback action setting 353 fallback setting 248 319 fault enable 275 353 faults count 53 276 parity setting 248 267 317 353 353 warning enable 275 353 hysteresis 63 I O status 311 inputs outputs AC logic inputs configuration 351 internal clock 332 internal ground current 99 fault threshold 100 272 317 355 fault timeout 100 272 317 355 warning threshold 100 272 317 355 internal port faults co
97. enabled but no LTM E expansion module is present this will cause an LTM E configuration fault e It does not have any delay setting e The fault condition clears when no protection fault requiring an LTM E is enabled or when the LTM R has been power cycled with an appropriate LTM E being present LTM E Configuration Warning LTM E configuration warning e f LTM E based protection warnings are enabled but no LTM E expansion module is present this will cause an LTM E configuration warning e The warning clears when no protection warning requiring an LTM E is enabled or when the LTM R has been power cycled with an appropriate LTM E being present 48 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions External Fault Description The LTM R controller has an external fault feature which detects if an error happened on an external system linked to it An external fault is triggered by setting a bit in the custom logic command register 1 see table below This external fault sets the controller into a fault state based on different parameters in the system An external fault can be reset only by clearing the external fault bit in the register External Fault Parameter Settings Parameter Description Custom logic external fault command The value is written External system fault Reads Custom logic external fault command parameter Fault code Number is 16 External fault set by program customized with cu
98. fault enable e Disable e Enable Disable Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold 3 15 of the calculated imbalance in increments of 1 10 imbalance Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in increments of 1 s 0 7s Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in increments of 1 s 2s Voltage phase imbalance warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold 3 15 of the calculated imbalance in increments of 1 10 imbalance Voltage phase loss fault enable e Disable Disable e Enable Voltage phase loss fault timeout 0 1 30 s in increments of 0 1 s 3s Voltage phase loss warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Voltage phase reversal fault enable e Disable Disable e Enable Parameters Setting range Factory setting Undervoltage fault enable e Disable e Enable Disable Undervoltage fault threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 85 of Motor nominal voltage Undervoltage fault timeout 0 2 25 s in increments of 0 1 s 3s Undervoltage warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Undervoltage warning threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 85 of Motor nominal voltage Parameters Setting range Factory setting Overvoltage fault enable e Disable e Enable Disable Overvoltage fa
99. if the motor is in Run state and the LTM R controller detects that the current is equal or more than 10 of FLCmin The Run Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure current is flowing e The Run Check Back reports a fault or warning if average phase current is not detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Stop command e The Run Check Back ends when a Stop command executes Stop Command Check Stop Check Back The Stop Command Check begins after a Stop command and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the main circuit and ensure that no current is flowing e The Stop Command Check reports a fault or warning if current is detected after a delay of 1 second e The Stop Command Check ends if the LTM R controller detects that the current is equal or less than 5 of FLCmin The Stop Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure that no current is flowing e The Stop Check Back reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is detected for longer than 0 5 seconds after a Stop command e The Stop Check Back condition ends when a Run command executes 42 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Timing Sequence The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Start Command Check and Stop Command Check Oahwhnd 2 Start Command Check Stop Command Check
100. internal firmware latch command that directs the appropriate relay output to close and remain closed until the latch command is disabled e A stop action that interrupts current at logic input 1 4 causes the LTM R controller to disable the latch command Disabling the firmware latch causes the output to open and remain open until the next valid start condition e Forall 2 wire maintained control wiring diagrams the LTM R controller detects the presence of current at logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 as start commands and the absence of current disables the start command Control Logic Action on Faults and Resets Predefined control logic manages faults and reset commands as follows e Logic output 0 4 opens in response to a fault condition e Logic output O 4 closes in response to a reset command Control Logic and Control Wiring Together Managing Faults The control circuits shown in the wiring diagrams in this chapter and in the Appendix indicate how the LTM R controller s control logic and the control circuit combine to stop a motor in response to a fault e For 3 wire impulse control circuits the control strategy links the state of logic output O 4 to the state of the current at logic input 1 4 e Control logic opens logic output O 4 in response to a fault e Logic output 0 4 opening interrupts current at logic input 1 4 disabling the control logic latch command on logic output O 1 e Logic output O 1 opens due to control logic de
101. introduction 144 overload 147 reverser 157 two speed 159 two step 154 operating states 132 136 chart 137 not ready 136 protection functions 137 ready 136 run 136 start 136 operating time 56 276 303 over power factor 128 fault enable 128 274 359 fault threshold 128 274 316 fault timeout 128 274 316 359 faults count 52 warning enable 128 274 359 warning threshold 128 274 316 359 overcurrent 96 fault enable 96 272 356 fault threshold 96 272 315 356 fault timeout 96 272 315 356 faults count 52 warning enable 96 272 356 warning threshold 96 272 315 356 overpower 124 fault enable 124 274 359 fault threshold 124 274 316 359 fault timeout 124 316 359 fault timeout starting 274 faults count 52 warning enable 124 274 359 warning threshold 124 274 316 359 overvoltage 112 fault enable 173 273 357 fault threshold 173 273 316 357 fault timeout 173 273 316 357 faults count 52 276 warning enable 113 273 357 warning threshold 113 273 316 357 P parameters configurable 349 phase imbalances register 314 physical description expansion module 24 LTM R 22 power consumption active 304 reactive 304 power factor 37 53 268 313 n 0 277 305 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 307 n 4 307 predefined operating modes control wiring and fault management 146 preventive maintenance 331 configuration settings 331 e
102. logic variables are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note see page 294 1200 Word Custom logic status register bit O Custom logic run bit 1 Custom logic stop bit 2 Custom logic reset bit 3 Custom logic second step bit 4 Custom logic transition bit 5 Custom logic phase reverse bit 6 Custom logic network control bit 7 Custom logic FLC selection bit 8 Reserved bit 9 Custom logic auxiliary 1 LED bit 10 Custom logic auxiliary 2 LED bit 11 Custom logic stop LED bit 12 Custom logic LO1 bit 13 Custom logic LO2 bit 14 Custom logic LO3 bit 15 Custom logic LO4 1201 Word Custom logic version 1202 Word Custom logic memory space 1203 Word Custom logic memory used 1204 Word Custom logic temporary space 1205 Word Custom logic non volatile space 1206 1249 Reserved Register Variable type Read Write variables Note see page 294 1250 Word Custom logic setting register 1 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 Logic input 3 external ready enable bits 2 15 Reserved 1251 1269 Reserved 1270 Word Custom logic command register 1 bit O Custom logic external fault command bits 1 15 Reserved 1271 1279 Reserved 324 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use
103. motor will require a delayed restart When a delayed restart is active the delay timer is running e the timer is paused for the duration of the dip if a voltage dip occurs e the delayed restart is canceled if a start or stop command occurs Immediate Restart The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when an immediate restart occurs s 1 Voltage Dip Detection 0 1 Voltage Dip Occurred 0 1 i Immediate Restart 0 Delayed Restart o Manual Restart 0 Auto Restart Immediate 1 Timeout 0 Auto Restart Delayed 1 Timeout 0 1 Output 4 Y Motor C t otor Curreni 0 dam lt a eat La 1 Motor running 2 Voltage dip detected motor stopped 3 Voltage dip cleared motor automatic restart 118 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Timing Sequence Delayed Restart The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when a delayed restart occurs Voltage Dip Detection Voltage Dip Occurred Immediate Restart Delayed Restart Manual Restart Auto Restart Immediate Timeout Auto Restart Delayed Timeout Voltage Dip Restart Timeout Output Motor Current 1 Motor running 1 o 1 o i 1 l 0 1 o o 3 0 i 1 o io Y 0 s l 1 0 i 1 7 y lt a a Jat Load 2 Voltage dip detected motor stopped 3 Voltage dip
104. of times the motor wires pass through the CT window in order to display the correct current readings For more information refer to Load Current Transformer settings see page 350 The following diagram shows typical wiring using 2 passes 1 wire loop Multiply the current by the number of times that the motor wires pass through the CT windows to determine the amount of current passing through the internal current sensors Adding multiple passes allows to e increase the current sensed by the internal current sensors to a level that the controller can properly detect or e provide a more accurate reading by the internal current sensors We recommend that you select a controller with an FLC value range that includes the motor FLC However if the motor FLC is less than the FLC range of the controller multiple passes can increase the current level sensed by the internal current sensors to one that the controller can detect For example if using a controller with an FLC range of 5 to 100 A and the motor FLC is 3 A the controller cannot properly sense the current In this case if you pass the power wiring through the internal current sensors of the controller 2 times the internal current sensors of the controller sense 6 A 2 passes x 3 A a current level that falls within the FLC range of the controller For more information abo
105. over different types of cables at right angles if necessary Do not bend or damage the cables The minimum bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter Avoid sharp angles of paths or passage of the cable Use shielded cables to connect ground fault current transformers e The cable shield must be connected to a protective ground at both ends e The connection of the cable shield to the protective ground must be as short as possible e Connect together all the shields if necessary e Perform the grounding of the shield with a collar Add filters on contactor coils for all contactors and relays Place the cable along the grounded plate around the withdrawable drawer For more information refer to the Electrical Installation Guide available in English only chapter ElectroMagnetic Compatibility EMC 192 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Wiring Diagram Example LTM R Controls a 3 phase Motor The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module used to control a 3 phase motor in 3 wire impulse independent mode 3 _ A1 A2 Start A1 A2 LTM R controller power supply B1 B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs 1639501EN 04 09 2014 193 Installation Wiring Diagram Example LTM R Controls a Single phase Motor The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module used to control a single phase motor in 3 wire
106. parameter settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Ground Current Mode Internal Internal e External Ground Current Ratio e None None e 100 1 e 200 1 5 e 1000 1 e 2000 1 e Other Ratio Ground CT Primary e 1 65 535 1 Ground CT Secondary e 1 65 535 1 External Ground Current Formula The external ground current value depends on the parameter settings Calculated Measurement Formula External ground current Current through Z1 Z2 x Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary Ground Current Characteristics The ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Internal Ground Current Igr gt External Ground Current Igr Unit A A Accuracy LTM R 08xxx Igr gt 0 3 A 10 The greater of 5 or 0 01 A 0 2 A lt lgr lt 0 3 A 15 0 1 A lt lgr lt 0 2A 20 Igr lt 0 1 A N A LTM R 27xxx Igr gt 0 5 A 10 0 3 A lt lgr lt 0 5A 15 0 2A lt Igr lt 0 3A 20 Igr lt 0 2 A N A LTM R 100xxx Igr 1 0A 10 0 5A lt lIgr lt 1 0A 15 0 3A lt Igr lt 0 5A 20 Igr lt 0 3 A N A Resolution 0 01A 0 01A Refresh interval 100 ms 100 ms 1 For currents of this magnitude or lower the internal ground current function should not be used Instead use external ground current transformers 30 1639501EN 04
107. parameter settings using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary Confirm that the combination of Ground CT Primary and Ground CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the intended ground CT ratio The motor temp sensor specifications and The following parameter setting using either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display of the HMI device Motor Temp Sensor Confirm that the motor temp sensor actually employed is the same sensor type as set in the Motor Temp Sensor parameter Verify the wiring for any I O connections by checking the following Look at Action The wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagram The AUX1 Run 1 AUX2 Run 2 and Stop buttons on the HMI device and The following parameter setting using either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display of the HMI device Control Local Channel Setting Confirm that each command performs the intended start or stop function when control is via the terminal strip or the HMI port The Reset button on the HMI device and The following parameter setting using either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display of the HMI device Thermal Overload Fault Reset Confirm that the HMI can command a manual fault reset when control is set to manual The PLC if the LTM R controller is conne
108. rapid cycle lockout function prevents potential harm to the motor caused by repetitive successive inrush currents resulting from too little time between starts The rapid cycle lockout function provides a configurable timer which begins its count when the LTM R controller detects On Level Current defined as 20 of FLC At the same time the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit is set If the LTM R controller detects a Run command before the rapid cycle lockout has elapsed the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit remains set LTM R controller ignores the Run command It prevents the motor from restarting HMI device if attached displays WAIT LTM R controller Alarm LED flashes red 5 times per second indicating the LTM R controller has disabled motor outputs thereby preventing an undesirable condition caused by starting the motor e LTM R controller monitors the wait time if more than 1 timer is active the LTM R controller reports the minimum wait time before the longest timer elapses On power loss the LTM R controller saves the state of the lockout timer in non volatile memory When the LTM R controller next powers up the timer restarts its count and again ignores Run commands until the timer completes the timeout Setting the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout parameter to 0 disables this function The Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout setting can be edited when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state If an edit is made while the timer is counting the
109. s in 0 1 s increments 0 7s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 2s Fault threshold 3 15 of the calculated imbalance in 10 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 3 15 of the calculated imbalance in 10 1 increments Technical Characteristics The voltage phase imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639501EN 04 09 2014 105 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase imbalance wes Vs2 ft h fe yee ee eee Fault Fault timeout timeout starting running p Start state gt x Run state B V A Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage Vs2 Fault threshold 106 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Phase Loss Description The voltage phase loss function is based on the Voltage Phase Imbalance function and signals e a warning when the voltage in any phase differs by more than a 38 from the average voltage in all 3 phases e afault when the voltage in any phase differs by more than 38 from the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time This function e is active wh
110. scaling the thermal image to FLC Thermal Capacity Level Characteristics The thermal capacity level function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501EN 04 09 2014 33 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Temperature Sensor Description The motor temperature sensor function displays e The resistance value in ohms measured by a PTC or NTC resistance temperature sensor e The temperature value in C or F measured by a PT100 temperature sensor Refer to the product documentation for the specific temperature sensor being used One of 4 types of temperature sensors can be used PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog Characteristics NTC Analog The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic PT100 Temperature Sensor Other Temperature Sensor Unit C or F according to the value of the HMI Q Display Temperature Sensor Degree CF parameter Accuracy 2 2 Resolution 1 Cor1 F 0 1 2 Refresh interval 500 ms 500 ms Frequency Description The frequency function provides the value measured based on the line voltage measurements If the frequency is unstable 2 Hz variations the value reported is O until the frequency stabilizes If no LTM E expansion module is present the frequency value is 0 Characteristics The frequ
111. the LTM R controller into internal fault condition Press and hold the button down for more than 20 s 1639501EN 04 09 2014 245 Use Section 7 2 Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the LTM CU Control Operator Unit 247 Configuration of the HMI Port 248 246 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Presentation of the LTM CU Control Operator Unit Aim of the Product The LTM CU Control Operator Unit is a remote operator terminal that enables the configuration monitoring and control of the LTM R controller as part of the TeSys T motor management system The LTM CU has been specially developed to act as the Human Machine Interface HMI of the LTM R controller and is internally powered by the LTM R The diagram below shows the LTM CU front face r Q Iam eer Or JK O 2 E 5 On OSO ae LTM CU Functions The LTM CU can be used to e configure parameters for the LTM R controller e display information about the LTM R controller configuration and operation e monitor detected faults and warnings detected by the controller e control the motor locally using the local control interface For more Information See the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator
112. the LTM R controller to monitor its state as follows LED Color Describes Indicates HMI Comm Yellow Communication activity between LTM R e Flashing yellow communication controller and LTM E expansion module e Off no communication Power Green LTM R controller power or internal fault e Solid green power on no internal faults condition and motor off e Flashing green power on no internal faults and motor on e Off power off or internal faults exist Alarm MS Red Protection fault or warning or internal fault Solid red internal or protection fault condition e Flashing red 2 x per s warning e Flashing red 5 x per s load shed or rapid cycle condition e Off no faults warnings load shed or rapid cycle when power is On Fallback Red Communication connection between e Solid red in fallback LTM R controller and network module e Off not in fallback no power PLC Comm Yellow Communication activity on the network bus Flashing yellow 0 2 s on 1 0 s off network bus communication e Off no network bus communication Flashing when the LED is lit up to 250 ms whatever the time cycle is Blinking when the LED is lit 50 of the time in the time cycle LTM E Expansion Module LEDs Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the LTM E expansion module to monitor its operating and communications state as follows LED Color Describes Indicates Power Green or red Module power
113. the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of pole changing IEC diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams page 381 For examples of pole changing NEMA diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding page 400 I O Assignment Two Speed operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic Inputs 2 Wire Maintained Assignment 3 Wire Impulse Assignment 1 1 Low speed command Low speed start 1 2 High speed command High speed start 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or Remote 1 Local 0 or Remote 1 1639501EN 04 09 2014 161 Motor Control Functions Timing Sequence Two Speed operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 Low speed control 23 and 24 High speed control Warning signal 0 2 0 3 33 and 34 O 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Two speed operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI Keys 2 Wire Maintained Assignment 3 Wire Impulse Assignment Aux 1 Low speed control Low speed start Aux 2 High speed control High speed start Stop Stop the motor Stop the motor The following
114. time is tracked down for at least 30 mn The Minimum Wait Time function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit s Accuracy 1 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 1s 58 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Chapter 3 Motor Protection Functions Overview This chapter describes the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 3 1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction 60 3 2 Thermal Motor Protection Functions 64 3 3 Current Motor Protection Functions 83 3 4 Voltage Motor Protection Functions 103 3 5 Power Motor Protection Functions 121 1639501EN 04 09 2014 59 Motor Protection Functions Section 3 1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction Overview This section introduces you to the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller including protection parameters and characteristics What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Definitions 61 Motor Protection Characteristics 62 60 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Definitions Defined Functions and Data The LTM R controller monitors current ground current and motor temperature sensor parameters When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module it also
115. to the TeSys T DTM parameter list tab To help you find the link with the variable tables in the Use chapter each parameter has its corresponding register number attached A WARNING RISK OF UNINTENDED CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION When modifying parameter settings of the LTM R controller e Be especially careful if you change parameter settings when the motor is running e Disable network control of the LTM R controller to prevent unintended parameter configuration and operation Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Main Settings 350 Control 351 Communication 353 Thermal 354 Current 355 Voltage 357 Power 359 HMI 360 1639501EN 04 09 2014 349 Configurable Parameters Main Settings Phases Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Motor phases e 3 phase motor e single phase motor 3 phase motor Operating Mode Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Motor operating mode Overload 2 wire Overload 3 wire Independent 2 wire Independent 3 wire Reverser 2 wire Reverser 3 wire Two step 3 wire Two speed 2 wire Two speed 3 wire Custom Independent 3 wire Motor star delta disabled e e Two step 2 wire O 1 enabled
116. vibration DIN rail mounted 1 gn Immunity to According to EN61000 4 2 Through air 8 kV level 3 electrostatic discharge Over surface 6 KV level 3 Immunity to radiated According to EN61000 4 3 10 V m level 3 fields Immunity to fast According to EN61000 4 4 On power lines and relay 4 kV level 4 transient bursts outputs All other circuits 2 kV level 3 Immunity to radioelectric fields According to EN610 4 6 10 V rms level 3 1 Some certifications are in progress 2 Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 3 NOTE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures 340 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Technical Data Surge immunity According to IEC EN 61000 4 5 Common mode Differential mode Power lines and relay outputs 4 kV 12 Q9 F 2 kV 2 918 F 24 VDC inputs and power 1 kV 12 Q9 F 0 5 kV 2 0 18 F 100 240 VAC inputs and power 2 kV 12 Q9 F 1 kV 2 9 18 F Communication 2 kV 12 0 18 F Temperature sensor IT1 IT2 1 kV 42 210 5 F 0 5 kV 42 910 5 F 1 Some certifications are in progress 2 Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 3 NOTE This product has been designed for use in environmen
117. warnings for the thermal overload protection function When any warning occurs including a thermal overload warning the LTM R controller increments the Warnings Count parameter Control Command Errors Counter Description A Diagnostic Fault occurs when the LTM R controller detects any of the following control command errors e Start Command Check errors e Stop Command Check errors e Stop Check Back errors e Run Check Back errors For information on these control command functions see Control Command Error Diagnostic page 42 Wiring Faults Counter Description The Wiring Faults Count parameter contains the total number of the following wiring faults that have occurred since the Clear Statistics Command last executed e Wiring Fault which is triggered by a e CT Reversal Error e Phase Configuration Error e Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Error e Voltage Phase Reversal Fault e Current Phase Reversal Fault The LTM R controller increments the Wiring Faults Count parameter by a value of 1 each time any one of the above 3 faults occurs For information on connection errors and related faults see Wiring Faults page 44 52 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Communication Loss Counters Description Faults detected for the following communication functions Counter Contains HMI Port Faults Count The number of times communications via the HMI port was lost Network Port Internal
118. 0 A models Resolution 0 01A Refresh interval 100 ms Line Current Ratio The L1 L2 and L3 current ratio parameter provides the phase current as a percentage of FLC Line Current Ratio Formulas The line current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting where FLC is FLC1 or FLC2 whichever is active at that time Calculated Measurement Formula Line current ratio 100 x Ln FLC Where e FLC FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting whichever is active at the time e Ln L1 L2 or L3 current value in amperes Line Current Ratio Characteristics The line current ratio function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy See Line Current Characteristics page 29 Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501EN 04 09 2014 29 Metering and Monitoring Functions Ground Current Description The LTM R controller measures ground currents and provides values in Amperes and as a percentage of FLCmin e The internal ground current Igr gt is calculated by the LTM R controller from the 3 line currents measured by the load current transformers It reports 0 when the current falls below 10 of FLCmin e The external ground current Igr is measured by the external ground current transformer connected to Z1 and Z2 terminals Configurable Parameters The control channel configuration has the following configurable
119. 00 77 Ulnt Controller compatibility code 78 Ulnt Current scale ratio 0 1 79 Ulnt Current sensor max 80 Not significant 81 Ulnt Current range max x 0 1 A 82 94 Not significant 95 Ulnt Load CT ratio x 0 1 A 96 Ulnt Full load current max maximum FLC range FLC Full Load Current x 0 1 A 97 99 Forbidden 302 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Statistics Variables Statistics Overview Global Statistics Statistics variables are grouped according to the following criteria Trip statistics are contained into a main table and an extension table Statistics variable groups Registers Global statistics 100 to 121 LTM monitoring statistics 122 to 149 Last trip statistics 150 to 179 and extension 300 to 309 Trip n 1 statistics 180 to 209 and extension 330 to 339 Trip n 2 statistics 210 to 239 and extension 360 to 369 Trip n 3 statistics 240 to 269 and extension 390 to 399 Trip n 4 statistics 270 to 299 and extension 420 to 429 The global statistics are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 100 101 Not significant 102 Ulnt Ground current faults count 103 Ulnt Thermal overload faults count 104 Ulnt Long start faults count 105 Ulnt Jam faults count 106 Ulnt Current phase imbalance faults count 107 Ulnt Undercurrent faults count 109 Ulnt HMI port faults count
120. 01EN 04 09 2014 215 Installation Connecting to a PC Running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM in 1 to Many Mode The diagram below shows a 1 to many connection from a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to up to 8 controllers with or without the LTM E expansion module Z Cable kit TCSMCNAM3M002P Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R LTM R controller LTM E expansion module NOohWDHD PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFs including a shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors Shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 Res NOTE This connection requires to define different HMI communication addresses The factory setting of the HMI port address is 1 Connection Accessories The following table lists connection accessories for the Magelis XBT and other HMI devices USB to RS 485 converter Designation Description Reference T junction boxes Box with 2 RJ45 female connector for trunk cable VW3 A8 306 TF03 and an integrated 0 3 m 1 ft cable with 1 RJ45 male connector for tap off Box with 2 RJ45 female connector for trunk cable VW3 A8 306 TF10 and an integrated 1 m 3 2 ft cable with 1 RJ45 male connector for tap off Line terminator for RJ45 connector R 120 Q VW3 A8 306 R Magelis connecting cable Length 2 5 m 8 2 ft XBTZ938 Magelis XBTN410 only 25 pts SUB D connector to connect to Magelis XBT Cable kit Length 2 5 m 8 2 ft TCSMCNAM3M002P Comm
121. 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Ground Current Ratio The Ground Current Ratio parameter provides the ground current value as a percentage of FLCmin Ground Current Ratio Formulas The ground current value is compared to FLCmin Calculated Measurement Formula Ground current ratio 100 x ground current FLCmin Ground Current Ratio Characteristics The ground current ratio function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit 0 2 000 of FLCmin Accuracy See Ground Current Characteristics above Resolution 0 1 FLCmin Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501EN 04 09 2014 31 Metering and Monitoring Functions Average Current Description The LTM R controller calculates average current and provides the value for phase in amperes and as a percentage of FLC The average current function returns the rms value of the average current Average Current Formulas The LTM R controller calculates the average current using the measured line currents The measured values are internally summed using the following formula Calculated Measurement Formula Average current three phase motor lavg L1 L2 L3 3 Average current single phase motor lavg L1 L3 2 Average Current Characteristics The average current function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit A Acc
122. 100 x V3 Vavg Vavg Voltage imbalance ratio for three phase in Vimb Max Vi1 Vi2 Vi3 Where V1 L1 L2 voltage phase 1 to phase 2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage phase 2 to phase 3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage phase 3 to phase 1 voltage Vavg average voltage The line voltage imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501EN 04 09 2014 35 Metering and Monitoring Functions Average Voltage Description Formulas Characteristics The LTM R controller calculates average voltage and provides the value in volts The average voltage function returns the rms value of the average voltage The LTM R controller calculates average voltage using the measured line to line voltages The measured values are internally summed using the following formula Calculated Measurement Formula Average voltage three phase motor Vavg L1 L2 voltage L2 L3 voltage L3 L1 voltage 3 Average voltage single phase motor Vavg L3 L1 voltage The average voltage function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit VAC Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 VAC Refresh interval 100 ms 36 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Power Factor Description The power factor function
123. 127 208 220 380 400 400 415 440 220 230 230 240 480 500 575 600 660 22 DC 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1D115 18 AC 24 32 42 48 110 AC 277 380 400 415 115 120 127 208 220 440 480 500 230 240 22 DC 24 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1D150 18 AC 24 32 42 48 110 AC 277 380 400 415 115 120 127 208 220 440 480 500 230 240 5 DC 24 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 346 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Technical Data TeSys F IEC Contactors Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys F IEC contactors are listed in the table below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required TeSys F catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages references Frequency maintained max jnterposing relay not interposing relay required Hz required LC1F115 50 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 127 220 230 240 500 660 1000 60 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F150 50 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 127 220 230 240 500 660 1000 60 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F185 1 50 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440
124. 127 220 230 240 500 660 1000 60 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F225 1 50 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 127 220 230 240 500 660 1000 60 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 265 277 380 415 127 220 230 240 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 1639501EN 04 09 2014 347 Technical Data TeSys F catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages references Frequency maintained max interposing relay not interposing relay required Hz required LC1F265 40 4002 10 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 277 380 415 127 220 230 240 480 500 600 660 1000 5 DC 24 DC 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F330 10 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 277 380 415 127 220 230 240 480 500 600 660 1000 5 DC 24 DC 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F400 15 AC 48 110 120 125 AC 265 277 380 400 127 200 208 220 230 415 480 500 550 600 230 240 1000 8 DC 48 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F500 18 AC 48 110 120 127 200 208 220 230 230 240 265 277 380 400 415 480 500 550 600 1000 8 DC 48 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F630 22 AC 48 110 120 125 AC 265 277 380 400 127 200 208 220 240 415 480 500 550 600 1000 73 DC
125. 146 Overload Operating Mode 147 Independent Operating Mode 149 Reverser Operating Mode 151 Two Step Operating Mode 154 Two Speed Operating Mode 159 Custom Operating Mode 163 142 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Control Principles Overview The LTM R controller performs control and monitoring functions for single phase and 3 phase electric motors e These functions are predefined and fit the applications most frequently used They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the LTM R controller has been commissioned e The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom logic editor in the TeSys T DTM to e customize the use of results of protection functions e change the operation of control and monitoring functions e alter the predefined LTM R controller I O logic Operating Principle The processing of control and monitoring functions has 3 parts e acquisition of input data e the output of protection function processing e external logic data from logic inputs e telecommunication commands TCC received from the control source e logic processing by the control or monitoring function e utilization of the processing results e activation of logic outputs display of predefined messages activation of LEDs telecommunication signals TCS sent via a communications link The control and monitoring function process is displayed below
126. 1639501EN 04 TeSys T LTM R Modbus Motor Management Controller User Manual 09 2014 Schneider www schneider electric com ES E ec t r i C The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and or technical character istics of the performance of the products contained herein This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without express written permission of Schneider Electric All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements
127. 22 User Map Variables 3 60 4 0cb4ch2 dace taser bade aerar Se ee eee coe eke 323 Custom Logic Variables 0 00000 ccc eee 324 Chapter 8 Maintenance 002s 327 Detecting Problems sneget eh ioe a eee es eee bee bake eee Paha ee oie eae od 328 Troubleshooting 2 5 6 Sach eadag eh eee Peng ati ae ee ena e E E deka dd Ps 329 Preventive Maintenance 0 0 0 cc eee eee e eee 331 Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module 005 333 Communication Warnings and Faults 00000 cee cts 334 Appendics ca0c 550 5cccehededd rade Sees hsanaseawde een oaee eee sae es 337 Appendix A Technical Data 0 000 cece eee 339 Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller 00000 eee eee 340 Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module 0 0 eee eee 343 Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions 00 eee eee 345 Recommended Contactors 0 00 ccc eee ee 346 Appendix B Configurable Parameters 000 0 cece ee eee eee ee 349 Main Settings eesi cea ed ova eee ed eb ea ed ea ee A SEE PA SA oa Rae eee Bee 350 CONUO 24 cc bc nade i ht RA REM E RARE ORE Eee E ADEM ee eee EAS ase E a PARE ee 351 COMMUNICAUON ye ck a ee ede alee ea ede Baie a ede ede EEE EOE E Bee acd 353 Thermal spss oe re oh Aas BSA rere ee OE WS E Ce eae Mae ae te ee tie 354 CUMCN sic oica guiren eda ean eBlog aai Bie badd Sas weeded e
128. 39501EN 04 09 2014 271 Use Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Current Under Over Curr UNDER CURR continued Fault Undercurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Undercurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Undercurrent Fault Timeout Warn Undercurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Undercurrent Warning Threshold OVER CURR Fault Overcurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Overcurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Overcurrent Fault Timeout Warn Overcurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Overcurrent Warning Threshold Ground Current Fault Ground Current Mode IntFitLvl Internal Ground Current Fault Threshold IntFitTime Internal Ground Current Fault Timeout ExtFitLvl External Ground Current Fault Threshold ExtFitTime External Ground Current Fault Timeout Warn Ground Current Warning Enable IntWarnLvl Internal Ground Current Warning Threshold ExtWarnLvl External Ground Current Warning Threshold 272 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Voltage Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following voltage settings Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Voltage Phase Imb Loss Rev VOLT PH IMB Fault Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Voltage Phase Imbala
129. 4 Current phase loss fault enable bit 5 Current phase reversal fault enable bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault enable bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault enable bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault enable bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault enable bit 10 Undervoltage fault enable bit 11 Overvoltage fault enable bit 12 Underpower fault enable bit 13 Overpower fault enable bit 14 Under power factor fault enable bit 15 Over power factor fault enable o 4 3 oa 634 Word Warning enable register 2 bit O Reserved bit 1 Diagnostic warning enable bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Overcurrent warning enable bit 4 Current phase loss warning enable bit 5 Reserved bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning enable bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning enable bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning enable bit 9 Reserved bit 10 Undervoltage warning enable bit 11 Overvoltage warning enable bit 12 Underpower warning enable bit 13 Overpower warning enable bit 14 Under power factor warning enable bit 15 Over power factor warning enable e RT a a a a a 635 6 Reserved 637 Ulnt Auto reset attempts group 1 setting resets 638 Ulnt Auto reset group 1 timeout s 639 Ulnt Auto reset attempts group 2 setting resets 640 Ulnt Auto reset group 2 timeout s
130. 5 RB 1 5 Overpower RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB I 5 Under Power Factor RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Over Power Factor RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Communication loss PLC toLTMR RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 LTM E to LTM R RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or an HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller L5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller 1 Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control channel 168 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Automatic Reset Introduction Reset Behavior Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Automatic lets you e configure the LTM R controller to attempt to reset motor protection and communications faults without the intervention of either a human operator or the remote PLC for example e for anon networked LTM R controller installed at a location that is physically remote or locally hard to access e configure fault handling for each protection fault group in a manner that is appropriate to the faults in that group e seta different timeout delay e permit a different number of reset attempts e disable automatic fault resetting The Fault Reset Mode parameter selection determines the available reset methods Each protection fault is included in 1 of 3 auto reset fault groups based on the characteristics of that fault as described below Each fault group
131. 5LTME expansion module LEDs e LTM R controller Test Reset button Self test manage faults reset to factory settings Programmed operating parameters Control the e Logic inputs e LTM R controller e 6LTM R controller inputs e LTM E expansion module e 4 LTM E expansion module inputs e Motor e Power and control wiring e Any connected sensors including motor temp sensors external ground fault CTs Programmed protection parameters Protect the e LTM R controller e LTM E expansion module e Motor e Equipment The stand alone physical configurations of the LTM R controller with and without a connected LTM E expansion module are depicted below The LTM R controller alone SVE SVS SGggd ISVOel Al Ali1 C 12 13 C 14 15 C 16 Iho Iwc E LTMRO8MBD me 2 r F g Z 5435 a jee lt 8 8 5 a Test Reset 13 14 23024 33 34 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 D1 DO S V NC SOCSO IJGSVSYLOOVOG UU The LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module CVYOWLOVGOVYOS ia C 12 13 C 14 15 C 16 LTMRO8MBD MODBUS 2705334 by HMI HMI Comm Power Fallback PLC Comm _ Test Reset zi Z2 Ti T2 D1 Do S V NC QYVPYSOYPYVPYGS 244 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use LTM R Controller LEDs Use the 5 LEDs on the face of
132. 7 1 1 Start 1 4 Stop Current lt Motor Step 1 to 2 Threshold Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout 0 1 Step 1 0 2 Step 2 P i Y y y Motor On bit i Lo Motor Lockout Timeout aaa E p a od Normal operation Step 1 start Step 2 start akhkwohd Timeout Start command ignored Stop command active Current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold ignored preceded by expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2 Parameters Two step operating mode has the following parameters Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Motor step 1 to 2 timeout 0 1 999 9s 5s Motor transition timeout 0 999 9s 100 ms Motor step 1 to 2 threshold 20 800 FLC in 1 increments 150 FLC 158 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Two Speed Operating Mode Description Use Two Speed operating mode in two speed motor applications for motor types such as Dahlander consequent pole Pole Changer Functional Characteristics This function includes the following features Accessible in 3 control channels Terminal Strip HMI and Network Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O 1 low speed and O 2 high speed logic outputs 2 measures of FLC e FLC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio at low speed e FLC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio at high speed The LTM R controller can c
133. 8 A for LTMRO8 e 1 35 27 0 A in increments of 0 27 A for LTMR27 e 5 100 A in increments of 1 A for LTMR100 e 0 4 A for LTMRO8 e 1 35 A for LTMR27 e 5A for LTMR100 Warning threshold 10 100 of thermal capacity 85 of thermal capacity Motor trip class 5 30 in increments of 5 5 Fault reset timeout 50 999 in 1 s increments 120s Fault reset threshold 35 95 of thermal capacity 75 of thermal capacity The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following non configurable parameter settings Parameter Fixed Setting Thermal overload fault threshold 100 of thermal capacity Technical Characteristics The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of thermal overload warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1s 1639501EN 04 09 2014 69 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Definite Time Description When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Definite Time the LTM R controller signals e a warning when measured maximum phase current exceeds a configurable threshold OC1 or OC2 e a fault when the maximum phase current continuously exceeds the same threshold OC1 or OC2 fora set time delay The thermal overload definite time fault includes a time delay of constant magnitude following a start
134. 9 271 355 faults count 52 phase sequence 89 current ratio average 32 313 ground 313 L1 29 313 L2 29 313 L3 29 313 custom logic auxiliary 1 LED 324 auxiliary 2 LED 324 FLC selection 324 LO1 324 LO2 324 LO3 324 LO4 324 memory space 324 memory used 324 network control 324 non volatile space 324 phase reverse 324 reset 324 run 324 second step 324 status register 324 stop 324 stop LED 324 temporary space 324 transition 324 version 324 custom logic command external fault 324 register 1 324 custom logic monitoring register 1 325 system ready 325 custom logic setting register 1 324 custom operating mode 163 D date and time 53 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 setting 320 definite time long start fault timeout 354 diagnostic fault 52 fault enable 42 275 351 faults count 52 warning enable 275 351 warning enables 42 diagnostic faults wiring faults 44 406 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Index display enable active power 361 average current 360 average current ratio 360 average voltage 367 control mode 360 current phase imbalance 367 date 360 frequency 367 ground current 367 inputs outputs 360 L1 current 360 L1 current ratio 360 L1L2 voltage 367 L2 current 360 L2 current ratio 367 L2L3 voltage 361 L3 current 360 L3 current ratio 367 L3L1 voltage 367 last start 367 motor status 360 motor temper
135. 9 2014 Configurable Parameters Power Underpower Parameters Setting range Factory setting Underpower fault enable e Disable Disable e Enable Underpower fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 20 of Motor nominal increments of 1 power Underpower fault timeout 1 100 s in increments of 1 s 60s Underpower warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Underpower warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 30 of Motor nominal increments of 1 power Overpower Parameters Setting range Factory setting Overpower fault enable e Disable e Enable Disable Overpower fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in increments of 1 150 of Motor nominal power Overpower fault timeout 1 100 s in increments of 1 s 60s Overpower warning enable Disable Disable e Enable Overpower warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in increments of 1 150 of Motor nominal power Under Power Factor Parameters Setting range Factory setting Under power factor fault enable Disable Disable e Enable Under power factor fault threshold 0 1 in increments of 0 01 0 6 Under power factor fault timeout 1 25 s in increments of 0 1 s 10s Under power factor warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Under power factor warning threshold 0 1 in increments of 0 01 0 6 Over Power Factor
136. 9501EN 04 09 2014 363 Wiring Diagrams Section C 1 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Overview This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre configured operating modes Overload Monitoring of the motor load where control start stop of the motor load is achieved by a mechanism other than the controller Independent Direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Reverser Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Two Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta e Open Transition Primary Resistor e Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed Two speed motor applications for motor types including e Dahlander consequent pole e Pole Changer Each application is described individually with 1 complete application diagram 3 wire impulse terminal strip control including power and control 3 partial diagrams 2 wire maintained terminal strip control control logic input wiring variants 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 365 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 369 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 371
137. A1 A2 Stop Start ti 384 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a a L1 L2 L3 1639501EN 04 09 2014 385 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram 3a L1 L2 L3 H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control 386 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram 30 _ _ L1 L2 L3 H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control 1639501EN 04 09 2014 387 Wiring Diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 3N _ L1 L2 JL3 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following a
138. C 1 5 Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Motor temp sensor PTC Binary RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 PT100 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 PTC Analog RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 NTC Analog RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Thermal overload Definite RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Inverse Thermal RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Current Long Start RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Jam RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Current Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Current Phase Loss RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Undercurrent RB I 5 RB 1 5 RB I 5 Overcurrent RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 External Ground Current RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Internal Ground Current RB I 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or an HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller channel 1 Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control 1639501EN 04 09 2014 167 Motor Control Functions Protection Category Monitored Fault Control Channel Terminal Strip HMI Network Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Overvoltage RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Voltage Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Power Underpower RB 1 5 RB 1
139. Configurable Parameters Fault and Warning Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Fault reset mode e Manual or HMI Manual or HMI Remote by network e Automatic Auto reset attempts group 1 setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited 5 number of reset attempts Auto reset group 1 timeout 0 9 999 s in increments of 1 s 480s Auto reset attempts group 2 setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited 0 number of reset attempts Auto reset group 2 timeout 0 9999 s in increments of 1 s 1 200 s Auto reset attempts group 3 setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited 0 number of reset attempts Auto reset group 3 timeout 0 9999 s in increments of 1 s 60s 352 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Configurable Parameters Communication Network Port HMI Port Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Network port address setting 1 247 1 Network port baud rate setting 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 Self detection Self detection Network port parity setting None Even Odd Even Network port endian setting LSW first little endian MSW first big endian MSW first big endian Network port comm loss timeout 0 01 99 99 s in increments of 0 01s 60s Network port fallback setting e Hold LO1 LO2 Run 2 step or off LO1 LO2 off LO1 LO2 on ovl ind cust or off LO1 on or off 2 step LO2 on or off 2 step LO1 LO2
140. Consequent Pole 398 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding 00 eee ee 400 Glossary 422 Sees cece eee e teed ak eee eee eee ee E E a es 403 cl ee ee ee ee eee 405 1639501EN 04 09 2014 7 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Safety Information G Important Information NOTICE PLEASE NOTE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury NOTICE NOTICE is used to addr
141. Current range max Load CT ratio 8 0 1 0 8 0 A FLCmax min Current sensor max Contactor rating min 8 0 810 0 8 0 A FLCmin Current sensor max 20 8 0 20 0 40 A FLC in FLC in A FLCmax 0 43 8 0 5 1639501EN 04 09 2014 233 Commissioning Example 2 No External CTs Multiple Passes Data FLC in A 0 43 A Current range max 8 0 A Load CT primary 1 Load CT secondary 1 Passes 5 Contactor rating 810 0 A Calculated parameters with 5 passes e Load CT ratio Load CT primary Load CT secondary passes 1 1 5 0 2 Current sensor max Current range max Load CT ratio 8 0 0 2 1 6 A FLCmax min Current sensor max Contactor rating min 1 6 810 0 1 6 A FLCmin Current sensor max 20 1 6 20 0 08 A FLC in FLC in A FLCmax 0 43 1 6 27 Example 3 External CTs Reduced Contactor Rating Data FLC in A 135A Current range max 8 0 A Load CT primary 200 Load CT secondary 1 Passes 1 Contactor rating 150 0 A Calculated parameters with 1 pass e Load CT ratio Load CT primary Load CT secondary passes 200 1 1 200 0 Current sensor max Current range max Load CT ratio 8 0 200 0 1600 0A FLCmax min Current sensor max Contactor rating min 1600 0 150 0 150 0A FLCmin Current sensor max 20 1600 0 20 80 0 A FLC in FLC in A FLCmax 135 150 0 90 234 1639501
142. DC e connection for network 5 100 A FLC connection for HMI device or expansion module LTMRO8MFM 100 240 VAC e current protection metering and monitoring 0 4 8 A FLC functions e motor control functions ET Me NEM TO0 en VAC power indicator and communication protocol 195 2A FEC selection indicator LTMR100MFM 100 240 VAC e fault and warning LED indicators 5 100 A FLC network communication and alarm indicators e HMI communication LED indicator e test and reset function 1639501EN 04 09 2014 15 Introduction LTM E Expansion Module There are 2 models of LTM E expansion modules that provide voltage monitoring functionality and 4 additional logic inputs The LTM E expansion modules are powered by the LTM R controller via a connector cable LTM E Expansion Module Functional Description Reference Number voltage sensing 110 690 VAC 3 phase voltage inputs 4 additional discrete logic inputs power LED indicator logic input status LED indicators Additional components required for an optional expansion module e LTM R controller to LTM E connection cable LTMEV40BD 24 VDC logic inputs LTMEV40FM additional voltage protection metering and monitoring functions 100 240 VAC logic inputs HMI Device Magelis XBTN410 The system uses the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device with a liquid crystal display Magelis XBTN410 Functional Description Referenc
143. EN 04 09 2014 Commissioning Modbus Communication Checking Introduction Configure the networking function last Even when the connectors are plugged in communication between the controller s and the PLC cannot start until you enter the correct communication parameters via SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the HMI To select the communication parameters see Configuration of the LTM R Modbus Network Port page 288 You can then check whether your system can communicate properly The Modbus communication checking sequence is Step 1 Check the communication LEDs ok on the LTM R front face Step 2 Check the cabling and correct it if necessary Step 3 Check the configuration via PowerSuite or the HMI and correct it if necessary Step 1 On the LTM R front face check the following 2 LEDs 1 Fallback 2 PLC Comm The figure shows the LTM R front face with both Modbus communication LEDs ot NE 5 Cc 16 By 98 95y 96 MODBUS D D O D D D D 2705334 HM Comm Power Alami Test Reset SSCS WOSSSSSSG UL The communication Fallback is indicated by a red LED 1 If the red Fallback LED is Then OFF the LTM R is not in communication fallback mode ON the LTM R is in communication fallback mode 1639501EN 04 09 2014 235 Commissioning
144. ERATION LTM R controller operation cannot be stopped from the terminals when control channel is changed to Terminal Strip control channel if the LTM R controller is e operating in Overload operating mode and e configured in Bumpless and e operated over a network using Network control channel and e operating in Run state and e configured for 3 wire impulse control See instructions below Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage Whenever control channel is changed to Terminal Strip control channel operation of the LTM R controller cannot be stopped from the terminals because no terminal input is assigned to a STOP command 134 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions If this behavior is not intended the control channel must be changed to either Network control channel or HMI control channel to command a STOP To implement this change take one of the following precautionary steps e the commissioner should configure the LTM R controller for either bump transfer of control channel or 2 wire control e the installer should provide the LTM R controller with a means of interrupting current to the contactor coil for example a push button station wired in series with the LTM R controller outputs e the controls engineer should assign a terminal input to disable the Run command using Custom Configuration Mode assignments Fallback Transitions Th
145. EROM error Indicates either a bad checksum Config checksum error or good checksum but bad data Invalid config error Both caused by hardware failure Take the following steps 1 Cycle power and wait 30 s 2 Reset the configuration settings to factory settings 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Internal network communications failure A D out of range error These faults indicate a hardware failure Take the following steps 1 Cycle power and wait 30 s 2 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Diagnostic errors Start command check Stop command check Stop check back Run check back Check the following e relay outputs all wiring including e control wiring circuit including all electromechanical devices power wiring circuit including all components e load CT wiring After all checks are complete 1 Reset the fault 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller 1639501EN 04 09 2014 329 Maintenance Type Error Action Wiring config CT reversal error Correct the polarity of the CTs Be sure that errors e all external CTs face the same direction e all load CT wiring passes through windows in the same direction After the check is complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 Ifthe fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault still persists rep
146. Enable PC running SoMove with the TeSys T Enabled DTM Config Via Network Port Enable the network port PLC or PC running Enabled SoMove with TeSys T DTM This chapter describes comm the TeSys T DTM Commissioning Process issioning performed using the LTM CU control operator unit or SoMove with The commissioning process remains the same regardless which configuration tool you select This process includes the following stages Stage Description First power up The LTM R controller initializes and is ready for parameter configuration Configuring required settings Configure these parameters to move the LTM R controller out of its initialization state The LTM R controller is ready for operations Configuring optional settings Configure these parameters to support the LTM R controller functions required by the application Verifying hardware Check hardware wiring Verifying the configuration Confirm accurate parameter settings 1639501EN 04 09 2014 229 Commissioning First Power up Overview First power up describes the first time power is cycled to e anew LTM R controller or e an LTM R controller that has been previously commissioned but whose parameter settings have been restored to the factory settings either as a result of e execution of the Clear All Command or e a firmware upgrade On first power up the LTM R controller enter
147. Faults Count The number of internal faults experienced by the network module reported by the network module to the LTM R controller Network Port Config Faults Count The number of major faults experienced by the network module exclusive of network module internal faults reported by the network module to the LTM R controller Network Port Faults Count The number of times communications via the network port was lost Internal Fault Counters Description Fault History Fault History Faults detected for the following internal faults Counter Contains Controller Internal Faults Count The number of major and minor internal faults For information on internal faults see Controller Internal Fault page 40 Internal Port Faults Count The number of LTM R controller internal communication faults plus the number of failed attempts to identify the network communication module The LTM R controller stores a history of LTM R controller data that was recorded at the time of the last 5 detected faults Fault n O contains the most recent fault record and fault n 4 contains the oldest retained fault record Each fault record includes Fault Code Date and Time Value of Settings e Motor Full Load Current Ratio of FLCmax Value of Measurements e Thermal Capacity Level e Average Current Ratio e L1 L2 L3 Current Ratio e Ground Current Ratio e Full Load Current Max e Current Phase Imb
148. LCmax 233 FLCmin 233 frequency 34 53 313 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 full load current max 53 302 n 0 304 n 1 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 full load current settings 233 G general configuration register 1 317 register 2 317 general purpose registers for logic functions 325 ground CT primary 30 107 316 secondary 30 101 316 ground current 30 98 disable while motor starting 355 fault configuration 316 fault enable 98 355 faults count 52 276 ground fault disabled 98 mode 30 98 99 101 272 316 350 n 0 307 n 1 308 n 2 308 n 3 308 n 4 308 ratio 30 268 warning enable 98 272 355 ground current ratio 53 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 ground current transformer primary 350 secondary 350 ground fault disabled mode 316 H hardware configuration 243 LTM R controller alone 244 HMI language setting 320 language setting register 320 408 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Index HMI display active power enable 320 average current enable 320 average current ratio enable 320 average voltage enable 320 brightness setting 378 360 contrast setting 318 360 control channel enable 320 current phase imbalance enable 320 date enable 320 frequency enable 320 ground current enable 320 I O status enable 320 items register 1 320 items register 2 320 items register 3 320 L1 current enable 320 L1 current ratio
149. Level 3 Immunity to radiated fields According to EN61000 4 3 10V m Level 3 Immunity to fast transient bursts According to EN61000 4 4 All circuits 4 kV Level 4 2 kV on all other circuits the LTM R controller 1 Some certifications are in progress 2 he maximum rated ambient temperature of the LTM E expansion module depends on the installation spacing with 3 Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 4 NOTE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures 1639501EN 04 09 2014 343 Technical Data Immunity to radioelectric fields According to EN61000 4 6 4 10 V rms Level 3 Surge immunity According to IEC EN 61000 4 5 Common mode Differential mode 100 240 VAC inputs 4 kV 12 Q 2 kV 2 Q 24 VDC inputs 1 kV 12 Q 0 5 kV 2 Q Communication 1 kV 12 Q the LTM R controller 1 Some certifications are in progress 2 he maximum rated ambient temperature of the LTM E expansion module depends on the installation spacing with 3 Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 4 NOTE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromag
150. Logic input 9 bit 9 Logic input 10 bit 10 Logic input 11 bit 11 Logic input 12 bit 12 Logic input 13 bit 13 Logic input 14 bit 14 Logic input 15 bit 15 Logic input 16 458 Word Logic outputs status bit O Logic output 1 bit 1 Logic output 2 bit 2 Logic output 3 bit 3 Logic output 4 bit 4 Logic output 5 bit 5 Logic output 6 bit 6 Logic output 7 bit 7 Logic output 8 bits 8 15 Reserved 459 Word I O status bit O Input 1 bit 1 Input 2 bit 2 Input 3 bit 3 Input 4 bit 4 Input 5 bit 5 Input 6 bit 6 Input 7 bit 7 Input 8 bit 8 Input 9 bit 9 Input 10 bit 10 Input 11 bit 11 Input 12 bit 12 Output 1 13 14 bit 13 Output 2 23 24 bit 14 Output 3 33 34 bit 15 Output 4 95 96 97 98 1639501EN 04 09 2014 311 Use Monitoring of warnings Variables for monitoring of warnings are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 460 Ulnt Warning code See DT_WarningCode page 301 461 Word Warning register 1 bits 0 1 Not significant bit 2 Ground current warning bit 3 Thermal overload warning bit 4 Not significant bit 5 Jam warning bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning bit 7 Undercurrent warning bits 8 9 Not si
151. M R controller electronically interlocks 0 1 and O 2 For additional examples of two step autotransformer IEC diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams page 377 For examples of two step autotransformer NEMA diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams page 396 I O assignment Two step operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic Inputs 2 Wire Maintained Assignment 3 Wire Impulse Assignment 1 1 Control motor Start motor 1 2 Free Free 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop motor 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or Remote 1 Local 0 or Remote 1 1639501EN 04 09 2014 157 Motor Control Functions Two step operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic Outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 Step 1 contactor control 23 and 24 Step 2 contactor control Warning signal 0 2 0 3 33 and 34 O 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Two step operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI Keys 2 Wire Maintained Assignment 3 Wire Impulse Assignment Aux 1 Control motor Start motor Aux 2 Free Free Stop Stop motor while pressed Stop motor Timing Sequence The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Two Step operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration
152. Motor Protection Functions Current Phase Loss Description The current phase loss function signals e a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 from the average current in all 3 phases e afault when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 from the average current in all 3 phases for a set period of time NOTE Use this function to detect and guard against large current phase imbalances in excess of 80 of the average current in all 3 phases For smaller current imbalances use the current phase imbalance motor protection function This function has a single adjustable fault time delay which is applied when the motor is in start state or run state The function identifies the phase experiencing a current loss If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase current average is the same for 2 phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The current phase loss function includes the following features e 1 fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 80 of the 3 phase average current e 1 fault time delay e Current Phase Loss Timeout 2 function outputs e Current Phase Loss Warning e Current Phase Loss Fault 1 counting statistic e Current Phase Loss Faults Count 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases experiencing the current l
153. N 04 09 2014 397 Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding Consequent Pole Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram A1 A2 i L 5 l Dasan daia diaaa Daaa Aaaa Aaaa Aaaa Maia B1 L Low H High Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram L Low speed O Off H High speed 398 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram LS Low speed HS High speed H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram LS Low speed HS High speed H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control 1639501EN 04 09 2014 399 Wiring Diagrams
154. OOO2 y W 4 GFCTs are specified with a transformation ratio The ratio of the GFCT is the ratio of the ground fault current sensed to the current which it outputs To enable the controller to correctly measure the actual ground fault current flowing in the circuit set the following parameters e Ground CT Primary the first number of the GFCT ratio e Ground CT Secondary the second number of the GFCT ratio For a description of GFCT characteristics see Ground Fault Current Transformers page 17 1639501EN 04 09 2014 201 Installation Ground Fault Current Transformer Wiring The external ground fault current transformer GFCT must be connected to the LTM R controller terminals Z1 and Z2 using a shielded twisted pair cable The shield must be connected to the earth at both ends by the shortest possible connections 202 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Wiring Temperature Sensors Temperature Sensors The LTM R controller has 2 terminals dedicated to motor temperature sensing protection T1 and T2 These terminals return the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs One of the following types of motor temperature sensor can be used e PTC Binary e PT100 e PTC Analog e NTC Analog See Metering and Monitoring Functions page 27 and Motor Protection Functions page 59 for more information on temperature sensors Temperature Sensor Wiring The followi
155. PC to the LTM R controller refer to the TeSys T DTM for SoMove FDT Container Online help e orLTM CU HMI to edit parameters located in the Menu navigate to the sub menu settings and make the appropriate edits For information about required settings see Required and Optional Parameters page 232 1639501EN 04 09 2014 239 Commissioning 240 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Chapter 7 Use Overview This chapter describes e the user interface devices and the hardware configurations you can use to operate the LTM R controller e how to set parameters with each user interface e how to perform monitoring fault handling and control functions with each user interface What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 7 1 Using the LTM R Controller Stand Alone 242 7 2 Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit 246 7 3 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 249 7 4 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many 253 T9 Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM 282 7 6 Using the Modbus Communication Network 285 1639501EN 04 09 2014 241 Use Section 7 1 Using the LTM R Controller Stand Alone Overview This section describes how to use the LTM R controller either by itself or connected to an LTM E expansion module in a stand alone configuration without a user interface device What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics
156. Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 180 Ulnt Fault code n 1 181 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 1 FLC max 182 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 1 trip level 183 Ulnt Average current ratio n 1 FLC 184 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 1 FLC 185 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 1 FLC 186 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 1 FLC 187 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 1 x 0 1 FLC min 188 Ulnt Full load current max n 1 x 0 1 A 189 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 1 190 Ulnt Frequency n 1 x 0 1 Hz 2 191 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 1 x 0 1 Q 192 195 Word 4 Date and time n 1 See DT_DateTime page 297 196 Ulnt Average voltage n 1 V 1 197 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 1 V 1 198 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 1 V 1 199 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 1 V 1 200 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 1 1 201 Ulnt Active power n 1 x 0 1 kW 1 202 Ulnt Power factor n 1 x 0 01 1 203 209 Ulnt Not significant 1639501EN 04 09 2014 305 Use N 2 Fault Statistics The n 2 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 360 to 370 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 210 Ulnt Fault code n 2 211 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 2 FLC max 212 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 2 trip level 213 Ulnt Average current ratio n 2 FLC 214 Ulnt L1 current rat
157. S Low speed O Off HS High speed 1639501EN 04 09 2014 379 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control LS Low speed HS High speed Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control LS Low speed HS High speed 380 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 1 LS HS Stop tee ee LS Low speed HS High speed 1 Apole changing application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller firmware interlocks O 1 and 0 2 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Main
158. Terminal Strip control channel e Any terminal inputs assigned to start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e HMI and network start commands are ignored When using LTM CU the parameter Stop Terminal Strip Disable is set in the Control Setting register In HMI control the LTM R controller commands its outputs in response to start and stop commands received from an HMI device connected to the HMI port The following conditions apply to HMI control channel e Any HMI start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e Network start commands and terminal strip start commands are ignored When using LTM CU the parameter Stop HMI Disable is set in the Control Setting register 1639501EN 04 09 2014 133 Motor Control Functions Network In Network control a remote PLC sends commands to the LTM R controller through the network communication port The following conditions apply to Network control channel e Any network start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e The HMI unit can read but not write the LTM R controller parameters Control Transfer Mode Select the Control Transfer Mode parameter to enable bumpless transfer when changing the control channel clear this parameter to enable bump transfer The configuration setting for this parameter determines the behavior of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 as follows
159. Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 373 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 319 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 37T Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams 379 Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams 381 364 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a peers eee i A1 A2 KM1 B1 B2 Stop E KM1 1639501EN 04 09 2014 365 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a 366 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram 3a _ N Network TS Terminal strip 1639501EN 04 09 2014 367 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram 30 py
160. VAC RC circuit RZM041FU7 Use of DC Interposing Relays The DC interposing relays are recommended because long wires distances can be used to command the relay DC RSB1 relay voltage 24 VDC 48 VDC 110 VDC Maximum distance for wires in parallel 3 000 m 10 000 ft 3 000 m 10 000 ft 3 000 m 10 000 ft without metallic screening metallic screening Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 3 000 m 10 000 ft 3 000 m 10 000 ft 3 000 m 10 000 ft The following diagram shows an example when using DC interposing relays A1 A2 KA1 208 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Use of AC Interposing Relays The use of an AC interposing relay is allowed only on short distances if an AC voltage is mandatory AC RSB1 relay voltage 24 VAC 48 VAC 120 VAC 230 240 VAC Maximum distance for wires in parallel 3 000 m 1 650 m 170 m 550 ft 50 m 165 ft without metallic screening 10 000 ft 5 500 ft Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 2 620 m 930 m 3 000 ft 96 m 315 ft 30 m 100 ft metallic screening 8 600 ft The following diagram shows an example when using AC interposing relays A1 A2 KA1 LTM R Use of AC Interposing Relays with a Rectifier The use of AC interposing relay with a rectifier is recommended on long distances if an AC voltage is mandatory Add a rectifier composed of 1 A 1000 V diodes to command an AC
161. Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram F Forward R Reverse H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram Forward Reverse Hand Terminal strip control Off Automatic Network control POIT 1639501EN 04 09 2014 391 Wiring Diagrams Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram Start Stop B1 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram 392 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram
162. Word Controller AC inputs setting register bits 0 3 Controller AC logic inputs configuration see DT_ACInputSetting page 296 bits 4 15 Reserved 546 Ulnt Thermal overload setting bits 0 2 Motor temperature sensor type 0 None 1 PTC binary 2 PT100 3 PTC analog 4 NTC analog bits 3 4 Thermal overload mode 0 Definite 2 Inverse thermal bits 5 15 Reserved 547 Ulnt Thermal overload fault definite timeout s 548 Reserved 549 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor fault threshold x 0 1 Q 550 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor warning threshold x 0 1 9 551 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree C 552 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor warning threshold degree C 553 Ulnt Rapid cycle lockout timeout s 554 Reserved 555 Ulnt Current phase loss timeout x 0 1 s 556 Ulnt Overcurrent fault timeout s 557 Ulnt Overcurrent fault threshold FLC 558 Ulnt Overcurrent warning threshold FLC 1639501EN 04 09 2014 315 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 559 Word Ground current fault configuration B bit 0 Ground current mode bit 1 Ground fault disabled while star
163. Yes Preset Multiple Registers 0x10 16 multiple registers 0x2B 43 Read identification No Read Device Identification identification register The maximum number of registers per request is limited to 100 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Use of this device on a Modbus network that uses the broadcast function should be considered with caution This device has a large number of registers that must not be modified during normal operation Unintended writing of these registers by the broadcast function may cause unexpected and unwanted product operation For more information refer to the Communication variables list Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Example of a Read Operation Modbus Request Code 3 The example below describes a READ_VAR request within a TSX Micro or Premium platform in order to read the LTM R states at address 4 slave n 4 contained in internal word MWO j 1r Iram 1 1 If MO AND NOT MW100 X0 THEN READ VAR ADR 3 0 4 MW 455 1 MW0 1 MW100 4 RESET MO EN_IF 1 Address of the device with which you wish to communicate 3 device address 0 channel 4 device address on the bus Type of PL7 objects to be read MW internal word Address of the first register to be read 455 Number of consecutive registers to be read 1 Word table containing the value of the objects read MW0 1 Read repo
164. a given time period If a slave does not understand a message it sends an exception response to the master The master may or may not retransmit the request 2 types of dialog are possible between master and slaves e The master sends a request to a slave and waits for its response e The master broadcasts a request to all slaves without waiting for a response Direct slave to slave communications are not possible For slave to slave communication the master must therefore interrogate a slave and send back data received to the other slave The controller LTM R Modbus is of class A05 Transparent Ready 1639501EN 04 09 2014 287 Use Configuration of the LTM R Modbus Network Port Communication Parameters Before any communication can start use the TeSys T DTM or the HMI to configure the Modbus port communication parameters e Network port address setting Network port baud rate setting Network port parity setting Network port comm loss timeout Network port endian setting Network Port Address Setting The device address can be set between 1 and 247 Factory setting is 1 which corresponds to an undefined value Network Port Baud Rate Setting Possible transmission rates are 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19 200 Baud Autodetection Factory settings is Autodetection In Autodetection the controller is able to adapt its baud rate to that of the master 19 200 Baud is the first baud rate to be te
165. ad are dees 355 Voltaje es ere he oY bee nrn he awed e a bbe idee ddd cies eeese ened 357 POWEMS npea cheese aama SPE E weed Sucve aie dudpivg wld OR baled amp leaks Shoes BS 359 FIM e hetidode tae nated dedi edo pide dee ahh idtawedie heals EEE 360 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Appendix C Wiring Diagrams 0 000 cece 363 C 1 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams 0 00 tees 364 Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 00 000 tee 365 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 00 c eect tees 369 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 00 00 cee tees 371 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 0 cee eee 373 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 0 e eee eee 375 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 00 0 eee ee 377 Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 0 0 0 tee 379 Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams 00 00 e eee 381 C 2 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams 0 0 0 00 eee 383 Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 00 tees 384 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 000 cece ete 388 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 000 0c eee 390 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 0 e ee eee 392 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 00 00 aaan 394 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 00 0 cee ee 396 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding
166. ady state Voltage phase g T 0 j loss fault V2 w V2Vavg gt 0 38 x Vavg Ji V3 V3 Vavg gt 0 38x Vavg AND Voltage phase OR loss warning Oo p gt Vmax Ln voltage phase loss V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Ln Line voltage number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Vavg Vavg 3 phase average voltage T Fault timeout 1639501EN 04 09 2014 107 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings The voltage phase loss function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Technical Characteristics The voltage phase loss function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 45 of the 3 phase average voltage Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase loss fault of a motor in run state A V A 40 1 f Peete eesre eye year eas miei Fault timeout Fault timeout el ig o gt AV Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage 108 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Phase Reversal Description The voltage phase reversal function signals a fault when it det
167. age you can navigate to and edit the following current settings Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Current Th Overload Fault Thermal Overload Fault Enable FLC1 OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC2 OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio Trip Class Motor Trip Class Reset Level Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold Def O Time Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout O Time Def D Time Long Start Fault Timeout D Time Warn Thermal Overload Warning Enable Warn Level Thermal Overload Warning Threshold Phase Imb Loss Rev CURR PH IMB Fault Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStrt Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold CURR PH LOSS Fault Current Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Current Phase Loss Timeout Warn Current Phase Loss Warning Enable CURR PH REV Fault Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable Long Start Fault Long Start Fault Enable Fault Level Long Start Fault Threshold Fault Time Long Start Fault Timeout Jam Fault Jam Fault Enable Fault Level Jam Fault Threshold Fault Time Jam Fault Timeout Warn Jam Warning Enable Warn Level Jam Warning Threshold 16
168. al They follow the Modbus interoperability standards NOTE The product must be connected through only 1 port The use of the RJ45 connector is recommended RJ45 Connector Pinout The LTM R controller is connected to the Modbus network with a shielded RJ45 connector in compliance with the following wiring Front view The RJ45 wiring layout is Pin no Signal Description Not connected Not connected Not connected D1 or D B Transceiver terminal 1 DO or D A Transceiver terminal 0 Not connected Not connected INIO AJ AJOI N OVL Signal and power supply common 1639501EN 04 09 2014 219 Installation Open Style Terminal Block The LTM R controller has the following Modbus network plug in terminals and pin assignments Pin Signal Description 1 D1 or D B Transceiver terminal 1 2 DO or D A Transceiver terminal 0 3 S Modbus shield pin 4 V Signal and power supply common 5 NC Modbus VP pin not connected Open Style Terminal Block Characteristics Connector 5 pins Pitch 5 08 mm 0 2 in Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 Nem 5 Ib in Flat screwdriver 3 mm 0 10 in 220 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Wiring of the Modbus Network Overview The recommended way to connect an LTM R controller to a Modbus network on the RS 485 bus is the connection via the female shielded RJ45 c
169. al Overload Warning e Thermal Overload Fault e 2 counting statistics e Thermal Overload Faults Count e Thermal Overload Warnings Count 70 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Thermal overload warning and fault Definite time Definite time m Imax gt Is H gt Run state fjmmt amp Imax 12 gt Imax a Imax gt Is AND 13 B 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is Fault and warning threshold OC1 or OC2 T Fault timeout Parameter Settings B Thermal overload warning Thermal overload fault The definite time thermal overload function has the following configurable parameter settings e Motor high speed full load current ratio OC2 of an HMI or in the Parameters tab of the TeSys T DTM Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault threshold 5 100 of FLCmax in 1 increments 5 FLCmax e Motor full load current ratio OC1 Note OC1 and OC2 settings can be set or directly in Amperes in the Settings menu Thermal overload fault definite timeout O time or 1 300 s in 1 s increments 10s over current time Thermal overload warning threshold 20 800 of OC in 1 increments 80 of OC Long start fault timeout D time 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s 1 The definite time thermal overload function requires the simultaneous use of the Long start mo
170. alance e Voltage Phase Imbalance e Power Factor e Frequency e Motor Temp Sensor e Average Voltage e L3 L1 Voltage L1 L2 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage e Active Power 1639501EN 04 09 2014 53 Metering and Monitoring Functions Section 2 4 Motor History Overview The LTM R controller tracks and saves motor operating statistics Motor statistics can be accessed using e aPC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e an HMI device e aPLC via the network port What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Motor Starts Counters 55 Motor Starts Per Hour Counter 55 Load Sheddings Counter 55 Auto Restart Counters 55 Motor Last Start Current Ratio 56 Motor Last Start Duration 56 Operating Time 56 54 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Starts Counters Description The LTM R controller tracks motor starts and records the data as a statistic that can be retrieved for operational analysis The following statistics are tracked e Motor Starts Count e Motor LO1 Closings Count logic output O 1 starts e Motor LO2 Closings Count logic output O 2 starts The Clear Statistics Command resets the Motor Starts Count parameter to 0 NOTE The Motor LO1 Closings Count and Motor LO2 Closings Count parameters cannot be reset to 0 because these parameters together indicate the usage of the relay outputs over time M
171. ameters Setting Range Factory Setting Voltage dip mode 0 None 0 None 1 Load shedding 2 Auto restart Voltage dip threshold 50 115 of Motor nominal voltage 65 Voltage dip restart threshold 65 115 of Motor nominal voltage 90 Auto restart immediate timeout 0 0 4 s in increments of 0 1 s 0 2s Auto restart delayed timeout e 0 300 s timeout setting in 4s increments of 1 s 301 s timeout infinite Voltage dip restart timeout 0 9999 s in increments of 1 s 2s Technical Characteristics The automatic restart function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Timing accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639501EN 04 09 2014 117 Motor Protection Functions Automatic Restart Behavior Timing Sequence The automatic restart behavior is characterized by the voltage dip duration that is the amount of time passed from the voltage loss until the voltage restoration The 2 possible settings are e immediate restart timeout e delayed restart timeout with delay defined by Restart Delay Time The following diagram shows the automatic restart phases Immediate Restart Delayed Restart Manual Restart Auto restart immediate timeout a B Auto restart delayed timeout If the voltage dip duration is less than the immediate restart timeout and if the voltage dip is the second one occurring within 1 second then the
172. ana Dasal Jasas Jasal daaa AC Q LL B1 KM2 KM1 B2 Start FW Start forward Start RV Start reverse 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram FW Forward O Off RV Reverse 1639501EN 04 09 2014 371 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control Start FW Start forward Start RV Start reverse Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control FW Forward RV Reverse 372 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram a HH KM1 KM3 KM2 A1 A2 Start
173. ange Factory Setting Control direct transition On Off Off Motor transition timeout 0 999 9s 1s Motor Step 1 to 2 threshold 20 800 FLC in increments of 1 150 FLC Motor Step 1 to 2 timeout 0 1 999 9 s 5s Local Remote Control Diagnostic Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Controller AC logic inputs configuration Unknown Unknown e Lower than 170V 50Hz e Lower than 170V 60Hz e Greater than 170V 50Hz e Greater than 170V 60Hz Logic input 3 external ready enable e Disable Disable e Enable Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Rapid cycle lockout timeout 0 9999 s in increments of 1 s Os Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Control remote channel setting e Network Network e Terminal strip e HMI Control local channel setting e Terminal strip Terminal strip e HMI Control transfer mode e Bump Bump Bumpless Control remote local buttons enable e Disable Disable e Enable Control remote local default mode Remote Remote e Local Stop HMI disable e Enable Disable e Disable Stop terminal strip disable e Enable Disable e Disable Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Diagnostic fault enable e Disable Enable e Enable Diagnostic warning enable e Disable Enable e Enable Wiring fault enable e Disable Enable e Enable Motor phases sequence e ABC ABC e ACB 1639501EN 04 09 2014 351
174. ange the operation of control and monitoring functions e alter the predefined LTM R controller I O logic The configuration of the LTM R controller consists of 2 files e aconfiguration file that contains parameter configuration settings e a logic file that contains a series of logic commands that manage LTM R controller behavior including motor start and stop commands motor transitions between steps speeds and directions the valid control source and transitions between control sources fault and warning logic for relay outputs 1 and 2 and the HMI terminal strip reset functions PLC and HMI communication loss and fallback load shed rapid cycle starting and stopping LTM R controller diagnostics When a predefined operating mode is selected the LTM R controller applies a predefined logic file that permanently resides in the LTM R controller When custom operating mode is selected the LTM R controller uses a customized logic file created in the custom logic editor and downloaded to the LTM R controller from the TeSys T DTM 1639501EN 04 09 2014 163 Motor Control Functions Section 4 3 Fault Management and Clear Commands Overview This section describes how the LTM R controller manages the fault handling process and explains e how to select a fault reset mode and e controller behavior for each fault reset mode selection What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics
175. ansion module e a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e a Magelis XBTN410 HMI LTM R status indicating LEDs LED name Description HMI Comm Communication between LTM R controller and HMI device PC or LTM E expansion module Power LTM R controller power or internal fault condition Alarm Protection warning or fault or internal fault Fallback Communication loss between the LTM R controller and network or HMI control source PLC Comm Network activity 1639501EN 04 09 2014 23 Introduction Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module Overview The LTM E expansion module extends the monitoring and control functions of the LTM R controller by providing voltage measurement and additional logic inputs e 3 phase voltage inputs e 4 additional discrete logic inputs LTM E Expansion module LTM E Expansion module connected to an LTM R controller Front Face The LTM E expansion module front face includes the following features 4 QIKIVISQIS LV1 LV2 LV3 LEi 2705334 LTMEV40FM HMI LTMR BBE Hf Power 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 I 7 C7 18 C8 19 C9 1 10 C10 VOOROOSVY 5 Port with RJ45 connector to HMI or PC Port with RJ45 connector to LTM R controller Status indicating LEDs Plug in terminal voltage inputs Plug in terminal logic inputs a
176. arning enable Enable Disable Enable Network port comm loss timeout 0 99 99 s 2s In increments of 0 01 s Network port fallback setting e Hold 0 1 0 2 off Run e 0 1 0 2 off e 0 1 0 2 on e 0 1 off e 0 2 off 1 The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the network port fallback settings HMI Port Parameter Settings The LTM R controller monitors HMI port communications and reports both a warning and a fault if no valid communication has been received by the HMI port for longer than 7 seconds The HMI port communication has the following fixed and configurable settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting HMI port fault enable Enable Disable Enable HMI port warning enable Enable Disable Enable HMI port fallback setting e Hold 0 1 0 2 off e Run e 0 1 0 2 off e 0 1 0 2 on e 0 1 off e 0 2 off 1 The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the HMI port fallback settings 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Fallback Condition When the communication between the LTM R controller and either the network or the HMI is lost the LTM R controller is in a fallback condition When the communication recovers the fallback condition is no longer applied by the LTM R controller The behavior of logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 when the LTM R controller is in fallback condition is determined by e The operating mode see Operating Modes
177. arning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics The over power factor function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Over Power Factor Warning Threshold e Over Power Factor Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Over Power Factor Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Over Power Factor Warning e Over Power Factor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Over Power Factor Faults Count Block Diagram Over power factor warning Run state y amp Over power factor warning Power Factor cosp gt cosgs1 m AND Over power factor fault Power Factor p cos gt cosqs2 iet T o Over power e factor fault Run state p AND cosqgs1 Over power factor warning threshold cosos2 Over power factor fault threshold T Over power factor fault timeout Parameter Settings The over power factor function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 increments 0 90 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 increments 0 90 128 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Technical Characteristics The over power factor function has the following characteristics Cha
178. as a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage Vnom parameter setting The undervoltage function is available only in ready state and run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The undervoltage function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Undervoltage Warning e Undervoltage Fault e 1 counting statistic e Undervoltage Faults Count Undervoltage warning and fault Ready state Run state o _ Undervoltage warning vi p Vmax lt Vs1 V2 Vmax V3 Vmax lt Ys2 e T 0 Undervoltage fault amp es g Ready state m Se Run state __u AND OR V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout 110 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings The undervoltage function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage in 1 increments 85
179. ature 360 operating time 360 power consumption 367 power factor 367 reactive power 367 remaining thermal capacity 360 starts per hour 360 temperature C or F 360 thermal capacity level 360 time 360 time to trip 360 voltage phase imbalance 367 E expansion commercial reference 278 302 compatibility code 302 firmware version 302 ID code 302 serial number 302 expansion module physical description 24 external ground current 107 fault threshold 102 272 316 355 fault timeout 102 272 316 355 warning threshold 102 272 316 355 F fallback control transition 735 fallback condition 47 fault controller internal 309 current phase imbalance 309 current phase loss 309 current phase reversal 309 diagnostic 309 external system 309 ground current 309 HMI port 309 internal port 309 jam 309 long start 309 LTM E configuration 310 LTM R configuration 370 motor temperature sensor 309 network port 309 network port config 309 over power factor 309 overcurrent 309 overpower 309 overvoltage 309 register 1 309 register 2 309 register 3 310 reset timeout 68 test 309 thermal overload 309 under power factor 309 undercurrent 309 underpower 309 undervoltage 309 voltage phase imbalance 309 voltage phase loss 309 voltage phase reversal 309 wiring 309 fault code 53 174 175 309 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 fault
180. ault Time Network Port Comm Loss Timeout Warn Network Port Warning Enable HMI PORT COMM LOSS Fault HMI Port Fault Enable Warn HMI Port Warning Enable 1639501EN 04 09 2014 275 Use Statistics 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides read only statistics pages nested in levels 4 and 5 of the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller To navigate to the statistics page use one of the following paths Level From this page Select 1 Home page Controller currents or Controller status 2 Controller Currents page or Controller Status LTM R controller number page 3 Controller page Statistics Statistics From the settings page you can navigate to and read the following statistics Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Statistics Addr 1 8 CntrlTempMax Controller Internal Temperature Max OperTime Operating Time MtrStarts Motor Starts Count LastStartDur Motor Last Start Duration LastStart Motor Last Start Current All Faults Faults Count Th Ovid Fit Thermal Overload Faults Count Th Ovid Warn Thermal Overload Warnings Count Curr Imb Fit Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count LongStart Fit Long Start Faults Count UnderCurr FIt Undercurrent Faults Count Ground Faults Ground Current Faults Count VoltPhimb Fit Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count Under Volt Flt Undervolta
181. ault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function is available for all operating states Functional Characteristics The PTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features e 2 configurable thresholds e Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold e Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold e 2 function outputs e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e Motor Temp Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Block Diagram Motor temperature sensor warning o 8 gt s1 m Motor temperature sensor warning PTC Analog Motor temperature sensor fault o 9 gt s2 y Motor temperature sensor fault PTC Analog Temperature sensing element resistance 6s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 0s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold Parameter Settings The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault threshold 20 6500 Qin 0 1 Qincrements 20 Q Warning threshold 20 6500 Qin 0 1 Qincrements 20 Q Technical Characteristics The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Hysteresis 5 of Warning threshold and Fault threshold Detection time 0 5 0 6 s Detection time accuracy 0 1 s 1639501EN 04 09 2014 77 Motor Protec
182. ausing current to increase beyond the set threshold This function has a single fault time delay Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics The overcurrent function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Overcurrent Warning e Overcurrent Fault e 1 counting statistic e Overcurrent Faults Count Block Diagram Overcurrent warning and fault Run state y amp w Overcurrent warning H m e Imax gt lst _ J Ly 12 m Imax AND 13 0 Imax gt I2 T 0 O Overcurrent fault amp je al Run state AND 11 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout Parameter Settings The overcurrent function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 250 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 30 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 30 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC 96 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Technical Characteristics The overcurrent function has the following characteristics
183. ays remotely manage data for one or several sites via power generation and transport the Internet TeSys T Motor Management System LTM R Controller The 2 main hardware components of the system are the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module The system can be configured and controlled e using an HMI Human Machine Interface device Magelis XBT or TeSys TLTM CU e using a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e using a PLC connected to the system via the communication network Components such as external motor load current transformers and ground current transformers add additional range to the system The microprocessor based LTM R controller is the central component in the system that manages the control protection and monitoring functions of single phase or 3 phase AC induction motors The LTM R controller is designed to work over various fieldbus protocols This manual focuses only on systems designed to communicate over the Modbus protocol The range includes 6 LTM R controller models using Modbus communication protocol LTM R Controller Functional Description Reference Number e current sensing 0 4 100 A LTMRO8MBD 24 VDC e single phase or 3 phase current inputs 0 4 8 A FLC e 6 discrete logic inputs LTMR27MBD 24 VDC 4relay outputs 3 SPST 1 DPST 1 35 27 A FLC e connections for a ground current sensor e connection for a motor temperature sensor LTMR100MBD 24 V
184. bee edwe aa ea 56 2 5 System Operating Status dengann ELN ee ee eee eee 57 Motor State cv recek erkis ucak traning Bae ee Paw wee edad E dba whe ook 58 Minimum Wait TiM crcs 282 0ene2 Oe eee eae nde e ire diarioa ES ER OPS ere eee ae 58 Chapter 3 Motor Protection Functions 0 00 ccc es 59 3 1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction 0 000 ccc eee 60 DGHINIVONS eotieci treenien tea be tae he baa ke sane bea e besa eda wae dea ae maga 61 Motor Protection Characteristics 0 0 0 eee eee 62 3 2 Thermal Motor Protection Functions 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 64 Thermal Overload 3 20 s ce8 lt ccs o ese ee Bate bw Pate had ane envy Sader Skis ee he cee we 65 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal 000 0 cee eee eee eee 66 Thermal Overload Definite Time 00 0 0c eee 70 Motor Temperature Sensor 0 000 cece tee tees 72 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary 0 0 cece eae 73 Motor Temperature Sensor PT100 0 0 c cee tee 75 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog 0000 0 cece eee tee eee 77 Motor Temperature Sensor NTC Analog 0 cece tees 79 Rapid Cycle Lockout reeniro nen ikea dale ohne Ek a ba PA are eae Bete Pe 81 3 3 Current Motor Protection Functions 0000 0c cette 83 Current Phase Imbalance 0 00 0 ee eee eee eens 84 Current Phas OSS sib uk ce faced belied Pawel iow wed adi anbe ou we tad nie dad e
185. c format of data types is DT_xxx List of Data Types Here is the list of the most commonly used data types DT_ACInputSetting DT_CommercialReference DT_DateTime DT_ExtBaudRate DT_ExtParity DT_FaultCode DT_FirmwareVersion DT_Language5 DT_OutputFallbackStrategy DT_PhaseNumber DT_ResetMode DT_WarningCode These data types are described below DT_AClInputSetting DT_AClInputSetting format is an enumeration that improves AC input detection Value Description 0 None factory setting 1 lt 170 V 50 Hz 2 lt 170 V 60 Hz 3 gt 170 V 50 Hz 4 gt 170 V 60 Hz DT_CommercialReference DT_CommercialReference format is Word 6 and indicates a Commercial Reference Register MSB LSB Register N character 1 character 2 Register N 1 character 3 character 4 Register N 2 character 5 character 6 Register N 3 character 7 character 8 Register N 4 character 9 character 10 Register N 5 character 11 character 12 Example Addresses 64 to 69 Word 6 Controller Commercial Reference If Controller Commercial Reference LTM R Register MSB LSB 64 L T 65 M space 66 R 67 68 69 296 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use DT_DateTime DT_DateTime format is Word 4 and indicates Date and Time Register Bits 12 15 Bits 8 11 Bits 4 7 Bits 0 3 Register N S S 0 0 Register N 1 H H m m Register N 2 M M D D Register N
186. channel selection Terminal strip or HMI is determined by setting the Control local channel setting in the Control setting register In remote control the control channel selection is always Network unless an LTM CU is present In this case the control channel selection is determined by setting the Control remote channel setting in the Control setting register If an LTM CU is present the logic input 1 6 and the local remote button on the LTM CU are used together to select between local and remote control source Logic Input I 6 LTM CU Local Remote Status Active Control Source Inactive Local Active Local Local Remote or not present Remote NOTE e The Network control channel is always considered as 2 wire control regardless of the operating mode selected e In 3 wire mode Stop commands can be disabled in the Control setting register e In 2 wire mode Stop commands given by the non controlling channel shall always be ignored e Run commands from a channel other than the selected control channel shall be ignored For a predefined operating mode only one control source may be enabled to direct the outputs You can use the custom logic editor to add one or more additional control sources In Terminal Strip control the LTM R controller commands its outputs according to the state of its inputs This is the control channel factory setting when logic input 1 6 is inactive The following conditions apply to
187. ck fault or warning if the current is detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Start command No current flowing for less than 0 5 seconds Current flowing for less than 0 5 seconds 1639501EN 04 09 2014 43 Metering and Monitoring Functions Wiring Faults Description The LTM R controller checks external wiring connections and reports a fault when it detects incorrect or conflicting external wiring The LTM R controller can detect 4 wiring errors e CT Reversal Error e Phase Configuration Error e Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Errors short circuit or open circuit Enabling Fault Detection CT Reversal Error Wiring diagnostics are enabled using the following parameters Protection Enabling Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting CT Reversal Wiring Fault Enable e Yes Yes e No Phase Configuration Motor Phases if set to single phase e Single phase three phase e three phase Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Motor Temperature Sensor Type if set toa e None None sensor type and not to None e PTC binary e PT100 e PTC analog e NTC analog When individual external load CTs are used they must all be installed in the same direction The LTM R controller checks the CT wiring and reports an error if it detects one of the current transformers is wired backwards when compared to the others This function can be enabled and disabled Phase Configuration Error The LTM R controller chec
188. codes and standards e Follow all electromagnetic compatibility rules described in this manual e Follow all installation and wiring rules described in this manual Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 5 1 Installation 180 5 2 Wiring of the Modbus Network 217 1639501EN 04 09 2014 179 Installation Section 5 1 Installation Overview This section describes the installation procedures and wiring principles of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page General Principles 181 Dimensions 182 Assembly 184 Mounting 187 Wiring Generalities 192 Wiring Current Transformers CTs 196 Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers 201 Wiring Temperature Sensors 203 Wiring Power Supply 204 Wiring Logic Inputs 207 Wiring Logic Outputs 21 Connecting to an HMI Device 213 180 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation General Principles Functional Safety Introduction The TeSys T motor management system is a part of a global architecture To provide the functional safety some risks must be analyzed such as e global functional risks e risk of hardware and software breakdown
189. controller monitors the instantaneous phase voltage and detects voltage dip conditions The voltage dip detection shares some parameters with the Load shedding function 3 restart sequences are managed by the function according to the duration of the voltage dip e Immediate restart the motor restarts automatically e Delayed restart the motor restarts automatically after a timeout e Manual restart the motor restarts manually A Run command is necessary All automatic restart timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state When an automatic restart timer is counting at the time it is adjusted the new duration time does not become effective until the timer expires This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings The automatic restart function includes the following features e 3 time delays e Auto Restart Immediate Timeout e Auto Restart Delayed Timeout e Voltage Dip Restart Timeout e 5 status flags Voltage Dip Detection the LTM R is in a dip condition Voltage Dip Occurred a dip has been detected in the last 4 5 seconds Auto Restart Immediate Condition Auto Restart Delayed Condition e Auto Restart Manual Condition e 3 counting statistics e Auto Restart Immediate Count e Auto Restart Delayed Count e Auto Restart Manual Count The automatic restart function has the following parameters Par
190. counters protection 52 1639501EN 04 09 2014 407 Index fault enable current phase imbalance 318 current phase loss 319 current phase reversal 319 diagnostic 319 ground current 318 HMI port 378 jam 318 long start 378 motor temperature sensor 319 network port 378 over power factor 319 overcurrent 319 overpower 319 overvoltage 319 register 1 378 register 2 319 test 318 thermal overload 378 under power factor 319 undercurrent 378 underpower 319 undervoltage 319 voltage phase imbalance 319 voltage phase loss 319 voltage phase reversal 319 wiring 319 fault management 164 introduction 165 fault power cycle requested 310 fault reset authorized 310 auto reset active 310 fault reset mode 266 270 317 352 automatic 169 manual 167 remote 172 fault statistics 50 history 53 faults count 51 276 304 auto resets 303 controller internal 303 current phase imbalance 303 current phase loss 304 diagnostic 304 ground current 303 HMI port 303 internal port 303 jam 303 long start 303 motor temperature sensor 304 network port 303 network port config 303 over power factor 304 overcurrent 304 overpower 304 overvoltage 304 thermal overload 303 under power factor 304 undercurrent 303 underpower 304 undervoltage 304 voltage phase imbalance 304 voltage phase loss 304 wiring 304 first power up 230 FLC 139 159 FLC settings 233 FLC1 159 FLC2 159 F
191. cted to a network and The following parameter setting using either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display of the HMI device e Thermal Overload Fault Reset Confirm that the PLC can command the intended start stop and remote reset functions 238 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Commissioning Verify Configuration Overview Process The final step in the commissioning process is to verify that all configurable parameters used in the application are properly configured When performing this task a master list of all the parameters to be configured and the desired settings is required It is imperative to compare this list against the actual settings of the configured parameters Verifying parameter settings is a 3 part process e Transfer the configuration file from the LTM R controller to the PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM This allows to view the LTM R controller s present parameter settings For information on transferring files from the LTM R controller to the PC refer to the TeSys T DTM for SoMove FDT Container Online help e Compare the master list of intended parameters and settings against the same settings located in the parameter list tab in SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e Change the configuration settings as desired Do this using e either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM then download the edited file from the PC to the LTM R controller For information on transferring files from the
192. d The Warnings Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any warning Auto Reset Counter Description The Auto Reset Count parameter contains the number of times the LTM R controller attempted but failed to auto reset a fault This parameter is used for the 3 auto reset fault groups If an auto reset attempt is successful defined as the same fault not recurring within 60 s this counter is reset to zero If a fault is reset either manually or remotely the counter is not incremented For information on fault management see Fault Management and Clear Commands page 164 1639501EN 04 09 2014 51 Metering and Monitoring Functions Protection Faults and Warnings Counters Protection Fault Counts Protection fault counters include Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count Current Phase Loss Faults Count Current Phase Reversal Faults Count Ground Current Faults Count Jam Faults Count Long Start Faults Count Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Over Power Factor Faults Count Overcurrent Faults Count Overpower Faults Count Overvoltage Faults Count Thermal Overload Faults Count Under Power Factor Faults Count Undercurrent Faults Count Underpower Faults Count Undervoltage Faults Count Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count Voltage Phase Reversal Faults Count Protection Warning Counts The Thermal Overload Warnings Count parameter contains the total number of
193. d is activated The LTM R controller can change direction from forward to reverse and reverse to forward in 1 of 2 modes e Standard Transition mode The Control Direct Transition bit is Off This mode requires a Stop command followed by count down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout anti backspin timer e Direct Transition mode The Control Direct Transition bit is On This mode automatically transitions after the count down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout anti backspin timer In terminal strip control channel logic input 1 1 controls logic output O 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 In Network or HMI control channels the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output 0 1 and the Motor Run Reverse Command controls logic output O 2 Logic input I 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bit in memory Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low Logic outputs 0 1 0 2 and O 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error NOTE See Control Wiring and Fault Management page 146 for information about the interaction between the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagram 1639501EN 04 09 2014 151 Motor Control Functions Reverser Application Diagram The following wiring diagram represents a simplifie
194. d Monitoring Functions Section 2 2 System and Device Monitoring Faults Overview The LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module detect faults which affect the LTM R controller ability to work properly internal controller check and check of communications wiring and configuration errors The system and device monitoring fault records can be accessed via e a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e an HMI device e a PLC via the network port What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Controller Internal Fault 40 Controller Internal Temperature 41 Control Command Error Diagnostic 42 Wiring Faults 44 Configuration Checksum 46 Communication Loss 46 Time to Trip 48 LTM R Configuration Fault 48 LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning 48 External Fault 49 1639501EN 04 09 2014 39 Metering and Monitoring Functions Controller Internal Fault Description The LTM R controller detects and records faults that are internal to the device itself Internal faults can be either major or minor Major and minor faults can change the state of output relays Cycling power to the LTM R controller may clear an internal fault When an internal fault occurs the Controller Internal Fault parameter is set Major Internal Faults During a major fault the LTM R controller is unable to reliably execute its own programming and can only a
195. d commands for a selected LTM R controller Menu Structure Outline The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many menu structure presents the following outline of levels and pages Level Pages Description 1 Home page The starting page navigation to all other pages begins here Opens on start up when no faults exist 2 Controller currents page e Displays average current as a percent of FLC for every LTM R controller e Provides a link to each LTM R controllers menu structure Controller status page e Displays operating status On Off Fault for every LTM R controller e Provides a link to each LTM R controller s menu structure Fault pages Displays a series of pages each page describing an active fault Opens automatically when a fault exists Remote reset page Executable commands for the remote reset of each LTM R controller Reset to defaults page Executable commands to reset statistics or settings for each LTM R controller XBTN reference page Describes communication settings application program file programming software version and HMI firmware version 3 Controller page For a selected LTM R controller e Displays dynamically changing parameter values Self Test command e Links to its settings statistics and Product ID information 4 5 6 Settings page and sub pages Contains configurable settings for a selected LTM R controller Statistics page and sub pages Presents statistics for a selected LTM R controlle
196. d example of the LTM R controller in a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control reverser application 3a Start Start FW Stop A1 A2 E E QOQ B1 Start FW Start forward KM2 KM1 B2 Start RV Start reverse 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of reverser operating mode IEC diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams page 371 For examples of reverser operating mode NEMA diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams page 390 1 0 Assignment Reverser operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic Inputs 2 Wire Maintained Assignment 3 Wire Impulse Assignment 1 1 Forward run Start motor forward 1 2 Reverse run Start motor reverse 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop motor 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or Remote 1 Local 0 or Remote 1 Reverser operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic Outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 KM1 contactor control Forward 0 2 23 and 24 KM2 contactor control Reverse 0 3 33 and 34 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Warning signal Fault signal 152 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Reverser operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI Keys 2 Wire Maintained Assignment 3 Wire Impulse Assig
197. d protect it against irrecoverable hardware or software failure e Continuously review operating statistics e Save LTM R controller parameter configuration settings to a backup file e Maintain the LTM R controller s operating environment e Periodically perform a LTM R controller self test e Check the LTM R controller internal clock to ensure accuracy Statistics The LTM R controller collects the following types of information e real time voltage current power temperature I O and fault data e acount of the number of faults by fault type that occurred since last power up e atime stamped history of the state of the LTM R controller displaying measures of voltage current power and temperature at the moment that each of the previous 5 faults occurred Use either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM a Magelis XBTN410 HMI ora TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit to access and review these statistics Analyze this information to determine whether the actual record of operations indicates a problem Configuration Settings In the event of irrecoverable LTM R controller failure you can quickly restore configuration settings if you saved these settings to a file When the LTM R controller is first configured and every subsequent time any configuration settings are changed use SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to save the parameter settings to a file To save a configuration file e Select File Save As To restore the saved configura
198. de provides the following logic outputs Logic Outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 Responds to network control commands 23 and 24 Responds to network control commands Warning signal 0 2 0 3 33 and 34 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Overload operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI Keys Assignment Aux 1 Free Aux 2 Free Stop Free Parameters Overload operating mode requires no associated parameter settings 148 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Independent Operating Mode Description Use Independent operating mode in single direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Functional Characteristics This function includes the following features Accessible in 3 control channels Terminal Strip HMI and Network The LTM R controller does not manage the relationship between logic outputs O 1 and O 2 In terminal strip control channel logic input 1 1 controls logic output O 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 In network or HMI control channels the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output O 1 and the Logic Output 23 Command parameter controls logic output O 2 Logic input I 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bit in memory Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too l
199. e Look for any of the following faults or warnings overpower underpower e over power factor under power factor The list of all or read only parameters in SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the scrolling HMI display of the HMI device Look for unexpected values in the following parameters e active power e reactive power power factor Control Circuit Wiring To verify control circuit wiring check the following Look at Action The control wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual control wiring matches the intended control wiring as described in the control wiring diagram The LTM R controller Power LED If the LED is off the LTM R controller may not be receiving power The LTM R controller HMI LED If the LED is off the LTM R controller may not be communicating with the LTM CU or the PC running SoMove The LTM E expansion module Power LED If the LED is off the LTM E expansion module may not be receiving power Current Transformer Wiring Verify the load current transformer wiring and if the application includes external load current transformers also verify that wiring by checking the following Look at Action The external CT wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagram The following load CT parameter settings using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e Load
200. e Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 increments 0 60 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 increments 0 60 126 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Technical Characteristics The under power factor function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 3 or 10 for cos 2 0 6 Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an under power factor fault coso cos 2 N G bocce eee Fault timeout lt _ _ cosqgs2 Under power factor fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 127 Motor Protection Functions Over Power Factor Description The over power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals e a warning when the value of the power factor exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the value of the power factor exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay The over power factor protection function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and w
201. e LTM R controller enters a fallback state when communication with the control source is lost and exits the fallback state when communication is restored The transition into and out of the fallback state is as follows Transition Control Source Transfer Entering the fallback state Bumpless when the Control Direct Transition bit is on Exiting the fallback state Determined by the settings for Control Transfer Mode bump or bumpless and Control Direct Transition on or off For information on how to configure communications fallback parameters refer to the topic Communication Loss see page 47 When using LTM CU the parameters Control Transfer Mode and Control Direct Transition parameters are set in the Control Setting register 1639501EN 04 09 2014 135 Motor Control Functions Operating States Introduction The LTM R controller responds to the state of the motor and provides control monitoring and protection functions appropriate to each of the motor s operating states A motor can have many operating states Some operating states are persistent while others are transitional A motor s primary operating states are Operating State Description Ready The motor is stopped The LTM R controller e detects no fault is not performing load shedding is not counting down the rapid cycle timer is ready to start Not Ready The motor is stopped The LTM
202. e Number e configures the system through menu entries e displays parameters warnings and faults separate power source e LTM R LTM E to HMI communication cable e Magelis XBTL1000 programming software XBTN410 HMI XBTZ938 cable Additional components required for an optional HMI device XBTL1000 software HMI Device LTM CU Control Operator Unit The system uses the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit HMI device with a liquid crystal display and contextual navigation keys The LTM CU is internally powered by the LTM R Refer to the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User Manual for more information LTM CU Control Operator Unit Functional Description Reference Number e configures the system through menu entries displays parameters warnings and faults e control the motor Additional components required for an optional HMI device e LTM R LTM E to HMI communication cable LTM CU LTM9CU 0 HMI communication cable TCSMCNAM3M002P cable kit LTM9KCU Kit for portable LTM CU 16 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Introduction SoMove with the TeSys T DTM SoMove software is a Microsoft Windows based application using the open FDT DTM technology SoMove contains many DTMs A specific DTM exists for the TeSys T motor management system SoMove with the Functional Description TeSys T DTM Reference Number SoMove
203. e Thermal Overload inverse thermal functions include the following features e 1 motor trip class setting e Motor Trip Class e 4 configurable thresholds e Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC1 e Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio FLC2 e Thermal Overload Warning Threshold e Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold e 1 time delay e Fault Reset Timeout e 2 function outputs e Thermal Overload Warning e Thermal Overload Fault e 2 counting statistics e Thermal Overload Faults Count e Thermal Overload Warnings Count e 1 setting for an external auxiliary motor cooling fan e Motor Aux Fan Cooled e 1 measure of utilized thermal capacity e Thermal Capacity Level NOTE For LTM R controllers configured for 2 speed predefined operating mode 2 fault thresholds are used FLC1 and FLC2 11 gt 12 Imax max p S a Bmax gt s1 Thermal overload warning 13 B inverse time p Motor auxiliary fan cooled ite Thermal overload fault Omax gt 100 P inverse time Motor trip class TC Imax Maximum current Omax Thermal capacity level 0s1 Thermal overload warning threshold 68 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following configurable parameter settings Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting FLC1 FLC2 0 4 8 0 A in increments of 0 0
204. e electromagnetic environmental risks To reduce the electromagnetic environment risks installation rules and wiring must be respected For more information on EMC refer to the Electrical Installation Guide chapter ElectroMagnetic Compatibility Wiki version available in English only on www electrical installation org Installation Rules Installation rules that must be respected to enable the LTM R to operate correctly include e installation rules for the components e association of the LTM R controller with the LTM E expansion module e installation in a switchboard such as Okken Blokset or another type e LTM R controller wiring rules see page 192 e wiring of the power supply e wiring of the I Os logic input wiring and logic output wiring e communication network wiring rules see page 217 Installation Rules in a Switchboard The installation of the LTM R controller in the withdrawable drawer of a switchboard presents constraints specific to the type of switchboard e For installation of the LTM R controller in an Okken switchboard see the Okken Communications Cabling amp Wiring Guide available on request e For installation of the LTM R controller in a Blokset switchboard see the Blokset Communications Cabling amp Wiring Guide available on request e For installation of the LTM R controller in other types of switchboard follow the specific EMC instructions described in this manual and refer to the relative instr
205. e response of the LTM R controller to a fault include the following e output 0 4 contacts e contact 95 96 is open e contact 97 98 is closed e Alarm LED is On steady red e fault status bits are set in a fault parameter e atext message is displayed in an HMI screen if an HMI is attached e a fault status indicator is displayed in the TeSys T DTM if connected The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults for each protection function After a fault has occurred merely resolving the underlying condition does not clear the fault To clear the fault the LTM R controller must be reset See Fault Management Introduction page 165 A warning is a less serious though still undesirable operating condition A warning indicates corrective action may be required to prevent a problem condition from occurring If left unresolved a warning may lead to a fault condition Warning related parameters can be configured for most protection functions The response of the LTM R controller to a warning include the following output O 3 is closed Alarm LED flashes red twice per second warning status bits are set in a warning parameter a text message is displayed in an HMI screen if attached a warning status indicator is displayed in the TeSys T DTM NOTE For some protection functions warning detection shares the same threshold as fault detection For other protection functions warning detection has a separate warning threshold
206. e voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time NOTE A composed phase is the combined measure of 2 phases L1 L2 L2 L3 or L3 L1 This function e is active when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module e is active when the average voltage is between 50 and 120 of the nominal voltage e is available when the motor is in ready state start state and run state e applies only to 3 phase motors This function has 2 adjustable fault time delays e one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state and e one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in run state or when the long start time duration expires Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state NOTE Use this function to detect and guard against smaller voltage phase imbalances For larger imbalances in excess of 40 of the average voltage in all 3 phases use the voltage phase loss motor protection function Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics The voltage phase imbalance function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold 2 fault time delays e Fault Timeout Starting e Fault Timeout Running e 2 function outputs e Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning e Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault e 1 counting statistic e Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count 3 indicators identifying the pha
207. eactive power consumption x 0 1 kVARh 1 147 Ulnt Auto restart immediate count 148 Ulnt Auto restart delayed count 149 Ulnt Auto restart manual count The last fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 300 to 310 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 150 Ulnt Fault code n 0 151 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 0 FLC max 152 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 0 trip level 153 Ulnt Average current ratio n 0 FLC 154 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 0 FLC 155 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 0 FLC 156 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 0 FLC 157 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 0 x 0 1 FLC min 158 Ulnt Full load current max n 0 x 0 1 A 159 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 0 160 Ulnt Frequency n 0 x 0 1 Hz 2 161 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 0 x 0 1 Q 162 165 Word 4 Date and time n 0 See DT_DateTime page 297 166 Ulnt Average voltage n 0 V 1 167 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 0 V 1 304 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use N 1 Fault Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 168 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 0 V 1 169 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 0 V 1 170 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 0 1 171 Ulnt Active power n 0 x 0 1 kW 1 172 Ulnt Power factor n 0 x 0 01 1 173 179 Not significant The n 1 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 330 to 340
208. ection Functions Voltage Dip Management Overview When a voltage dip is detected the LTM R can perform 2 different functions to shed and reconnect automatically the load e Load shedding see page 115 e Automatic restart see page 117 Selection is done via the Voltage dip mode parameter If Voltage dip mode is Then 0 nothing happens 1 load shedding function is enabled 2 automatic restart function is enabled Load Shedding and Automatic Restart functions exclude each other 114 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Load Shedding Description The LTM R controller provides load shedding which you can use to deactivate non critical loads if voltage level is substantially reduced For example use load shedding when power is transferred from a main utility supply to a backup generator system where the backup generator system can supply power only to a limited number of critical loads The LTM R only monitors load shedding when Load Shedding is selected With the load shedding function enabled the LTM R controller monitors the average phase voltage and e reports a load shedding condition and stops the motor when voltage falls below a configurable Voltage dip threshold and stays below the threshold for the duration of a configurable load shedding timer e clears the load shedding condition when voltage rises above a configurable Voltage dip restart threshold and remains ab
209. ects that the voltage phases of a 3 phase motor are out of sequence usually indicating a wiring error Use the Motor Phases Sequence parameter to configure the direction ABC or ACB in which the motor will turn This function e is available when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module e is active when the average voltage is between 50 and 120 of the nominal voltage e is available when the motor is in ready state start state and run state e applies only to 3 phase motors e has no warning and no timer This function can be enabled or disabled Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings The voltage phase reversal function adds one counting statistic Wiring Faults Count The voltage phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Motor phases sequence e A B C A B C e A C B Technical Characteristics The voltage phase reversal function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Trip time within 0 2 s Trip time accuracy 0 1s 1639501EN 04 09 2014 109 Motor Protection Functions Undervoltage Description The undervoltage function signals e a warning when voltage in a phase falls below a set threshold e a fault when voltage in a phase falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time This function h
210. edicated to the LTM R controller with AC supply voltage Use an LTM9F external filter when the power supply output voltage exceeds 150 VAC and presents risks of voltage peaks over 300 VAC This rule applies even when an UPS is used as AC power supply This is due to the different types of UPS available and their operating modes If an LTM9F is required on one LTM R controller with AC supply voltage an LTM9F must be used on each LTM R controller with AC supply voltage on the system The LTMOF external filter must not be used when the power supply output voltage is lower than 150 VAC When LTMOF external filter is used with an UPS the filter is wired after the UPS as shown below 1639501EN 04 09 2014 205 Installation Power Supply Daisy Chaining When the same power supply AC or DC is used to supply several LTM R controllers it is recommended to close the loop e to avoid power off e to reduce voltage drop due to long cables 206 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Wiring Logic Inputs Overview 10 logic inputs maximum are provided e 6 logic inputs on the LTM R controller internally powered by the LTM R e 4 logic inputs on the LTM E expansion module independently powered SSS m m a a Power 1 7 1 8 19 110 QYOVOVYVY Logic Inputs of the LTM R Controller The controller LTM R has 6 logic inputs e available via field wiring terminals 1 1 1 6 e in
211. edit is effective when the timer finishes counting This function has no warning and no fault NOTE The Rapid Cycle Lockout function is not active when the overload operating mode is selected Functional Characteristics The rapid cycle lockout function includes the following parameters e 1 time delay e Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout e 1 status bit e Rapid Cycle Lockout In addition the Rapid Cycle Lockout function e disables motor outputs e causes the LTM R Alarm LED to flash 5 times per second Parameter Settings The rapid cycle lockout function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Rapid cycle lockout timeout 0 9999 s in increments of 1 s Os Technical Characteristics The rapid cycle lockout function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639501EN 04 09 2014 81 Motor Protection Functions Example A Rapid cycle lockout timeout a B a pu a Run commands Run commands ignored acknowledged 20 FLC m t 82 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Section 3 3 Current Motor Protection Functions Overview This section describes the current motor protection functions of the LTM R controller What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Cu
212. eference product number Exp Module Firmware Expansion Firmware Version Network Type Network Port ID Code Network Firmware Network Port Firmware Version 278 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Monitoring 1 to many Overview Use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1 to many configuration to monitor e operating status and average current for multiple LTM R controllers or e current voltage and power parameters for a selected LTM R controller Monitoring Multiple LTM R Controllers Navigate to the following pages to simultaneously monitor these dynamically changing values for all LTM R controllers Page Value Controller currents page Average current ratio Controller status page Operating status On Off Fault For more information on both pages see Controller Currents Page page 265 Monitoring a Single LTM R Controller Navigate to the Controller page for a selected LTM R controller to monitor the dynamically changing values of the following parameters e Current e Average Current Ratio L1 Current Ratio L2 Current Ratio L3 Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Current Phase Imbalance e Thermal e Thermal Capacity Level e Time To Trip e Motor Temp Sensor e Voltage Average Voltage L1 L2 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage L3 L1 Voltage Voltage Phase Imbalance e Power e Power Factor e Active Power e Reactive Power For more information on the Controller page see Controller
213. either a e lt v at the left end of a command line or e v at the right end of a command line If a value write command is unsuccessful the HMI displays an error message Value write commands include Value write command Task Location Clear Settings Clears settings and restores factory settings Reset to Defaults page Clear Statistics Clears statistics and restores factory settings Self Test Performs a self test Controller page Reset Manual Enables manual resetting of faults Reset page Reset Remote Enables remote resetting of faults Reset Automatic Enables automatic resetting of faults Example Use the or the gt arrow key to execute a value write command When a value write command executes the lower case v next to the arrow becomes an upper case V as shown below then quickly returns to a lower case v after the command executes Scroll within page Execute command Controller 1 Avg Current 90 FLC L1 Current 85 FLC p Statistics y Self Test Product ID Home Statistics Self Test EE Product ID gt Home 262 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Menu Structure 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many menu structure is hierarchical in its design and consists of 6 levels of individual pages The upper menu structure levels provide information and commands for the HMI itself and for all LTM R controllers connected to the HMI The lower menu structure levels provide settings statistics an
214. emperature The Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter contains the highest internal temperature expressed in C detected by the LTM R controller s internal temperature sensor The LTM R controller updates this value whenever it detects an internal temperature greater than the current value The maximum internal temperature value is not cleared when factory settings are restored using the Clear All Command or when statistics are reset using a Clear Statistics Command 1639501EN 04 09 2014 41 Metering and Monitoring Functions Control Command Error Diagnostic Description The LTM R controller performs diagnostic tests that detect and monitor the proper functionality of control commands There are 4 control command diagnostic functions Start Command Check Run Check Back Stop Command Check Stop Check Back Parameter Settings All 4 diagnostic functions are enabled and disabled as a group The configurable parameter settings are Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Diagnostic Fault Enable Yes No Yes Diagnostic Warning Enable Yes No Yes Start Command Check Run Check Back The Start Command Check begins after a Start command and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the main circuit to ensure that current is flowing e The Start Command Check reports a Start Command fault or warning if current is not detected after a delay of 1 second e The Start Command Check conditions ends
215. en a fault occurs the number of active faults by selecting Faults in the Home page Pages often contain more than 4 lines of text See Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many page 258 for instructions on how to navigate within and between pages 1639501EN 04 09 2014 255 Use Page examples The Home page The top 4 lines of the Home page TeSys T wxx IMPORTANT Controller Currents Use the V button to scroll down and reveal more of this page Note click on a flashing EA to navigate to that page Controller Status Faults Remote Reset Reset to Defaults Fault message pages The opening fault message page Note the fault name THERMAL OVERLOAD and the 1 2 LTM R controller address Controller 1 both flash when enn THERMAL OVERLOAD Controller 1 Click the S button to display additional fault message 2J 2 pages GROUND CURRENT Controller 2 Click the V button to scroll down and reveal more of the Controller 2 Ground Current fault message CORRECT ORIGIN OF THE GROUND FAULT BEFORE RESET 256 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Command Lines 1 to many Overview Command Lines Use the HMI keypad and D keys to execute text line commands A command line is identified by a e gt atthe right end of the text line or e atthe left end of the text line
216. en the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module e is active when the average voltage is between 50 and 120 of the nominal voltage e is available when the motor is in ready state start state or run state e applies only to 3 phase motors This function has a single adjustable fault time delay NOTE Use this function to detect and guard against large voltage phase imbalances in excess of 40 of the average voltage in all 3 phases For smaller voltage imbalances use the voltage phase imbalance motor protection function The function identifies the phase experiencing a voltage loss If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase voltage average is the same for 2 phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The voltage phase loss function includes the following features e A fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 38 of the 3 phase average voltage e Asingle adjustable fault time delay e Voltage Phase Loss Timeout e 2 function outputs e Voltage Phase Loss Warning e Voltage Phase Loss Fault e 1 counting statistic e Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count e 3 indicators identifying the phase experiencing the voltage loss e L1 L2 Voltage loss e L2 L3 Voltage loss e L3 L1 Voltage loss Voltage phase loss fault and warning Vi Vi Vavg gt 0 38 x Vavg Re
217. ency function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Hz Accuracy 2 Resolution 0 1 Hz Refresh interval 30 ms 34 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line to Line Voltages Description The line to line voltages function provides the rms value of the phase to phase voltage V1 to V2 V2 to V3 and V3 to V1 e L1 L2 voltage phase 1 to phase 2 voltage e L2 L3 voltage phase 2 to phase 3 voltage e L3 L1 voltage phase 3 to phase 1 voltage The expansion module performs true rms calculations for line to line voltage up to the 7th harmonic Single phase voltage is measured from L1 and L3 Characteristics The line to line voltages function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit VAC Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 VAC Refresh interval 100 ms Line Voltage Imbalance Description Formulas Characteristics The line voltage imbalance function displays the maximum percentage of deviation between the average voltage and the individual line voltages The line voltage imbalance calculated measurement is based on the following formulas Calculated Measurement Formula Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 1 in Vi1 100 x V1 Vavg Vavg Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 2 in Vi2 100 x V2 Vavg Vavg Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 3 in Vi3
218. er see page 133 bits 0 1 Reserved bit 2 Control remote local default mode with LTM CU 0 remote 1 local bit 3 Reserved bit 4 Control remote local buttons enable with LTM CU 0 disable 1 enable bits 5 6 Control remote channel setting with LTM CU 0 network 1 terminal strip 2 HMI bit 7 Reserved bit 8 Control local channel setting 0 terminal strip 1 HMI bit 9 Control direct transition 0 stop required during transition 1 stop not required during transition bit 10 Control transfer mode 0 bump 1 bumpless bit 11 Stop terminal strip disable 0 enable 1 disable bit 12 Stop HMI disable 0 enable 1 disable bits 13 15 Reserved 684 692 Reserved 693 Ulnt Network port comm loss timeout x 0 01 s Modbus only 694 Ulnt Network port parity setting Modbus only 695 Ulnt Network port baud rate setting Baud see DT_ExtBaudRate page 298 696 Ulnt Network port address setting 697 699 Not significant 1639501EN 04 09 2014 321 Use Command Variables Command Variables Command variables are described below Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 700 Word Logic outputs command register bit O Logic output 1 command bit 1 Logic output 2 command bit 2 Logic output 3 command bit 3 Logic output 4 command bit 4 Logic output 5 command bit 5 Logic output 6 command bit 6 Logic output 7 command bit 7 Logic outpu
219. er part of the auxiliary connector to the ground of the withdrawable drawer to create an electromagnetic barrier See the Okken Communications Cabling amp Wiring Guide available on request e Do not connect the cable shield at the fixed part of the auxiliary connector e Place a line terminator at each end of the bus to avoid malfunctions on the communication bus A line terminator is generally already integrated in the master e Wire the bus between each connector directly without intermediate terminal blocks e The common polarity OV must be connected directly to protective ground preferably at one point only for the entire bus In general this point is chosen either on the master device or on the polarization device For more information refer to the Electrical Installation Guide available in English only chapter ElectroMagnetic Compatibility EMC NOTICE COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION Respect all the wiring and grounding rules in order to avoid communication malfunctions due to EMC disturbance Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 1639501EN 04 09 2014 221 Installation LTM R Controllers Installed in an Enclosure The wiring diagram for connection of LTM R controllers installed in an enclosure to the RS 485 bus via the RJ45 connector is as follows
220. ernal feature 1639501EN 04 09 2014 207 Installation Connection of the Logic Inputs Two types of connection are possible e Direct connection for all information on logic inputs coming from the switchboard e Connection via interposing relays for all information on logic inputs coming from outside of the switchboard and mainly connected with long lines Using interposing relays reduces EMC disturbance effects on the LTM R controller and improves the reliability of the information Recommended Interposing Relay Interposing relays must have the following characteristics e electromechanical relay with 2 5 kVAC isolation minimum e self cleaning or low level contact I lt 5 mA e installed in the switchboard as close as possible to the LTM R controller e ACorDC control circuit voltage supplied by separate power supply not supplied by the same power supply as the LTM R controller to respect the galvanic isolation In case of long distances between the process and the LTM R controller interposing relays with DC control circuit voltage are recommended The protection module is mandatory on the interposing relays in order to suppress the surge The following Schneider Electric RSB1 interposing relays are recommended Reference Number Control Circuit Voltage Protection Module RSB1A120 D 6 12 24 48 60 110 VDC Diode RZM040W RSB1A120 7 24 48 VAC RC circuit RZM041BN7 RSB1A120 7 120 220 230 240
221. ertilizers paint Transportation industry e automotive transfer lines airports Other industry e tunnel machines cranes Complex machine segments Includes highly automated or coordinated machines used in pumping systems paper conversion printing lines e HVAC 14 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Introduction Supported Industries The motor management system supports the following industries and associated business sectors Industry Sectors Application Building office buildings Control and manage the building facilities e shopping centers critical HVAC systems industrial buildings water ships air e hospitals gas cultural facilities electricity airports steam Industry e metal mineral and mining cement control and monitor pump motors glass steel ore extraction control ventilation microelectronic control load traction and movements petrochemical view status and communicate with machines ethanol process and communicate the data captured chemical pulp and paper industry remotely manage data for one or several sites via pharmaceutical the Internet food and beverage Energy and water treatment and transportation control and monitor pump motors Infrastructure transportation infrastructure for people control ventilation and freight airports road tunnels remotely control wind turbine subways and tramw
222. erview User Map variables are designed to optimize the access to several non contiguous registers in one single request You can define several read and write areas The user map can be defined via e aPCrunning SoMove with TeSys T DTM e a PLC via the network port User Map Variables Example of Use User Map variables are divided into 2 groups User Map Addresses 800 to 898 User Map Values 900 to 998 The User Map Address group is used to select a list of addresses to read or write It can be considered as a configuration area The User Map Value group is used to read or write values associated to addresses configured in the User Map Address area e Read or write of register 900 allows to read or write the register address defined in register 800 e Read or write of register 901 allows to read or write the register address defined in register 801 The User Map Address configuration below gives an example of user map address configuration to access non contiguous registers User Map Address Register Value Configured Register 800 452 Fault register 1 801 453 Fault register 2 802 461 Warning register 1 803 462 Warning register 2 804 450 Minimum wait time 805 500 Average current 0 01 A MSW 806 501 Average current 0 01 A LSW 850 651 HMI display items register 1 851 654 HMI display items register 2 852 705 Control register 2 With this configuration
223. es Start state Run state A l Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average 88 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Current Phase Reversal Description The current phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the current phases of a 3 phase motor are out of sequence with the Motor Phases Sequence parameter ABC or ACB NOTE When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module phase reversal protection is based on voltage phase sequence before the motor starts and on current phase sequence after the motor starts This function e is active when the motor is in start state or run state e applies only to 3 phase motors e has no warning and no timer This function can be enabled or disabled Functional Characteristics The current phase reversal function adds to one counting statistic Wiring Faults Count Parameter Settings The current phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Phase sequence e A B C A B C e A C B Technical Characteristics The current phase reversal function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Trip time at motor startup within 0 2 s of motor startup Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639501EN 04 09 2014 89 Motor Protection
224. es the maximum current level reached during the last start of the motor and reports the value in the Motor Last Start Current Ratio parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes This value may also be used to help configure the long start threshold setting in the long start protection function The value is not stored in the non volatile memory it is lost at a power cycle The motor last start current ratio function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy e 1 for 8 A and 27 A models e 2 for 100 A models Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms Motor Last Start Duration Description Characteristics Operating Time The LTM R controller tracks the duration of the last motor start and reports the value in the Motor Last Start Duration parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes This value may also be useful in setting the long start delay timeout used in the long start and definite trip overload protection functions The value is not stored in the non volatile memory it is lost at a power cycle The motor last start duration function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit s Accuracy 1 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 1s Description The LTM R controller tracks motor operating time and records the value in the Operating Time parameter Use this information to help
225. eset page 266 reset to defaults page 266 service commands 281 settings page 269 statistics page 276 value write command 262 XBTN reference page 267 maintenance 327 detecting problems 328 troubleshooting 329 metering and monitoring functions 27 minimum wait time 309 410 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Index motor auxiliary fan cooled 65 68 269 317 full load current 350 full load current high speed 350 full load current ratio 53 68 71 159 271 350 full load current ratio FLC1 320 full load current ratio high speed 350 full load power 122 124 high speed full load current ratio 68 71 159 271 high speed full load current ratio FLC2 320 last start current 276 314 last start current ratio 56 last start duration 56 276 314 LO1 starts count 55 LO2 starts count 55 nominal power 269 316 350 350 350 nominal voltage 110 112 269 316 350 operating mode 315 350 phases 44 317 phases number 350 phases sequence 109 317 predefined operating mode 144 rapid cycle lockout timeout 357 restart time undefined 310 speed 310 star delta 317 350 starting 310 starts count 55 starts per hour count 55 314 step 1 to 2 threshold 154 269 351 step 1 to 2 timeout 154 269 351 temperature sensor 268 temperature sensor type 315 transition lockout 310 transition mode 351 transition timeout 153 154 159 269 315 351 trip class 68 271 317 motor average current ratio 310 runni
226. ess practices not related to physical injury Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical equipment and its installation and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved 1639501EN 04 09 2014 10 1639501EN 04 09 2014 About the Book 7 At a Glance Document Scope Validity Note This manual describes the Modbus network protocol version of the TeSys T LTM R motor management controller and LTM E expansion module The purpose of this manual is to e describe and explain the monitoring protection and control functions of the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module e provide all the information necessary to implement and support a solution that best meets your application requirements The manual describes the 4 key parts of a successful system implementation e installing the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module e commissioning the LTM R controller by setting essential parameter values e using the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module both with and without additional human machine interface devices e maintaining the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module Th
227. fault enable e Disable Enable e Enable Thermal overload fault reset threshold 35 95 in increments of 1 75 Thermal overload warning enable e Disable Enable e Enable Thermal overload warning threshold 10 100 in increments of 1 85 Long start fault timeout 1 200 s in increments of 1 s 10s Thermal overload fault enable e Disable Enable e Enable Thermal overload fault definite timeout 1 300 s in increments of 1 s 10s Thermal overload warning enable e Disable Enable e Enable Parameters Setting range Factory setting Motor temperature sensor type e None None e PTC binary e PT100 e PTC analog e NTC analog Motor temperature sensor fault enable e Disable Disable e Enable Motor temperature sensor fault threshold 20 6 500 Q 20 Q Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree 0 200 C 0 C Motor temperature sensor warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 20 6 500 Q 209 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 0 200 C o c degree 354 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Configurable Parameters Current Ground Current Phases Long Start Parameters Setting range Factory setting Ground current disable while motor starting e No No e Yes Ground current fault enable e Disable Enable e Enable Internal ground current fault threshold 20 500 FLCmin in increments of 1 30 FLCmin Internal ground current fault timeout 0 5
228. for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Modbus Network Characteristics 218 Modbus Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics 219 Wiring of the Modbus Network 221 1639501EN 04 09 2014 217 Installation Modbus Network Characteristics Overview The Modbus over Serial Line Specification and Implementation Guide published on www modbus org defines the characteristics of the Modbus protocol over serial line The LTM R Modbus controller complies with this specification Modbus Network Standard Diagram The standard diagram corresponds to the Modbus specification on the www modbus org site and in particular to the 2 wire multidrop serial bus diagram The simplified diagram is as follows Master N 2 A 5 Characteristics for Connection to the RS 485 Bus The RS 485 standard allows variants of some characteristics e polarization e line terminator e number of slaves e bus length Characteristics Value Maximum number of stations 32 stations i e 31 slaves without repeater Type of trunk cable Single shielded twisted pair cable with 120 Q characteristic impedance and at least a third conductor Maximum bus length 1 000 m 3 300 ft at 19 200 Baud Maximum length of tap offs e 20 m 66 ft for one tap off e 40 m 1371 ft
229. g for low or single speed motors FLC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio FLC parameter setting for high speed motors FLCmax Full Load Current Max Peak current parameter H hysteresis A value added to lower limit threshold settings or subtracted from upper limit threshold settings that retards the response of the LTM R controller before it stops measuring the duration of faults and warnings 1639501EN 04 09 2014 403 Glossary 404 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Index A A active power 37 38 53 268 313 consumption 38 n 0 277 305 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 307 n 4 307 altitude derating controller 342 LTM E expansion module 344 apparent power 37 auto restart delayed condition 313 delayed count 304 delayed restart timeout 358 delayed timeout 117 316 immediate condition 313 immediate count 304 immediate restart timeout 358 immediate timeout 117 316 manual condition 313 manual count 304 status register 313 auto reset attempts group 1 setting 170 270 319 attempts group 2 setting 170 270 319 attempts group 3 setting 170 270 319 count 51 group 1 timeout 170 270 319 group 2 timeout 170 270 319 group 3 timeout 170 270 319 automatic fault reset attempts group1 352 attempts group2 352 attempts group3 352 timeout group1 352 timeout group2 352 timeout group3 352 automatic restart 117 average current n 0 277 307 n 1 277 308 n 2 308 n 3 308 n 4
230. gating to the Home page scrolling to the Faults command line then clicking the S keypad button If you open the fault display when no faults are active the HMI displays the message No Faults Present Magelis XBT Communication Loss If a key is pressed while the Magelis XBT HMI device loses communication the keypad update will not be complete When the communication with the LTM R is back the following message displays 203 Cannot connect to controller Press any key or power cycle the device 280 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Service Commands 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 in 1 to many configuration provides the following service commands Command Description Location Reference Self Test Performs an internal check of the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module Level 3 Controller page See Controller Page page 268 and Self Test with Motor On page 332 Reset to Defaults Statistics Executes the Clear Statistics Command for a selected LTM R controller Level 2 Reset to Defaults page See Reset to Defaults Page page 266 Reset to Defaults Settings Executes the Clear Controller Settings Command for a selected LTM R controller Level 2 Reset to Defaults page See Reset to Defaults Page page 266 Remote Reset Performs remote fault reset for a selected LTM R controller Level 2 Remote Reset page See Remote Reset Page page 266
231. ge Faults Count Over Volt Fit Overvoltage Faults Count HMI Loss FIt HMI Port Faults Count Ntwk Int FIt Network Port Internal Faults Count Ntwk Cnfg FIt Network Port Config Faults Count Ntwk Port Flt Network Port Faults Count Cntrl Int Fit Controller Internal Faults Count InterPort Fit Internal Port Faults Count 276 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Statistics Addr 1 8 Fault n 0 Fault Code Fault Code n 0 Date MMDDYYYY Date And Time n 0 Time HHMMSS Date And Time n 0 FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 0 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 0 Avg Current Average Current n 0 L1 Current L1 Current Ratio n 0 L2 Current L2 Current Ratio n 0 L3 Current L3 Current Ratio n 0 GRCurr Ground Current Ratio n 0 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 0 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 0 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 0 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 0 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 0 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 0 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 0 Frequency Frequency n 0 Active Pwr Active Power n 0 Power Factor Power Factor n 0 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 0 Fault n 1 Fault Code Fault Code n 1 Date MMDDYYYY Date And Time n 1 Time HHMMSS Date And Time n 1 FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 1 FLC Max Motor Full Load C
232. gelis XBTN410 HMI For instructions on downloading software application files see Download 1 to many Software Application Files page 251 Transfer Steps To transfer a software application file from Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Step Action 1 Supply power to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 2 Connect the PC 9 PIN Com1 port to the 25 pin data port on the HMI using an XBT Z915 programming cable The HMI LCD reads FIRMWARE VX X WAITING FOR TRANSFER Start up the Magelis XBT_L1000 programming software Close all child windows in the programming software In the File menu select Open The Open dialog is displayed OJJA w In the Open dialog navigate to the 1 to many software application file with a dop extension and click Open The programming software displays the selected file N In the Transfers menu select Export When notified that the Export command will destroy the existing application click OK to continue the export The HMI LCD indicates DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS and then DOWNLOAD COMPLETED Click OK when the programming software reports Transfer accomplished successfully 252 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Section 7 4 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many Overview This section describes how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers in a 1 HMI to many LTM R c
233. girex Type Maximum Inside Diameter Transformation Ratio Reference Ground Current Transformers Current mm ine Number TA30 65A 30 1 18 1000 1 50437 PA50 85 A 50 1 97 50438 1A80 160 A 80 3 15 50439 MA120 250A 120 4 72 50440 SA200 400 A 200 7 87 50441 PA300 630A 300 11 81 50442 POA 85 A 46 1 81 50485 GOA 250 A 110 4 33 50486 1639501EN 04 09 2014 17 Introduction Cables System components require cables to connect to other components and communicate with the network communication cable 2 5 m 8 2 ft length Cable Description Reference Number Connecting jumper 0 04 m 1 57 in length for side by side LTMCC004 connection of the LTM R and LTM E LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 0 3 m 11 81 in length LTM9CEXP03 LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 1 0 m 3 28 ft length LTM9CEXP10 Modbus network communication cable 0 3 m 11 81 in length VW3A8306R03 Modbus network communication cable 1 0 m 3 28 ft length VW3A8306R10 Modbus network communication cable 3 0 m 9 84 ft length VW3A8306R30 LTM R LTM E to Magelis HMI device connection cable XBTZ938 2 5 m 8 20 ft length LTM R LTM E to LTM CU HMI device connection cable LTM9CU10 1 0 m 3 28 ft length LTM R LTM E to LTM CU HMI device connection cable LTM9CU30 3 0 m 9 84 ft length Cable kit includes LTM E LTM R LTM CU to PC TCSMCNAM3M002P 18 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Introduction System Se
234. gnals e a warning when the value of the power factor falls below a set threshold e a fault when the value of the power factor falls below a separately set threshold and remains below that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay The under power factor protection function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics The under power factor function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Under Power Factor Warning Threshold e Under Power Factor Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Under Power Factor Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Under Power Factor Warning e Under Power Factor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Under Power Factor Faults Count Block Diagram Under power factor warning Run state p R Under power factor warning Power Factor cose lt coss1 gt _ gt AND Under power factor fault Power Factor gt cose lt cos s2 b Under power i amp to factor fault Run state ___u f AND cosqgs1 Under power factor warning threshold cos s2 Under power factor fault threshold T Under power factor fault timeout Parameter Settings The under power factor function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Rang
235. gnificant bit 10 HMI port warning bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning bits 12 14 Not significant bit 15 Network port warning 462 Word Warning register 2 bit O Not significant bit 1 Diagnostic warning bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Overcurrent warning bit 4 Current phase loss warning bit 5 Current phase reversal warning bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning bit 9 Not significant bit 10 Undervoltage warning bit 11 Overvoltage warning bit 12 Underpower warning bit 13 Overpower warning bit 14 Under power factor warning bit 15 Over power factor warning a a gt 3 a 463 Word Warning register 3 bit O0 LTM E configuration warning bits 1 15 Reserved 464 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree C 312 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Monitoring of measurements Variables for monitoring of measurements are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 465 UInt Thermal capacity level trip level 466 UInt Average current ratio FLC 467 UInt L1 current ratio FLC 468 UInt L2 current ratio FLC
236. gs count Motor LO2 closings count Motor starts per hour count 0 5 mn Yes Load sheddings count 1 Yes Motor last start current ratio FLC e 1 for 8 A and 27 A models Yes 2 for 100 A models Motor last start duration s 1 No Operating time s Yes Controller internal temperature max C 4 C Yes 1639501EN 04 09 2014 345 Technical Data Recommended Contactors Recommended Contactors You can use the following contactor types e Schneider Electric IEC style contactors from the TeSys Dor TeSys F ranges e Square D NEMA style contactors from the S range TeSys D IEC Contactors Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys D IEC contactors are listed in the table below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required TeSys D catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages references Frequency maintained interposing relay not interposing relay required Hz max required LC1D09 LC1D38 50 60 7 5 AC 24 32 36 42 48 60 AC 277 380 400 415 100 127 200 208 220 440 480 575 600 690 230 240 6 DC std 24 DC std 36 48 60 72 96 100 110 125 155 220 250 440 575 2 4 DC low consumption 24 DC low consumption 48 72 96 110 220 250 LC1D40 LC1D95 26 AC 24 32 42 48 110 AC 256 277 380 115 120
237. hange speed in 2 scenarios e The Control Direct Transition bit is Off requires a Stop command followed by expiration of the Motor Transition Timeout e The Control Direct Transition bit is On automatically transitions from high speed to low speed after a time out of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout In terminal strip control channel logic input 1 1 controls logic output O 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 In Network or HMI control channels when the Motor Run Forward Command parameter is set to 1 and e Motor Low Speed Command is set to 1 logic output O 1 is enabled e Motor Low Speed Command is set to 0 logic output O 2 is enabled Logic input 1 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bit in memory Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low Logic outputs 0 1 O 2 and O 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error NOTE See Control Wiring and Fault Management page 146 for information about the interaction between the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagrams 1639501EN 04 09 2014 159 Motor Control Functions Two Speed Dahlander Application Diagram The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two speed 3 wire impulse terminal strip control Dahlander consequent pole
238. has 2 configurable parameters e a timeout the Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Timeout parameter and e a maximum number of permissible fault resets the Auto Reset Attempts Group number 1 2 or 3 Setting parameter A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION An auto reset command may restart the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2 wire control circuit Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage After power is cycled the LTM R controller clears and sets to 0 the values of the following parameters e Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Timeout and e Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Setting On a successful reset the Number of Resets count is cleared and set to 0 A reset is successful if after reset the motor runs for 1 minute without a fault of a type in the designated group If the maximum number of automatic resets has been reached and if the last reset has failed the reset mode turns to Manual When the motor restarts the automatic mode parameters are set to 0 Emergency Restart Number of Resets Use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command in applications where it is necessary to clear the Thermal Capacity Level parameter following a Thermal Overload inverse thermal fault This command permits an emergency restart before the motor has actually cooled
239. hase imbalance enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display frequency enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display power factor enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display active power enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display reactive power enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display power consumption enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed 1639501EN 04 09 2014 361 Configurable Parameters 362 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Appendix C Wiring Diagrams Overview The LTM R operating mode wiring diagrams can be drawn according to IEC or NEMA standards A A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH e Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it e Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury NOTICE LOGIC INPUTS DESTRUCTION HAZARD e Connect the LTM R controller s inputs using the 3 Common C terminals connected to the A1 control voltage via an internal filter e Do not connect the Common C terminal to the A1 or A2 control voltage inputs Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page C 1 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams 364 C 2 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams 383 163
240. hecks at power up and during operation Problems with either the LTM R controller or expansion module can be detected using e Power and Alarm LEDs on the LTM R controller Power and Input LEDs on the expansion module LCD Display on either a Magelis XBTN410 HMI device or a TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit connected to the LTM R controller s HMI port or e SoMove with the TeSys T DTM running on a PC connected to the LTM R controller s HMI port The LEDs on the LTM R controller and expansion module can indicate the following problems LTM R LED LTM E LED Problem Power Alarm PLC Alarm Power Off Solid red Internal fault On Solid red Protection fault On Flashing red 2x per second Protection warning On Flashing red 5x per second Load shed or rapid cycle On Solid red Internal fault Magelis XBT HMI Device The Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically displays information about a fault or warning including LTM R controller self diagnostic faults and warnings when it occurs For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1 to many configuration see Fault Management 1 to many page 280 LTM CU Control Operator Unit The TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit automatically displays information about a fault or warning For more information see Faults and Warnings Display in TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User s Manual SoMo
241. hen mounted the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller dimensions see page 182 by 8 mm 0 3 in in both directions To mount the controller on Telequick Step Action 1 Attach the 6 mounting clips to Telequick as shown in the diagram below The rounded edge should face upwards for the top clips and downwards for the bottom clips 2 Position the controller and expansion module on the clips so that the holes in the clips and the holes in the controller and expansion module align Insert the screws in the holes and turn them slightly 188 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Step Action 3 When the controller and expansion module are properly positioned tighten first the bottom screws then the top screws using a screwdriver Torque to 1 Nem 8 8 Ib in Operating Position You can mount the controller and the expansion module at an angle of up to 90 degrees perpendicular to the normal vertical mounting plane 90 VWIYOPOOOOVOY It 12 13 C 14 15 C 16 Eg 17 C7 18 C8 1 9 C9 1 10 C10 SYVSYS989S 1639501EN 04 09 2014 189 Installation Replacing the Terminal Strips The standard terminal strips of the controller and expansion module can be replaced with alternative terminal strips if required With alternative terminal strips wires are connected perpendicularly to the controller or expansi
242. iad Pied Moka E E S Configuring the Magelis XBTNAIO See Ae eeta Pia ded Sat Bini Seated aged Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software 0 00 e eee eee Download 1 to many Software Application Files 2 0 0 cece ete Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI 0 5 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many 0 0 0 eee ee Physical Description 1 to many 0 2 0 0 cc cece teens Command Lines 1 to many 0 0 00 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many 0 0 e eet Editing Values 1 to many 147 149 151 154 159 163 164 165 167 169 172 174 176 179 180 181 182 184 187 192 196 201 203 204 207 211 213 217 218 219 221 227 228 230 232 233 235 237 239 241 242 243 244 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 257 258 259 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many 0 0 e eee 262 Menu Structure 1 to many 0 0 0 etna 263 Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many 0 0 0 0 cece eee 264 Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many 0 265 Controller Page 1 to many 0 0 0 cette eee 268 Settings 11osMany iniec2egihede Medial ead eee hehe bees Gh ae 269 Statistics 1 t0 MAany c2ccncee scocca teehee ew aaa piana GEN dee he RA Pee Oe 276 Product ID i to many ieies see 2d shee eta Fae eek oe BA ah dae eee Pe a 278 Monitor
243. il Step Action 1 Using a screwdriver pull down the white locking mechanism to release the controller 2 Lift the controller away from the DIN rail 1639501EN 04 09 2014 187 Installation Mounting on a Solid Mounting Plate You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a metal mounting plate using ST2 9 steel tapping screws 4 for the controller and 2 for the expansion module The thickness of the mounting plate must not exceed 7 mm 0 275 in When mounted the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller dimensions see page 182 by 8 mm 0 3 in in both directions To mount the controller and the expansion module on a mounting plate Step Action 1 Locate the 4 mounting holes at each corner of the controller and the 2 mounting holes on the expansion module 2 Position the controller and expansion module on the mounting plate making sure to leave enough space for the clearance zone See Dimensions page 182 Insert each of the 6 tapping screws 4 Use a screwdriver to tighten each screw and secure the controller and the expansion module in place Torque to 1 Nem 8 8 Ib in mm 75 5 in 2 97 14 5 57 Padl 6 x M4 x 20 8 x 32 1 Nem 8 8 Ib in Mounting on a TE Plate You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a TE plate such as Telequick using 6 mounting clips AF 1 EA4 W
244. imbalance 8 Undercurrent 10 HMI port 11 LTM R internal temperature 18 Diagnostic 19 Wiring 20 Overcurrent 21 Current phase loss 23 Motor temp sensor 24 Voltage phase imbalance 25 Voltage phase loss 27 Undervoltage 28 Overvoltage 29 Underpower 30 Overpower 31 Under power factor 32 Over power factor 33 LTM E configuration 46 Start check 47 Run checkback 48 Stop check 49 Stop checkback 109 Network port comm loss 555 Network port configuration 1639501EN 04 09 2014 175 Motor Control Functions LTM R Controller Clear Commands Overview Clear commands allow the user to clear specific categories of LTM R controller parameters Clear all parameters Clear the statistics Clear the thermal capacity level Clear the controller settings Clear the network port settings The Clear commands can be executed from e aPC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e an HMI device e aPLC via the network port Clear All Command If you want to change the configuration of the LTM R controller you may want to clear all existing parameters in order to set new parameters for the controller The Clear All Command forces the controller to enter configuration mode A power cycle is performed to restart correctly in this mode This enables the controller to pick up the new values for the cleared parameters When you clear all parameters static characteristics are also lost Only the following parameters are n
245. ing 1 tosMany sapsi eee acre ee nate One waa sale eR oe eee ee eee 279 Fault Management 1 to many 0 0 0 0 cette 280 Service Commands 1 to many 0 00 ete 281 7 5 Using SoMove with the TeSys TDTM 20000 e eect eee 282 Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM 200002 eee eeeeeeee 283 Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library 0 0 0 0 284 7 6 Using the Modbus Communication Network 00000 0c eee 285 Modbus Protocol Principle 2 0 0 0 ccc cece eee e eee eee ee teneeeeney 287 Configuration of the LTM R Modbus Network Port 0 0 00 e eee eee 288 Simplified Control and Monitoring 0 0 0 cece eee 289 Modbus Request and Programming Examples 00 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeeee 290 Modbus Exception Management 0 00 e eee tenes 292 User Map Variables User Defined Indirect Registers 0 0 00 eee eee 293 Register Map Organization of Communication Variables 00002 c eee 294 Data Formats ocu o0c cs eae eke eae d eek AeA wa ees hee Dea ed E E E i 295 Data TYPES carranna i wee heueice ots Mean neGied meena ag Eee ea ee nai 296 Identification Variables sssusa 0c tee 302 Statistics VanlableSws c2sescosbe cre es ob RsePaneda PRE de eRe ee eA eee RMR RE ee eR 303 Monitoring Variables 0 000 c cee eee 309 Configuration Variables 000 0 ccc tenet eee 315 Command Variables 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 3
246. ing thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting Pnom The underpower function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Parameter Settings The underpower function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Underpower Warning Threshold e Underpower Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Underpower Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Underpower Warning e Underpower Fault e 1 counting statistic e Underpower Faults Count Underpower warning and fault Vavg p lavg P Power Factor Vavg Average rms voltage lavg Average rms current P Power Ps1 Warning threshold Ps2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout Run state pm P lt Psi m 0 amp Underpower warning P lt Ps2 pT o p Underpower fault amp m Run state p AND The underpower function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60 s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments 20 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments 30
247. ins the following topics Topic Page Introduction 228 First Power up 230 Required and Optional Parameters 232 FLC Full Load Current Settings 233 Modbus Communication Checking 235 Verifying System Wiring 237 Verify Configuration 239 1639501EN 04 09 2014 227 Commissioning Introduction Introduction Commissioning must be performed after the physical installation of the LTM R controller LTM E expansion module and other hardware devices The commissioning process includes e initialization of the installed devices and e configuration of the LTM R controller parameters that are required for operation of the LTM R controller LTM E expansion module and other system hardware The person performing commissioning must be familiar with the system hardware and how it will be installed and used in the application Hardware devices can include motor voltage transformers external load current transformers ground current transformers communication network The product specifications for these devices provide the required parameter information You need to understand how the LTM R controller will be used to be able to configure the protection monitoring and control functions for the application For information about configuring control parameters see Motor Control Functions page 131 For information about configuring protection parameters see Motor Protection Functions page 59 I
248. interposing relay In this way rectified AC current flows in the control cable when the switch in the continuous part is closed AC RSB1 relay voltage 24 VAC 48 VAC 120 VAC 230 240 VAC Maximum distance for wires in parallel 3 000 m 3 000 m 3 000 m 3 000 m without metallic screening 10 000 ft 10 000 ft 10 000 ft 10 000 ft Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 3 000 m 3 000 m 3 000 m 3 000 m metallic screening 10 000 ft 10 000 ft 10 000 ft 10 000 ft 1639501EN 04 09 2014 209 Installation The following diagram shows an example when using AC interposing relays with a rectifier A1 A2 210 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Wiring Logic Outputs Overview The 4 logic outputs of the LTM R controller are relay outputs The relay outputs command the motor managed by the LTM R controller The 4 relay outputs on the LTM R controller are e 3 single pole single throw SPST NO relay outputs e 1 double pole single throw DPST NC NO relay output _ SS el Sisisisigt pseogsseses segs Test Reset VOVVOVYPGYG 13h 2a aN ISOOOVYOG Output Interposing Relays When an output commands a contactor an interposing relay may be required depending of the coil voltage and the power required by the contactor used The following diagrams illustrate system wiring without and with
249. io n 2 FLC 215 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 2 FLC 216 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 2 FLC 217 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 2 x 0 1 FLC min 218 Ulnt Full load current max n 2 x 0 1 A 219 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 2 220 Ulnt Frequency n 2 x 0 1 Hz 2 221 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 2 x 0 1 Q 222 225 Word 4 Date and time n 2 See DT_DateTime page 297 226 Ulnt Average voltage n 2 V 1 227 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 2 V 1 228 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 2 V 1 229 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 2 V 1 230 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 2 1 231 Ulnt Active power n 2 x 0 1 kW 1 232 Ulnt Power factor n 2 x 0 01 1 233 239 Not significant N 3 Fault Statistics The n 3 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 390 to 400 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 240 Ulnt Fault code n 3 241 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 3 FLC max 242 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 3 trip level 243 Ulnt Average current ratio n 3 FLC 244 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 3 FLC 245 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 3 FLC 246 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 3 FLC 247 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 3 x 0 1 FLC min 248 Ulnt Full load current max n 3 0 1 A 249 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 3 250 Ulnt Frequency n 3 x 0 1 Hz 2 251 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 3 x 0 1 Q 252 255 Word 4 Date and time n 3 See DT_DateTime page 297 256 Ulnt Average voltage n 3 V 1 257 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 3 V 1 258 Ulnt L1 L2
250. ions x x x Xx Wiring fault Voltage connections Configuration checksum Communication loss Time to trip xXx Xx XIX X X XxX Xx x x Xx X The function is available The function is not available 1639501EN 04 09 2014 19 Introduction Function LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E Fault and warning counters Protection fault counts Protection warning counts Diagnostic fault counts Motor control function counts Fault history X XxX XxX XxX Xx XxX XxX x x Xx Motor History Motor starts O1 starts O2 starts Operating time Motor starts per hour Motor last start current ratio Motor last start duration X XxX XxX x Xx xX XxX x x Xx System Operating Status Motor running Motor ready Motor starting Minimum wait time x X K X x Ki Xx Xx X The function is available The function is not available Protection Functions The following table lists the equipment required to support the protection functions of the motor management system Functions LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E Thermal overload Current phase imbalance Current phase loss Current phase reversal Long start Jam Undercurrent Overcurrent Ground current Motor temperature sensor Rapid cycle lockout
251. is manual is intended for e design engineers e system integrators e system operators e maintenance engineers This manual is valid for all LTM R Modbus controllers Some functions are available depending on the software version of the controller Related Documents Title of Documentation Reference Number TeSys T LTM Rees Instruction Sheet AAV7709901 TeSys T LTM Eee Instruction Sheet AAV7950501 TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User s Manual 1639581 TeSys T LTM CU Instruction Sheet AAV6665701 TeSys T DTM Online Help 1672614 XBT N User Manual 1681029 XBT N Instruction Sheet 1681014 Electrical Installation Guide Wiki version www electrical installation org Okken Solution Guide DESY014EN Blokset Solution Guide ESBED297701EN You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at www schneider electric com 1639501EN 04 09 2014 11 12 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Chapter 1 Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System Overview This chapter introduces the TeSys T motor management system and its companion devices What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System 14 System Selection Guide 19 Physical Description of the LTM R Modbus Controller 22 Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module 24
252. istic as described below Definite TCC The duration of the fault timeout remains a constant regardless of changes in the value of the measured quantity current as described in the following diagram A lt a gt lt a aa No operation Delayed operation Delay 62 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Inverse TCC The duration of the time delay varies inversely with the value of the measured quantity here thermal capacity As the measured quantity increases the potential for harm also increases thereby causing the duration of the time delay to decrease as described in the following diagram At No operation Delayed operation Hysteresis To improve stability motor protection functions apply a hysteresis value that is added to or subtracted from limit threshold settings before a fault or warning response is reset The hysteresis value is calculated as a percentage typically 5 of the limit threshold and is e subtracted from the threshold value for upper limit thresholds e added to the threshold value for lower limit thresholds The following diagram describes the logic result of measurement processing Inst when hysteresis is applied to an upper limit threshold A d Hysteresis percentage 1639501EN 04 09 2014 63 Motor Protection Functions Section 3 2 Thermal Motor Protection Functions Overview This section describes the thermal moto
253. ks all 3 motor phases for On Level current then checks the Motor Phases parameter setting The LTM R controller reports an error if it detects current in phase 2 if the LTM R controller is configured for single phase operation This function is enabled when the LTM R controller is configured for single phase operation It has no configurable parameters Motor Temperature Sensor Errors When the LTM R controller is configured for motor temperature sensor protection the LTM R controller provides short circuit and open circuit detection for the temperature sensing element The LTM R controller signals an error when calculated resistance at the T1 and T2 terminals e falls below the fixed short circuit detection threshold or e exceeds the fixed open circuit detection threshold The fault must be reset according to the configured Reset Mode manual automatic or remote Short circuit and open circuit detection thresholds have no fault time delay There are no warnings associated with the short circuit and the open circuit detection Short circuit and open circuit detection of the motor temperature sensing element is available for all operating states This protection is enabled when a temperature sensor is employed and configured and cannot be disabled The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Q Normal operating range 15 6500 W Accuracy at 15 Q 10 at
254. lace the LTM R controller Current Voltage phase reversal error Phase configuration error Check e L1 L2 and L3 wiring connection to be sure wires are not crossed e Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting ABC versus ACB After all checks are complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 Ifthe fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller PTC connection error Check for e short circuit or open circuit in the motor temp sensor wiring wrong type of motor temp sensing device improper configuration of parameters for selected device After all checks are complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Voltage phase loss error Check for improper wiring such as loose terminations blown fuse cut wire single phase motor configured for 3 phase operation failure to wire a single phase motor through both A and C load CT windows e failure of power source for example utility power failure After all checks are complete 1 Perform fault reset 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller 330 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Overview The following protective measures should be performed between major system checks to help maintain your system an
255. lation Example of Mounting in a Withdrawable Drawer of a Switchboard 3 A1 A2 LTM R controller power supply B1 B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs 186 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Mounting Overview This section describes how to mount the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module on a DIN rail a solid mounting plate or a pre slotted mounting plate known as a TE plate such as a Telequick plate It also describes the accessories needed for mounting as well as how to remove each component Reminder The LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module must be mounted side by side with the LTM E expansion module on the left side of the LTM R controller connected by the LTMCC004 connecting jumper see page 184 Mounting on DIN Rails You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a 35 mm 1 38 in DIN rail with a thickness of 1 35 mm 0 05 in and 0 75 mm 0 02 in When mounted the controller mounting feet may not extend beyond the controller dimensions see page 182 To mount the controller Step Action 1 On the back of the controller are two DIN rail clips Fit the top clip onto the DIN rail 2 Push the controller in toward the DIN rail until the bottom clip catches The controller clicks into place Removing from DIN Rails To remove the controller from the DIN ra
256. ld degree 0 200 C in 1 C increments 0 C Motor temperature sensor display C 0 eC degree CF F 1 Technical Characteristics The PT100 motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Hysteresis 5 of Warning threshold and Fault threshold Detection time 0 5 0 6 s Trip time accuracy 0 1 s Example The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PT100 fault with automatic reset and an active Run command fay A Run state Fault condition Run state resume i m t gt a fs N B B t Reset s2 Fault threshold 0s3 Fault re closing threshold 95 of fault threshold 76 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog Description The PTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog PTC thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a configurable warning threshold e amotor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds a separately set fault threshold The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance falls below 95 of the fault or warning threshold F
257. le Grounding of the Modbus T junction boxes 0 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R 120 Q SPOONnNOahWHND List of Modbus Accessories Designation Description Reference Number T junction boxes Box with 2 RJ45 female connector for VW3 A8 306 TF03 trunk cable and an integrated 0 3 m 1 ft cable with 1 RJ45 male connector for tap off Box with 2 RJ45 female connector for VW3 A8 306 TF10 trunk cable and an integrated 1 m 3 2 ft cable with 1 RJ45 male connector for tap off Line terminator for RJ45 connector R 120Q VW3 A8 306 R Line terminator for open style connector R 120 Q VW3 A8 306 DR 224 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation List of Modbus Cables Designation Length Reference Number Shielded cable for Modbus bus with 2 RJ45 0 3 m 1 ft VW3 A8 306 R03 connectors m 3 2 ft VW3 A8 306 R10 3 m 9 8 ft VW3 A8 306 R30 Shielded cable for Modbus bus with 1 RJ45 3 m 9 8 ft VW3 A8 306 D30 connectors and 1 stripped end Shielded cable for Modbus bus with 2 100 m 320 ft TSX CSA 100 stripped ends 200 m 640 ft TSX CSA 200 500 m 1600 ft TSX CSA 500 Belden cable 1639501EN 04 09 2014 225 Installation 226 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Chapter 6 Commissioning Overview This chapter provides an overview for commissioning the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module What Is in This Chapter This chapter conta
258. le the LTM R controller is in HMI control mode the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If HMI LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is not in HMI control mode and then the control mode is changed to HMI control the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If HMI controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to HMI control the LTM R exits from the fallback state If the control mode is changed to Terminal Strip or Network control the LTM R exits from the fallback state regardless of the state of HMI controller communications The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication loss Select one of these actions when configuring the LTM R controller HMI communication loss actions LTM R Controller Output Control Mode Available LTM R Controller Actions After HMI LTM R Controller Prior to Network Loss Network Loss Terminal Strip Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing e Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning HMI Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing e Activate a warning e Activate a fault e Activate a fault and warning Network Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor controller mode and on
259. lection Guide Overview This section describes the LTM R controller with and without the optional LTM E expansion module for metering and monitoring protection and control functions e Metering and Monitoring functions e measurement fault and warning counters system and device monitoring faults motor history e system operating status e Protection functions e thermal motor protection e current motor protection e voltage and power motor protection e Control functions e control channels local remote control source selection e operating modes e fault management Metering Functions The following table lists the equipment required to support the metering functions of the motor management system Function LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E Measurement Line currents Ground current Average current Current phase imbalance Thermal capacity level Motor temperature sensor x X K X X XxX Frequency Line to line voltage Line voltage imbalance Average voltage Power factor Active power Reactive power Active power consumption Reactive power consumption X K X X X XIXI X X X Xx Xx x x x System and Device Monitoring Faults Controller internal faults Controller internal temperature Control command error diagnostic Wiring fault Temperature sensor connections Wiring fault Current connect
260. less of the state of PLC controller communications The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller can take during a communication loss that the user can select when configuring the LTM R controller Network communication loss actions LTM R Controller Output Control Mode Available LTM R Actions After PLC LTM R Controller Network Loss Prior to Network Loss Terminal Strip Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing e Activate a warning e Activate a fault e Activate a fault and warning HMI Fault and Warning control possibilities e Signal nothing e Activate a warning e Activate a fault e Activate a fault and warning Network Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen 334 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Maintenance HMI Communication Loss The LTM R controller monitors the communication with any approved HMI device Using a fixed network idle time timeout the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss In the event of a communication loss the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions These depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the communication loss If HMI controller communication is lost whi
261. llowing plug in terminals and pin assignments Terminal block Pin Description Voltage inputs LV1 Phase 1 input voltage LV2 Phase 2 input voltage LV3 Phase 3 input voltage Logic inputs and common terminals 1 7 Logic input 7 C7 Common for 1 7 1 8 Logic input 1 8 c8 Common for 1 8 1 9 Logic input 1 9 c9 Common for 1 9 1 10 Logic input 1 10 C10 Common for 1 10 Terminal Wiring Characteristics Both the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module terminals have the same characteristics Terminals have an insulation rating of 320 VAC The table below describes the characteristics of cables that may be used to wire the terminals Cable Type No of Conductors Conductor Section mm AWG Flexible stranded cable Single conductor 0 2 2 5 24 14 2 conductors 0 2 1 5 24 16 Solid cable Single conductor 0 2 2 5 24 14 2 conductors 0 2 1 0 24 18 Flexible stranded cable with insulated cable ends Single conductor 0 25 2 5 24 14 2 conductors 0 5 1 5 20 16 Flexible stranded cable with non insulated cable ends Single conductor 0 25 2 5 24 14 2 conductors 0 2 1 0 24 18 The table below describes the characteristics of the terminals Pitch 5 08 mm 0 2 in Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 Nem 5 Ib in Flat screwdriver 3mm 0 10 in 1639501EN 04 09 2014 195 Installation Wiring Current Transformers CT
262. lt Enable Under Over PowFact UNDER POW FACTOR Fault Under Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Under Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Under Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Under Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Under Power Factor Warning Threshold OVER POW FACTOR Fault Over Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Over Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Over Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Over Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Over Power Factor Warning Threshold 274 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Load Shed Diagnostic Rapid Cycle Lockouts Communication Ports Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following load shed diagnostic rapid cycle lockout and communication ports settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Load Shed Fault Load Shedding Fault Level Voltage Dip Threshold Fault Time Load Shedding Timeout RestartLvl Voltage Dip Restart Threshold RestartTime Voltage Dip Restart Timeout Diagnostic DIAG FAULT Fault Diagnostic Fault Enable Warn Diagnostic Warning Enable WIRING CT REVERSAL Fault Wiring fault enable Rapid Cycle Lockout Time Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout Comm Ports Net Port Network Port Endian Setting HMI Port HMI Port Endian Setting NET PORT COMM LOSS Fault Network Port Fault Enable F
263. m to local and national safety regulations and codes Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Operation The thermal overload inverse thermal protection function is based on a thermal model of the motor that combines 2 thermal images e acopper based image representing the thermal state of the stator and rotor windings and e an iron based image representing the thermal state of the motor frame Using measured current and the input motor trip class setting the LTM R controller considers only the highest thermal state iron or copper when calculating thermal capacity utilized by the motor as described below A Heating Cooling 8cu Copper Ofe Thermal value fe Iron tripping threshold cu Copper tripping threshold t Time When inverse thermal fault mode is selected the Thermal Capacity Level parameter indicating utilized thermal capacity due to load current is incremented during both start and run states When the LTM R controller detects that the thermal capacity level 6 exceeds the fault threshold 6 s it triggers a thermal overload fault as described below 8 A Starting Running Fault state cooling Starting Running Fault state cooling 1639501EN 04 09 2014 67 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Th
264. max 2A DC 13 rating 30 W 500 000 operations le max 1 25A Associated fuse protection gGat4A Maximum operating rate 1 800 cycles h Maximum frequency 2 Hz 2 cycles s Response time closing lt 10 ms Response time opening lt 10 ms Contact rating B300 1639501EN 04 09 2014 341 Technical Data Altitude Derating The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating temperature according to altitude Corrective factors for altitude 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 6 561 68 ft 9 842 52 ft 11 482 94 ft 13 123 36 ft 14 763 78 ft Dielectric Strength Ui 1 0 93 0 87 0 8 0 7 Max Operating Temperature 1 0 93 0 92 0 9 0 88 342 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Technical Data Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module Technical Specifications The LTM E expansion module meets the following specifications Certifications UL CSA CE CTIC K CCC NOM GOST IACS E10 BV LROS DNV GL RINA ABS RMRos ATEX Conformity to Standards IEC EN 60947 4 1 UL 508 CSA C22 2 IACSE10 European Community directives CE marking Satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage LV machinery and electromagnetic compatibility EMC directives Rated insulation voltage Ui According to IEC EN 60947 1 Overvoltage category III degree
265. mmissioning First Power up in SoMove with theTeSys T DTM Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to set all parameters at the first power up of the LTM R controller the Controller System Config Required parameter can be cleared by 2 ways e In disconnected mode by clicking Communication Store to Device to download the configuration files e In connected mode by clicking Device command exit configuration after setting all parameters Both commands bring the LTM R controller out of initialization 1639501EN 04 09 2014 231 Commissioning Required and Optional Parameters Introduction In addition to the required parameters configure optional parameters if required at first power up or later In the LTM CU HMI In the LTM CU HMI required and optional parameters are located in the 5 sub menus in the Menu In SoMove with the TeSys T DTM In SoMove with the TeSys T DTM required and optional parameters are located in tree view items in the parameter list tab 232 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Commissioning FLC Full Load Current Settings FLC Definition Other Definitions The Full Load Current FLC represents the actual full load current of the motor being protected by the LTM R controller The FLC is a motor characteristic and can be found on the motor plate Many protection parameters are set as a multiple of FLC The FLC can be set from FLCmin to FLCmax Examples of FLC settings are detailed below Load CT ratio
266. monitoring information is accessible with one single read request through register addresses 900 to 906 Configuration and command can be written with one single write using registers 950 to 952 1639501EN 04 09 2014 293 Use Register Map Organization of Communication Variables Introduction Communication variables are listed in tables according to the group such as identification statistics or monitoring to which they belong They are associated with an LTM R controller which may or may not have an LTM E Expansion Module attached Communication Variable Groups Table Structure Note Unused Addresses Communication variables are grouped according to the following criteria Variable groups Registers Identification variables 00 to 99 Statistics variables 100 to 449 Monitoring variables 450 to 539 Configuration variables 540 to 699 Command variables 700 to 799 User Map variables 800 to 999 Custom Logic variables 1200 to 1399 Communication variables are listed in 4 column tables Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Register in decimal Variable type see Data Variable name and access Note code for additional format Types page 296 via Read only or Read Write information Modbus requests The Note column gives a code for additional information Variables without a code are available for all hardware configurations and without functional restriction
267. monitors voltage and power parameters The LTM R controller uses these parameters in protection functions to detect fault and warning conditions The LTM R controller s response to fault and warning conditions is fixed for the predefined operating modes Logic output O 4 activates on a fault and logic output O 3 activates on a warning For more information about predefined operating modes see Operating Modes page 142 You can configure these motor protection functions to detect the existence of undesirable operating conditions that if not resolved can cause motor and equipment damage All motor protection functions include fault detection and most protection functions also include warning detection Customized Functions and Data Faults Warnings In addition to using the protection functions and parameters included in a predefined operating mode you can use the Custom Logic Editor in the TeSys T DTM to create a new customized operating mode To create a custom operating mode select any predefined operating mode then edit its code to meet the needs of your application Using the Custom Logic Editor you can create a customized operating mode by e modifying the LTM R controller s responses to protection faults or warnings e adding new functions based on either predefined or newly created parameters A fault is a serious undesirable operating condition Fault related parameters can be configured for most protection functions Th
268. mware revision e X major revision e Y minor revision Example Address 76 Ulnt Controller firmware version DT_Language5 DT_Language5 format is an enumeration used for language display Language code Description 1 English factory setting 2 Fran ais 4 Espa ol 8 Deutsch 16 Italiano Example Address 650 Word HMI language DT_OutputFallbackStrategy DT_OutputFallbackStrategy format is an enumeration of motor output states when loosing communication Value Description Motor modes 0 Hold LO1 LO2 For all modes 1 Run For 2 step mode only 2 LO1 LO2 Off For all modes 3 LO1 LO2 On Only for overload independent and custom operating modes 4 LO1 On For all modes except 2 step 5 LO2 On For all modes except 2 step DT_PhaseNumber DT_PhaseNumber format is an enumeration with only 1 bit activated Value Description 1 1 phase 2 3 phases DT_ResetMode DT_ResetMode format is an enumeration of possible modes for thermal fault reset Value Description 1 Manual or HMI 2 Remote by network 4 Automatic 300 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use DT_WarningCode DT_WarningCode format is an enumeration of warning codes Warning code Description 0 No warning 3 Ground current 4 Thermal overload 5
269. n 0 01 A increments 1 A Technical Characteristics The external ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an external ground current fault occurring during run state lgr Start state Run state Fault condition A lt gt Igrs2 Igr s2 External ground current fault threshold 102 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Section 3 4 Voltage Motor Protection Functions Overview This section describes the voltage motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Voltage Phase Imbalance 104 Voltage Phase Loss 107 Voltage Phase Reversal 109 Undervoltage 110 Overvoltage 112 Voltage Dip Management 114 Load Shedding 115 Automatic Restart 117 1639501EN 04 09 2014 103 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Phase Imbalance Description The voltage phase imbalance function signals e a warning when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average voltage in all 3 phases e a fault when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the averag
270. n 3 control channels Terminal Strip HMI and Network Two Step operation settings include e A Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout that starts when current reaches 10 of FLC min e A Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold setting e A Motor Transition Timeout setting that starts upon the earlier of the following events expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout or current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O 1 step 1 and O 2 step 2 logic outputs In terminal strip control channel logic input 1 controls logic outputs O 1 and O 2 In Network or HMI control channels the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic outputs 0 1 and O 2 The Motor Run Reverse Command parameter is ignored Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low Logic outputs O 1 O 2 and O 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error NOTE See Control Wiring and Fault Management page 146 for information about the interaction between the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagrams 154 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Two Step Wye Delta Application Diagram The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two step 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wye delta application alt KM1
271. n Location screen either accept proposed path or use the Browse button to navigate to a new one then click Next In the Start Copying Files screen review your selections then click e Back to return to earlier screens and make changes e Next to proceed to the final screen 11 In the Finish screen click Finish The Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is installed 250 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Download 1 to many Software Application Files Overview You must download the software application file required by your installation of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI from the www schneider electric com website From the schneider electric website you can freely obtain the software application file LTM_1T8_ language _ version dop For instructions on installing the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software see Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software page 250 For instructions on transferring application files from the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI see Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI page 252 1639501EN 04 09 2014 251 Use Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI Overview After you have installed the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC and downloaded the required 1 to many application software file you are ready to transfer the application software file to the Ma
272. n errors PTC connection RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC I 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC I 5 NC Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Motor temp sensor PTC Binary RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC PT100 RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC PTC Analog RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC NTC Analog RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Thermal overload Definite RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Inverse Thermal RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Long Start RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Jam RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Phase Loss RB I 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Undercurrent RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overcurrent RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC External Ground Current RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Internal Ground Current RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overvoltage RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Voltage Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Power Unde
273. n increments of 1 s 10s 1639501EN 04 09 2014 355 Configurable Parameters Jam Parameters Setting range Factory setting Jam fault enable e Disable Enable e Enable Jam fault threshold 100 800 FLC in increments of 1 200 FLC Jam fault timeout 1 30 s in increments of 1 s 5s Jam warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Jam warning threshold 100 800 FLC in increments of 1 200 FLC Undercurrent Parameters Setting range Factory setting Undercurrent Fault Enable e Disable Disable e Enable Undercurrent Fault Threshold 30 100 FLC in increments of 1 50 FLC Undercurrent Fault Timeout 1 200 s in increments of 1 s 10s Undercurrent Warning Enable e Disable Disable e Enable Undercurrent Warning Threshold 30 100 FLC in increments of 1 50 FLC Overcurrent Parameters Setting range Factory setting Overcurrent fault enable e Disable Disable e Enable Overcurrent Fault Threshold 20 800 FLC in increments of 1 200 FLC Overcurrent fault timeout 1 250 s in increments of 1 s 10s Overcurrent warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Overcurrent warning threshold 20 800 FLC in increments of 1 200 FLC 356 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Configurable Parameters Voltage Phases Undervoltage Overvoltage Parameters Setting range Factory setting Voltage phase imbalance
274. n the LTM R controller settings are initially configured and e any time that one or more of its settings are subsequently re configured Because setting values may not be accessible when the LTM R controller is replaced for example in case of device failure you should create a record of setting values whenever they are made Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM all of the LTM R controller s configured settings except for date and time can be saved to a file Once saved you can use SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to transfer these settings either to the original LTM R controller or to its replacement NOTE Only configured settings are saved Historical statistical data is not saved and therefore cannot be applied to a replacement LTM R controller For information on how to use SoMove software to create save and transfer configuration setting files refer to the SoMove Lite Online Help Replacing the Expansion Module Retiring Devices The primary consideration in replacing an LTM E expansion module is to replace it with the same model 24 VDC or 110 240 VAC as the original Both the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module contain electronic boards that require particular treatment at the end of their useful life When retiring a device be sure to observe all applicable laws regulations and practices 1639501EN 04 09 2014 333 Maintenance Communication Warnings and Faults Introduction Communication warnings a
275. nal Temperature 0 0 0 teens Control Command Error Diagnostic 0 0 cee Wiring Faults Configuration Checksum Communication Loss Time to Trip LIM R Configuration Fault ssas prent tae kd iad aigan eden o hee O LTM E Configuration Fau External Fault tand WaMmMinGiec concn restaur htorved ae a eee eee Fault and Warning Counters 0 0 0 cette eee Introducing Fault and Wa All Faults Counter All Warnings Counter Auto Reset Counter Ming COUNTEMS osc hee e ads bee hese bee hee ee eed Protection Faults and Warnings Counters 2 0 ccc tees Control Command Errors Wiring Faults Counter COUNTE ease bok ices aoe ded wae act hedge aS eae Ee a E do Rae eee Communication Loss Counters 0 0 00 cc cece eee eee eens Internal Fault Counters Fault History Motor History Motor Starts Counters Motor Starts Per Hour Counter 0 0 0 0 ccc teen nee Load Sheddings Counter 11 13 14 19 22 24 27 28 29 30 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 37 38 38 39 40 41 42 44 46 46 48 48 48 49 50 51 51 51 51 52 52 52 53 53 53 54 55 55 55 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Auto Restart Counters 0 0 een e eee e eee eens 55 Motor Last Start Current Ratio 0 0 0 cc tte 56 Motor Last Start Duration 0 0 0 0 000 ccs 56 Operating TIM erci oeade Sede ed pee e eee ag peered
276. nce Fault Timeout Running Warn Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold VOLT PH LOSS Fault Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout Warn Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable VOLT PH REV Fault Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable Under Over Voltage UNDER VOLT Fault Undervoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Undervoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Undervoltage Fault Timeout Warn Undervoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Undervoltage Warning Threshold OVER VOLT Fault Overvoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Overvoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Overvoltage Fault Timeout Warn Overvoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Overvoltage Warning Threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 273 Use Power Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following power settings Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 2 Power Under Over Power UNDER POWER Fault Underpower Fault Enable Fault Level Underpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Underpower Fault Timeout Starting Warn Underpower Warning Enable Warn Level Underpower Warning Threshold OVER POWER Fault Overpower Fault Enable Fault Level Overpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Overpower Fault Timeout Warn Overpower Warning Enable Warn Level Overpower Fau
277. nd common akon NOTE Logic inputs are externally powered according to input voltage ratings 24 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Introduction Status indicating LEDs LED name Description Appearance Status Power Power Fault status Green Power on no faults Red Power on faults Off Not powered 1 7 Logic Input I 7 status Yellow Activated Off Not activated 1 8 Logic Input 1 8 status Yellow Activated Off Not activated 1 9 Logic Input 1 9 status Yellow Activated Off Not activated 1 10 Logic Input 1 10 status Yellow Activated Off Not activated 1639501EN 04 09 2014 25 Introduction 26 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Chapter 2 Metering and Monitoring Functions Overview The LTM R controller provides measurement metering and monitoring in support of the current temperature and ground fault protection functions When connected to an LTM E expansion module the LTM R controller also provides voltage and power measurement functions What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 2 1 Measurement 28 2 2 System and Device Monitoring Faults 39 2 3 Fault and Warning Counters 50 2 4 Motor History 54 2 5 System Operating Status 57 1639501EN 04 09 2014 27 Metering and Monitoring Functions Section 2 1 Measurement Overview The LTM R controller uses these measurements to perf
278. nd faults are managed in a standard way like any other types of warnings and faults The presence of a fault is signaled by various indicators e State of the LEDs 1 LED is dedicated to communication PLC Comm see Modbus Communication Checking page 235 State of the output relays Warning Message s displayed on HMI screen Presence of an exception code such as a report from the PLC PLC Communication Loss A communication loss is managed like any other fault The LTM R controller monitors the communication with the PLC Using an adjustable network idle time timeout the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss firmware watchdog In the event of a network loss the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions These depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the network loss If PLC LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in network control mode the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If PLC LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in local control mode and then the control mode is changed to network control the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If PLC LTM R controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to network control the LTM R controller exits the fallback state If the control mode is changed to local control the LTM R exits from the fallback state regard
279. netic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures Logic Inputs Characteristics Altitude Derating Control voltage 24 VDC 115 230 VAC Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC 100 240 VAC Current 7 mA e 3 1 mA at 100 VAC e 7 5 mA at 240 VAC Input limit values At state 1 Voltage 15 V maximum 79 V lt V lt 264 V Current 2 mA min to 15 mA max 2 mA min at 110 VAC to 3 mA min at 220 VAC At state 0 Voltage 5 V maximum OV lt V lt 40V Current 15 mA maximum 15 mA maximum Response time Change to state 1 15 ms input only 25 ms input only Change to state 0 5 ms input only 25 ms input only IEC61131 1 conformity Type 1 Type 1 Type of input Resistive Capacitive The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating temperature according to altitude Corrective factors for altitude 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 6 561 68 ft 9 842 52 ft 11 482 94 ft 13 123 36 ft 14 763 78 ft Dielectric Strength Ui 1 0 93 0 87 0 8 0 7 Max Operating Temperature 1 0 93 0 92 0 9 0 88 344 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Technical Data Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions Measurement Motor History Parameter Accuracy Value saved on power loss
280. ng pw Undercurrent fault Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 1s Fault threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 increments 50 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 increments 50 of FLC 94 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Technical Characteristics The undercurrent function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an undercurrent fault l Start state Run state g Fault condition A a b gt lt a gt lt a Undercurrent fault f timeout Is2 f 2 5 ee ee ee ee ete ee ee ee eee ee ee he eee ee ee ee Is2 Undercurrent fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 95 Motor Protection Functions Overcurrent Description The overcurrent function signals e a warning when current in a phase exceeds a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when current in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time after the motor has reached run state The overcurrent function can be triggered when the equipment is overloaded or a process condition is detected c
281. ng 310 motor control functions 131 motor full load current max n 0 277 n 1 277 motor full load current ratio n 0 277 n 1 277 motor full load current ratio n 0 304 n 1 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 motor history 54 last start max current 56 last start time 56 motor operating time 56 motor starts 55 motor starts per hour 55 motor operating mode independent 144 overload 144 reverser 144 two speed 144 two step 144 motor phases sequence 89 motor predefined operating mode independent 149 overload 147 reverser 151 two speed 159 two step 154 motor protection functions 62 current phase imbalance 84 current phase loss 87 current phase reversal 89 external ground current 107 ground current 98 internal ground current 99 jam 92 long start 90 motor temperature sensor 72 motor temperature sensor NTC analog 79 motor temperature sensor PT100 75 motor temperature sensor PTC analog 77 motor temperature sensor PTC binary 73 operation 62 over power factor 128 overcurrent 96 overpower 124 overvoltage 112 thermal overload 65 thermal overload definite time 70 thermal overload inverse thermal 66 under power factor 126 undercurrent 94 underpower 122 undervoltage 110 voltage phase imbalance 104 voltage phase loss 107 voltage phase reversal 109 motor running 58 motor starting 58 motor starts count 276 303 motor step 1 to 2 threshold 319 timeout 319 motor temperatu
282. ng application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control 378 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following alte diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram A1 A2 LS HS Stop E E E ak se eee era meri ee lina D U i B1 S ap LS Low speed HS High speed 1 ADahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram L
283. ng modes Operating Mode Type Best used for Overload see page 147 All motor starter applications in which the user defines assignment of logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 Aux1 Aux2 and Stop commands from the HMI keypad The I O can be defined using a control program managed by the master network controller in remote control by an HMI tool or by using custom logic Independent Direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications see page 149 Reverser see page 151 Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Two Step see page 154 Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed see page 159 Two speed motor applications for motor types including e Dahlander consequent pole Pole Changer Logic Input Behavior When you select an operating mode you also specify that logic inputs are wired for either 2 wire maintained or 3 wire impulse control Your selection determines the valid start and stop commands from the various control sources and sets the behavior of the input command following the return of power after an outage Control Circuit Type Behavior of Logic Inputs I 1 and 1 2 2 wire maintained The LTM R controller after detecting the rising edge on the inpu
284. ng table shows the maximum wire lengths for temperature sensor elements mm AWG 0 5 20 0 75 18 1 5 16 2 5 14 m ft 220 656 300 985 400 1312 600 1970 Use unshielded twisted pair cable to connect the controller to the temperature sensor For the controller to accurately measure the resistance of the temperature sensing element you must measure the resistance of the twisted pair and add it to the desired resistance for protection This compensates for the lead resistance The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and the temperature sensor of a single phase motor For more information about wiring see Wiring Generalities page 192 1639501EN 04 09 2014 203 Installation Wiring Power Supply Overview The LTM R controller supply voltage can be e 24 VDC or e 100 240 VAC The following table presents LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module association rules LTMR BD VDC LTMRe FM VAC LTME BD VDC x x LTME FM VAC 2 x X Association allowed Association not allowed DC Power Supply A dedicated 24 VDC power supply is necessary to supply e one or several LTM R controllers including the logic inputs of the LTM R controller s e the logic inputs of the LTM E expansion module s An additional specific 24 VDC power supply is necessary to supply e the LTM R controller logic outputs e other devices The
285. ng tool This document describes only its utility in opening and transferring pre programmed software applications to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI For more information about the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software consult its help file and printed documentation For instructions on how to download 1 to many software applications see Download 1 to many Software Application Files page 251 For instructions on how to transfer 1 to many software applications from your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HM see Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI page 252 To install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC Step Action 1 Place the installation disk into your PC s disk drive The installation program should begin 2 If the installation program does not begin use Microsoft Windows Explorer to navigate to and click on the file Setup exe If any screens appear that do not require action click Next In the language screen select a language and click OK oa In the name and company screen type in your name and your company name or accept the factory settings and click Next If a screen appears warning you that protocols will be uninstalled click Yes to continue In the Protocols Choices screen be sure that Modbus is selected then click Next In the Select Components screen make no selections then click Next oO Oo N O In the Choose Destinatio
286. ning protections provided by the LTM R controller while the motor is in each operating state denoted with an X are described below It can transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state Protection Category Monitored Fault Warning Operating States Sys Config Ready NotReady Start Run Diagnostic Run Command Check x Stop Command Check X X X Run Check Back x x Stop Check Back X X Wiring configuration errors PTC connection X X X X CT Reversal X Voltage Phase Loss x X Phase Configuration X Internal faults Minor X X X X X Major x X X X X X Monitored Not monitored 1639501EN 04 09 2014 137 Motor Control Functions Protection Category Monitored Fault Warning Operating States Sys Config Ready Not Ready Start Run Motor temp sensor PTC Binary X X X PT100 x x Xx X X PTC Analog X X NTC Analog X X Thermal overload Definite xXx XxX Xx x Xx Inverse Thermal X X x Xx Current Long Start Jam Current Phase Imbalance x Xx Current Phase Loss Overcurrent Undercurrent Ground Fault Internal x x lt Ground Fault External Voltage Overvoltage Level x Xx x Xx Undervoltage Level l l x lt Voltage
287. nitialization The LTM R controller is ready to be initialized after the hardware installation is complete To initialize the LTM R controller e be sure the command to control the motor is off then e turn on the LTM R controller CAUTION IMPROPER INITIALIZATION Disconnect power to the motor before initializing the LTM R controller Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage Neither the LTM R controller nor the LTM E expansion module require additional hardware configuration for example turning dials or setting dip switches to be initialized When powered up for the first time the LTM R controller enters an initial state and is ready for commissioning Configuration Tools Identify the configuration control source and the configuration tool before configuring parameters The LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module can be configured locally using an HMI device or remotely via the network connection The LTM R controller can be commissioned using e anLTM CU control operator unit e aPC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e aPLC connected to the LTM R controller s network port 228 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Commissioning The following parameters ide ntify the configuration control source Parameter Enables Use of This Tool Factory Setting Config Via HMI Keypad Enable TeSys T LTM CU control operator unit Enabled Config Via HMI Engineering Tool
288. nment Aux 1 Forward run Start motor forward Aux 2 Reverse run Start motor reverse Stop Stop while pressed Stop Timing Sequence The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Reverser operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration when the control direct transition bit is On 1 1 Start forward 1 2 Start reverse 7 H L4 Stop Loo wi y i S 0 1 KM1 forward L y Yyy y O 2 KM2 reverse a Y y Motor On bit i Transition timer Y otoo Normal operation with stop command Normal operation without stop command Forward run command ignored transition timer active Forward run command ignored stop command active AOUONa Parameters Reverser operating mode has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Motor transition timeout 0 999 9 s 0 1s Control direct transition On Off Off 1639501EN 04 09 2014 153 Motor Control Functions Two Step Operating Mode Description Use Two Step operating mode in reduced voltage starting motor applications such as Wye Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Functional Characteristics This function includes the following features Accessible i
289. nstructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Fault Specific Reset Behaviors The LTM R controller s response to faults depends on the nature of the fault that has occurred and how the related protection function is configured For example e Thermal faults can be reset after the Fault Reset Timeout counts down and the utilized thermal capacity falls below the Fault Reset Threshold level e Ifthe fault includes a reset timeout setting the timeout must fully count down before a reset command executes e Internal device faults can be reset only by cycling power LTM R controller memory does not retain diagnostic and wiring faults after a power loss but does retain all other faults after a power loss Internal diagnostic and wiring faults cannot be automatically reset All wiring and diagnostic faults can be manually reset by local reset methods For diagnostic faults network reset commands are valid only in remote network control channel For wiring faults network reset commands are not valid in any control channel Fault Characteristics The LTM R controller fault monitoring functions save the status of communications monitoring and motor protection faults on a power loss so that these faults must be acknowledged and reset as part of an overall motor maintenance strategy Protection Category Monitored Fault LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E Saved On Power Loss Diagnostic Run Command Check
290. ntactor rating 0 1 A 628 Ulnt Load CT primary 629 Ulnt Load CT secondary 630 Ulnt Load CT multiple passes passes 631 Word Fault enable register 1 bits 0 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current fault enable bit 3 Thermal overload fault enable bit 4 Long start fault enable bit 5 Jam fault enable bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault enable bit 7 Undercurrent fault enable bit 8 Reserved bit 9 Self test enable 0 disable 1 enable factory setting bit 10 HMI port fault enable bits 11 14 Reserved bit 15 Network port fault enable 632 Word Warning enable register 1 bit O Not significant bit 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current warning enable bit 3 Thermal overload warning enable bit 4 Reserved bit 5 Jam warning enable bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning enable bit 7 Undercurrent warning enable bits 8 9 Reserved bit 10 HMI port warning enable bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning enable bits 12 14 Reserved bit 15 Network port warning enable 318 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 633 Word Fault enable register 2 bit O Reserved bit 1 Diagnostic fault enable bit 2 Wiring fault enable bit 3 Overcurrent fault enable bit
291. nvironment 337 statistics 331 412 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Index protection functions 67 communication 166 configuration 137 166 current 83 138 166 customized 67 diagnostic 137 165 faults 67 internal 137 166 motor temperature sensor 138 166 operating states 137 power 127 138 166 thermal 64 thermal overload 138 166 voltage 103 138 166 warnings 67 wiring 137 166 PT100 75 PTC analog 77 PTC binary 73 R rapid cycle lockout 87 310 lockout timeout 87 275 315 reactive power 38 268 313 consumption 38 remote control channel setting 357 replacement expansion module 333 LTM R controller 333 S self test 331 332 enable 331 start cycle 139 starts count motor LO1 304 motor LO2 304 stop key disable 360 stop HMI disable 321 stop terminal strip disable 321 system fault 265 310 on 265 310 ready 310 tripped 310 warning 310 system and device monitoring faults 39 system and device monitoring faults control command diagnostic errors 42 system operating status 57 minimum wait time 58 motor state 58 system ready 58 system selection guide 19 system status logic inputs 311 logic outputs 311 register 1 310 register 2 310 7 technical specifications LTM E expansion module 343 LTM R controller 340 terminal strip terminal strip for stop disable 351 TeSys T motor management system 14 thermal capacity level 33 53 66 68 268 313 n
292. o Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed Two speed motor applications for motor types including e Dahlander consequent pole e Pole Changer Each application is described individually with 1 complete application diagram including power and control 3 wire impulse terminal strip control 3 partial diagrams control logic input wiring variants 2 wire maintained terminal strip control 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 384 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 388 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 390 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 392 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 394 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 396 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding Consequent Pole 398 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding 400 1639501EN 04 09 2014 383 Wiring Diagrams Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a L1 L2 L3
293. of pollution 3 690 V UI on voltage inputs According to UL508 CSA C22 2 no 14 690 V UI on voltage inputs Rated impulse withstand voltage According to IEC60947 1 8 3 3 4 1 Paragraph 2 220 V inputs circuits 4 8 kV spacing imp 24 V inputs circuits 0 91 kV Communication circuits 0 91 kV voltage input circuits 7 3 kV Degree of protection According to 60947 1 protection against direct contact IP20 Protective treatment IEC EN 60068 TH IEC EN 60068 2 30 Cycle humidity 12 cycles IEC EN 60068 2 11 Salt spray 48h Ambient air Storage 40 80 C 40 176 F ea around Speration gt 40 mm 1 57 inches 20 60 C 4 140 F lt 40 mm 1 57 inches but gt 9 mm 0 35 inches spacing 55 C 4 131 F lt 9 mm 0 35 inches spacing 20 45 C 4 113 F Maximum operating altitude Derating accepted 4500 m 14 763 ft Without derating 2000 m 6 561 ft Fire resistance According to UL 94 V2 According to IEC60695 2 1 Parts supporting live components 960 C 1 760 F Other components 650 C 1 202 F Half sine mechanical shock pulse 11 ms According to IEC60068 2 27 30 g 3 axis and 6 directions Resistance to According to IEC60068 2 6 5 gn vibration Immunity to According to EN61000 4 2 Through air 8 kV Level 3 electrostatic discharge Over surface 6 KV
294. off Network port fault enable Disable Enable Disable Network port warning enable Disable Enable Disable Config via network port enable Forbidden Allowed Allowed Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting HMI port address setting 1 247 1 HMI port baud rate setting 4800 9600 19 200 Self detection 19 200 bits s HMI port parity setting None Even Even HMI port endian setting LSW first little endian MSW first big endian MSW first big endian HMI port fallback setting Hold LO1 LO2 Run 2 step or off LO1 LO2 off LO1 LO2 on ovl ind cust or off LO1 on or off 2 step LO2 on or off 2 step LO1 LO2 off HMI port fault enable Disable Enable Disable HMI port warning enable Disable Enable Disable Config via HMI engineering tool enable Forbidden Allowed Allowed Config via HMI keypad enable Forbidden Allowed Allowed 1639501EN 04 09 2014 353 Configurable Parameters Thermal Thermal Overload Motor Temperature Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Thermal overload mode e Definite Inverse thermal Inverse thermal Motor trip class e Motor class 5 Motor class 5 e Motor class 10 e Motor class 15 e Motor class 20 e Motor class 25 e Motor class 30 Thermal overload
295. ollowing application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control 1639501EN 04 09 2014 395 Wiring Diagrams Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram 3a L1 L2 L3 2S 2S 2S Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram 396 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control 1639501E
296. ommands that reset to factory settings each LTM R controller s statistics or settings XBTN Reference yvi vyv vv vyv y Links to a page that describes communication speed and parity programming software and LTM R controller firmware 264 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many Overview Pages located in level 2 of the menu structure contain e information and commands for up to 8 connected LTM R controllers or e fault information for all LTM R controller or e information about the Magelis XBTN410 HMI All level 2 menu structure pages are accessible from the Home page Controller Currents Page Use the Controller Currents page to monitor the Average Current Ratio for all connected LTM R controllers and to navigate to other pages as described below Level 2 Description Controller Currents xxxx I5 XXXX Opens the Controller page for the selected LTM R controller 1 8 2 xxxx I6 XXXX 13 xxxx I7 XXXX 14 xxxx I8 XXXX Controller status Opens the Controller Status page Remote reset Opens the Remote Reset page Home viv v vvv v Returns to the Home page Controller Status Page Use the Controller Status page to monitor the System On and System Fault status of all connected LTM R controllers and to navigate to other pages as described below Level 2 Description Controlle
297. on module face To replace the standard strips with alternative strips Step Action 1 Remove the 6 standard terminal strips using the connector extraction tool LTM9TCT to leverage the strips away from the unit NOTE There are two 4 pin terminal strips These strips are not interchangeable It is important therefore that you read the markings on the terminal strips and follow the diagram below when positioning them 190 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation 191 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Wiring Generalities Overview Wiring Rules The wiring of each part of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module is detailed further with its specificities Wiring the current transformers see page 196 Wiring the ground fault current transformers see page 201 Wiring the temperature sensors see page 203 Wiring the power supply see page 204 Wiring the logic inputs see page 207 Wiring the logic outputs see page 211 Wiring the voltage transformers on the LTM E expansion module The wiring of the communication port depends on the communication protocol and is described separately see page 217 The following wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance due to EMC on the behavior of the LTM R controller Keep a distance as large as possible between the communication cable and the power and or control cables minimum 30 cm or 11 8 in Cross
298. onnector This section describes 3 typical cases of connection of LTM R controllers to the bus via its RJ45 connector e connection of LTM R controllers installed in an enclosure via T junction boxes e connection of LTM R controllers installed in withdrawable drawers via T junction boxes e connection of LTM R controllers installed in withdrawable drawers via hardwired cables Modbus Wiring Rules The following wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance due to EMC on the behavior of the LTM R controller e Keep adistance as large as possible between the communication cable and the power or control cables minimum 30 cm or 11 8 in Cross over the Modbus cables and the power cables at right angles if necessary Install the communication cables as close as possible to the grounded plate Do not bend or damage the cables The minimum bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter Avoid sharp angles of paths or passage of the cable Use the recommended cables only All RJ45 connectors must be metallic A Modbus cable must be shielded e The cable shield must be connected to a protective ground e The connection of the cable shield to the protective ground must be as short as possible e Connect together all the shields if necessary e Perform the grounding of the shield with a collar e When the LTM R controller is installed in a withdrawable drawer e Connect together all the shield contacts of the withdrawable draw
299. ontrollers 1 to many physical configuration The 1 to many physical configuration presents a unique e user interface LCD display and keypad e menu structure NOTE The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers that have previously been commissioned To commission an individual LTM R controller use either e an LTM CU control operator unit or e SoMove with the TeSys T DTM What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Physical Description 1 to many 254 Command Lines 1 to many 257 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many 258 Editing Values 1 to many 259 Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many 262 Menu Structure 1 to many 263 Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many 264 Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many 265 Controller Page 1 to many 268 Settings 1 to many 269 Statistics 1 to many 276 Product ID 1 to many 278 Monitoring 1 to many 279 Fault Management 1 to many 280 Service Commands 1 to many 281 1639501EN 04 09 2014 253 Use Physical Description 1 to many 1 to many Interface When a Magelis XBTN410 is used in a 1 to many physical configuration the face of the HMI looks like this 1 LCD display 2 8 button keypad 1 to many Keypad The 1 to many configuration requires a customized keypad label Using a blank keypad label add the name
300. or 372 overcurrent 372 overpower 312 overvoltage 312 register 1 312 register 2 312 register 3 312 thermal overload 312 under power factor 312 undercurrent 312 underpower 372 undervoltage 312 voltage phase imbalance 312 voltage phase loss 312 warning code 312 warning counters protection 52 warning enable controller internal temperature 378 current phase balance 318 current phase loss 319 diagnostic 319 ground current 378 HMI port 378 jam 378 motor temperature sensor 319 network port 378 over power factor 319 overcurrent 319 overpower 319 overvoltage 319 register 1 378 register 2 319 thermal overload 378 under power factor 319 undercurrent 378 underpower 379 undervoltage 319 voltage phase imbalance 319 voltage phase loss 319 warnings count 51 52 304 thermal overload 303 wiring fault 44 fault enable 44 275 351 faults count 52 motor phase sequence 357 414 1639501EN 04 09 2014 il 1639501EN 04 Schneider Electric Industries SAS 35 rue Joseph Monier CS30323 F 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex www schneider electric com As standards specifications and designs change from time to time please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication 09 2014
301. or Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Block Diagram Motor temperature sensor warning o m 0 lt s1 Lp Motor temperature sensor warning NTC Analog Motor temperature sensor fault o 0 lt Os2 L Motor temperature sensor fault NTC Analog Temperature sensing element resistance 6s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold Parameter Settings The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault threshold 20 6500 Qin 0 1 Qincrements 20 Q Warning threshold 20 6500 Qin 0 1 Qincrements 20 Q Technical Characteristics The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Warning threshold and Fault thresholds Detection time 0 5 0 6 s Detection time accuracy 0 1s 1639501EN 04 09 2014 79 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor NTC analog fault with automatic reset A Run state Faultcondition Run state resume Reset 6r2 Fault threshold 6r3 Fault re closing threshold 105 of fault threshold 80 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Rapid Cycle Lockout Description The
302. or Protection Functions Undercurrent Description The undercurrent function signals e a warning when the 3 phase Average Current falls below a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when the 3 phase Average Current falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time after the motor has reached run state The undercurrent function is triggered when the motor current falls below a defined level for the driven load for example if a drive belt or shaft has broken allowing the motor to run free rather than under load This function has a single fault time delay Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled Functional Characteristics The undercurrent function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Undercurrent Warning e Undercurrent Fault e 1 counting statistic e Undercurrent Faults Count Block Diagram Undercurrent warning and fault Run state amp gt 11 m lavg lt Ist 12 lavg AND 13 lavg lt Is2 gt T 0 amp Lasi i Run state p AND lavg Average current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timer delay Parameter Settings The undercurrent function has the following parameters bw Undercurrent warni
303. or internal e Solid green power on with no internal faults fault condition Solid red power on with internal faults Off power off 1 9 and 1 10 Logic inputs I 7 1 8 Yellow State of input On input activated Off input not activated Flashing when the LED is lit up to 250 ms whatever the time cycle is Blinking when the LED is lit 50 of the time in the time cycle Test Reset Use the Test Reset button to perform the following LTM R controller s functions Function Description Procedure Fault reset Resets all faults that can be reset See Overview page 165 for more information about resetting faults Press the button and release within 3s Self test See Self Test with Motor On page 332 Performs a self test if e No faults exist e Self test function is enabled Press and hold the button for more than 3 s up to and including 15 s Local return to factory setting Returns the LTM R controller to factory settings if the product is in one of the following states Ready Not ready or System configuration If the product is in Start or Run state the return to factory setting is ignored When the reset button is pressed during more than 15 s the Alarm LED blinks at 2 Hz If the reset button is released the product executes a reset to factory setting Press and hold the button down for more than 15 s not exceeding 20 s Induce a fault Put
304. orm protection control monitoring and logic functions Each measurement is detailed in this section The measurements can be accessed via e aPC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e an HMI device e aPLC via the network port What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Line Currents 29 Ground Current 30 Average Current 32 Current Phase Imbalance 33 Thermal Capacity Level 33 Motor Temperature Sensor 34 Frequency 34 Line to Line Voltages 35 Line Voltage Imbalance 35 Average Voltage 36 Power Factor 37 Active Power and Reactive Power 38 Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption 38 28 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line Currents Description The LTM R controller measures line currents and provides the value of each phase in amperes and as a percentage of Full Load Current FLC The line currents function returns the rms value in amperes of the phase currents from the 3 CT inputs e L1 phase 1 current e L2 phase 2 current e L3 phase 3 current The LTM R controller performs true rms calculations for line currents up to the 7th harmonic Single phase current is measured from L1 and L3 Line Current Characteristics The line currents function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit A Accuracy e 1 for 8 A and 27 A models 2 for 10
305. ormation about a variable size and format see Data Types page 296 Integers fall into the following categories e Int signed integer using one register 16 bits e Ulnt unsigned integer using one register 16 bits e Dint signed double integer using 2 registers 32 bits e UDInt unsigned double integer using 2 registers 32 bits For all integer type variables the variable name is completed with its unit or format if necessary Example Address 474 Ulnt Frequency x 0 01 Hz Word Set of 16 bits where each bit or group of bits represents command monitoring or configuration data Example Address 455 Word System Status Register 1 bit 0 System ready bit 1 System on bit 2 System fault bit 3 System warning bit 4 System tripped bit 5 Fault reset authorized bit 6 Not significant bit 7 Motor running bits 8 13 Motor average current ratio bit 14 Control via HMI bit 15 Motor starting in progress Word n Data encoded on contiguous registers Examples Addresses 64 to 69 Word 6 Controller Commercial Reference DT_CommercialReference see page 296 Addresses 655 to 658 Word 4 DT_DateTime see page 297 1639501EN 04 09 2014 295 Use Data Types Overview Data types are specific variable formats which are used to complement the description of internal formats for instance in case of a structure or of an enumeration The generi
306. oss e L1 Current loss e L2 Current loss e L3 Current loss Current phase loss fault and warning Run state _ gt 11 11 lavg x 100 lavg gt 80 H o gt g Current phase Ta loss fault 12 12 Iavg x 100 lavg gt 80 AND Current phase 13 al 13 lavg x 100 lavg gt 80 loss warning OR Almax Ln current phase loss 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Ln Line current number or numbers with the greatest deviation from lavg lavg 3 phase current average T Fault timeout 1639501EN 04 09 2014 87 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings The current phase loss function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable NOTE A time of 0 7 second is added to the Fault timeout parameter to avoid nuisance tripping during the start phase Technical Characteristics The current phase loss function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 75 of the 3 phase average current Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a current phase loss fault of a motor in run state A 0 7 s Fault timeout Fault timeout Me ean ever 80 Se Cee a
307. ot cleared after a Clear All Command e Motor LO1 Closings Count e Motor LO2 Closings Count e Controller Internal Temperature Max Clear Statistics Command Statistics parameters are cleared without the LTM R controller being forced into configuration mode Static characteristics are preserved The following parameters are not cleared after a Clear Statistics Command e Motor LO1 Closings Count e Motor LO2 Closings Count e Controller Internal Temperature Max Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command clears the following parameters e Thermal Capacity Level e Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout Thermal memory parameters are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode Static characteristics are preserved NOTE This bit is writable at any time even when the motor is running For more information about the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command see Reset for Emergency Restart page 66 Clear Controller Settings Command The Clear Controller Settings Command restores the LTM R controller protection factory settings timeouts and thresholds The following settings are not cleared by this command e Controller characteristics e Connections CT temperature sensor and I O settings e Operating mode Controller setting parameters are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode Static characteristics are preserved 176 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Mo
308. otor Starts Per Hour Counter Description Characteristics The LTM R controller tracks the number of motor starts during the past hour and records this figure in the Motor Starts Per Hour Count parameter The LTM R controller sums start in 5 minute intervals with an accuracy of 1 interval 0 5 minutes which means that the parameter will contain the total number of starts within either the previous 60 minutes or the previous 55 minutes This function is used as a maintenance function to avoid thermal strain on the motor The motor starts per hour function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Accuracy 5 minutes 0 5 minutes Resolution 5 minutes Refresh interval 100 ms Load Sheddings Counter Description The Load Sheddings Count parameter contains the number of times the load sheddings protection function has been activated since the last Clear Statistics Command For information on the Load Sheddings protection function see Load Shedding page 115 Auto Restart Counters Description There are 3 types of counting statistics e Auto restart immediate count e Auto restart delayed count e Auto restart manual count For information on the Auto restart protection function see Automatic Restart page 117 1639501EN 04 09 2014 55 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Last Start Current Ratio Description Characteristics The LTM R controller measur
309. ove the threshold for the duration of a configurable Load shedding restart timer When the LTM R controller clears the load shedding condition e in 2 wire maintained configuration it issues a Run command to re start the motor e in 3 wire impulse configuration it does not automatically re start the motor In Overload motor operating mode load shedding conditions do not affect O 1 and O 2 operating states In Independent motor operating mode load shedding conditions do not affect O 2 state If your application includes another device that externally provides load shedding the LTM R controller s load shedding function should not be enabled All voltage dip thresholds and timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state When a load shedding timer is counting at the time it is adjusted the new duration time does not become effective until the timer expires This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings The load shedding function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Voltage Dip Threshold e Voltage Dip Restart Threshold e 2 time delays e Load Shedding Timeout e Voltage Dip Restart Timeout e 1 status flag e Load Shedding e 1 counting statistic e Load Sheddings Count In addition the load shedding function e disables logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 e causes the alarm LED to flash 5 time
310. ovides the following fault reset information at the indicated locations left right lt O 1 FELT 023 067 FLT50 d ooe fd fault reset bit not significant LTM R controller number 1 8 3 fault status ON OFF FLT 4 time to reset seconds Reset to Defaults Page The Reset to Defaults page provides the Clear Statistics Command and the Clear Controller Settings Command for each LTM R controller as displayed below Level 2 Description Reset to defaults toe 6 ees Stats 2 Settings gt Stats 3 Settings gt Stats 4 Settings gt Stats 5 Settings gt Stats 6 Settings gt Stats 7 Settings gt Stats 8 Settings gt 266 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use XBTN Reference Page The XBTN Reference page provides information about the HMI The following is an example of information displayed in this page Level 2 Parameter name description XBTN Reference MB Speed 19200 HMI Port Baud Rate Setting MB Parity Even HMI Port Parity Setting LTM_1T8_E_Vx xx DOP file name for the HMI application program XX XX 200X XX XX XxX date of the HMI application program file XBT L1000 V 4 42 version of the XBT 1000 software Firmware V3 1 version of the HMI firmware 1639501EN 04 09 2014 267 Use Controller Page 1 to many Overview The Controller page presents information and commands for the LTM R controller that was
311. ow Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 455 Word System status register 1 bit 0 System ready bit 1 System on bit 2 System fault bit 3 System warning bit 4 System tripped bit 5 Fault reset authorized bit 6 Controller power bit 7 Motor running with detection of a current if greater than 10 FLC bits 8 13 Motor average current ratio 32 100 FLC 63 200 FLC bit 14 Control via HMI bit 15 Motor starting start in progress 0 descending current is less than 150 FLC 1 ascending current is greater than 10 FLC 456 Word System status register 2 bit 0 Auto reset active bit 1 Not significant bit 2 Fault power cycle requested bit 3 Motor restart time undefined bit 4 Rapid cycle lockout bit 5 Load shedding bit 6 Motor speed 0 FLC1 setting is used 1 FLC2 setting is used bit 7 HMI port comm loss bit 8 Network port comm loss bit 9 Motor transition lockout bits 10 15 Not significant 310 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 457 Word Logic inputs status bit O Logic input 1 bit 1 Logic input 2 bit 2 Logic input 3 bit 3 Logic input 4 bit 4 Logic input 5 bit 5 Logic input 6 bit 6 Logic input 7 bit 7 Logic input 8 bit 8
312. ow Logic outputs O 1 and 0 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error NOTE See Control Wiring and Fault Management page 146 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagram Independent Application Diagram The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control independent application 3a p A1 A2 For additional examples of independent operating mode IEC diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams page 369 For examples of independent operating mode NEMA diagrams refer to relevant diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams page 388 1639501EN 04 09 2014 149 Motor Control Functions I O Assignment Independent operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic Inputs 2 Wire Maintained Assignment 3 Wire Impulse Assignment 1 1 Start Stop motor Start motor 1 2 Open Close 0 2 Close 0 2 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop motor and open O 1 and O 2 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or Remote 1 Local 0 or Remote 1 Independent operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic Outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 KM1 contactor control 23 and 24 Controlled by 1 2 Warning signal 0
313. p HMI Network Wiring configuration errors PTC connection RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 RB PC I 5 RB PC 1 5 Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Motor temp sensor PTC Binary AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 PT100 AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 PTC Analog AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 NTC Analog AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 Thermal overload Definite AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 Inverse Thermal AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 Current Long Start RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Jam RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Current Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Current Phase Loss RB I 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 NC Undercurrent RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Overcurrent RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 External Ground Current RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Internal Ground Current RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Overvoltage RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Voltage Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2
314. p lt a p pia EERE TEE 4875 Q EEEE 2900 Q Fault threshold 1575 Q Fault re closing threshold Reset This marks the time after which a reset can be executed A start command is required before run state can be resumed In this example auto reset has been enabled 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor PT100 Description The PT100 motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temperature Sensor Type parameter is set to PT100 and the LTM R controller is connected to a PT100 sensor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured temperature exceeds a configurable warning threshold e a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured temperature exceeds a separately set fault threshold The LTM R directly measures the temperature with a PT100 sensor The temperature measured by the PT100 sensor either in C factory setting or in F is displayed on the HMI or the TeSys T DTM according to the Motor Temperature Sensor Display Degree CF parameter The fault or warning condition continues until the measured temperature falls below 95 of the fault or warning threshold There is a fixed detection time of 0 5 s to 0 6 s to the motor temperature sensor fault or warning Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled
315. page 142 e The Network Port Fallback Setting and HMI Port Fallback Setting parameters Fallback setting selection can include Port Fallback Setting Description Hold 0 1 O 2 Directs the LTM R controller to hold the state of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 as of the time of the communication loss Run Directs the LTM R controller to perform a Run command for a 2 step control sequence on the communication loss 0 1 0 2 Off Directs the LTM R controller to turn off both logic outputs O 1 and O 2 following a communication loss 0 1 0 2 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on both logic outputs O 1 and O 2 following a communication loss 0 1 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O 1 following a communication loss 0 2 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O 2 following a communication loss The following table indicates which fallback options are available for each operating mode Port Fallback Setting Operating Mode Overload Independent Reverser 2 step 2 speed Custom Hold 0 1 O 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Run No No No Yes No No 0 1 O 2 Off Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 1 O 2 On Yes Yes No No No Yes 0 1 On Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 0 2 On Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes NOTE When you select a network or HMI fallback setting your selection must identify an active control source 1639501EN 04 09 2014 47
316. pplication diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram 1639501EN 04 09 2014 388 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram Al A2 A3 H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Terminal strip control O Off A Automatic Network control 1639501EN 04 09 2014 389 Wiring Diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control wiring diagram Stop Qo fa B1 F Forward R Reverse Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram F Forward O Off R Reverse 390 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3
317. protection functions may require that you scale the resistance value to the corresponding threshold level in degrees based on the properties of the selected sensing element When a sensor type is changed the LTM R controller s motor temperature sensing configuration settings revert to their factory settings If a sensor type is replaced with another sensor of the same type the setting values are retained The motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings which apply to the selected motor temp sensor type Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Sensor type e None None e PTC Binary e PT100 e PTC Analog e NTC Analog Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Warning enable Enable Disable Disable 72 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary Description The PTC Binary motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC Binary and the LTM R controller is connected to a binary positive temperature coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a fixed threshold e a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds the same fixed threshold The fault and warning conditions continue until meas
318. puts O 1 and O 2 is determined by the selected operating mode See the topics that follow for a description of the 10 predefined operating mode types and the behavior of logic outputs 0 1 and O 2 When the LTM R controller has lost communication with either the network or the HMI the LTM R controller enters a fallback condition When it receives a stop command in a fallback condition logic outputs O 1 and O 2 behave as follows Control Circuit Type Response of Logic Outputs O 1 and O 2 to a Stop Command 2 wire maintained A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O 1 and O 2 while the stop command is active After the stop command is no longer active logic outputs O 1 and O 2 return to their programmed fallback state 3 wire impulse A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 The outputs remain off after the stop command is removed and do not return to their programmed fallback state For more information about configuring fallback parameters refer to the Fallback Condition see page 47 portion of the topic describing Communication Loss In all operating mode types the following logic outputs behave as described below Logic Output Behavior 0 3 Activated by any enabled protection warning e Terminals NO 33 34 0 4 Activated by any enabled protection fault Terminals NC 95 96 Terminals NO 97 98 Note When control vol
319. r including fault n 0 and fault n 1 history Product ID page LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module part and firmware identification 1639501EN 04 09 2014 263 Use Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many Overview Home Page The Home Page opens on HMI start up when the Magelis XBTN410 is connected to 1 or more LTMR controllers all of which are running without faults or warnings The Home page is the only page located in level 1 of the Magelis XBTN410 1 to many menu structure It is the starting place for navigation to all other levels and pages in the menu structure The Home page contains the following menu items Menu item Description Page header with LTM R controller firmware version TeSys T VX X IMPORTANT gt Links to a page with the following CAUTION message Please set HMI Port Endianess to LEndian to ensure that all values are correctly displayed Controller currents Links to a page that displays average current and provides links to data and commands for each LTM R controller Controller status Links to a page that displays status On Off Fault and provides links to data and commands for each LTM R controller Faults Displays a series of fault messages Remote Reset Links to a page that displays the status of each LTM R controller and provides a reset command for each LTM R controller Reset to defaults Links to a page with c
320. r 2 for example by setting the number of resets to 0 thereby requiring a manual reset after the equipment failure has been discovered and corrected Auto reset group 3 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Auto Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number of reset attempts 0 Auto Reset Group 3 Timeout 0 65 535 s 60s Auto Reset Methods The LTM R controller allows the following auto reset methods e RB Test Reset button on the LTM R or the HMI e PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller e 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R e NC Network command e Automatic with conditions configured for the protection function group where AU GX AU G1 AU G2 or AU G3 The table below lists the possible auto reset methods for each monitored fault Protection Category Monitored Fault Control Channel Terminal Strip HMI Network Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC 170 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Protection Category Monitored Fault Control Channel Terminal Stri
321. r Status 4 1 Off 5 OffF LT Opens the Controller page for the selected controller 1 8 4 2 Off 6 On 3 0n FLT 7 Off 4 08 8 Off Controller currents Opens the Controller Currents page Remote reset Opens the Remote Reset page Home vvv vvv Returns to the Home page Faults Display The Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays active faults in a series of pages 1 fault to a page when e a fault occurs and the display of active faults automatically opens e you select Faults in the Home page and manually open the display of active faults For information about fault management including the faults display pages see Fault Management 1 to many page 280 1639501EN 04 09 2014 265 Use Remote Reset Page Use the Remote Reset page to remotely execute a Fault Reset Command for a faulted LTM R controller for controllers with Fault Reset Mode set to Remote and to navigate to other pages Level 2 Description Remote Reset 4 gt Executes a Fault Reset Command for the selected LTM R ENS pee Eh controller 1 8 if remote fault reset is enabled for that controller 02FLTO34 078FLT60 gt 03FLT045 O89FLT70 gt 04FLT056 O90FLT80 gt Controller currents gt Opens the Controller Currents page Controller status gt Opens the Controller Status page Home gt Returns to the Home page Each of the first 4 lines of this page pr
322. r protection functions of the LTM R controller What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Thermal Overload 65 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal 66 Thermal Overload Definite Time 70 Motor Temperature Sensor T2 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary 73 Motor Temperature Sensor PT100 T5 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog 77 Motor Temperature Sensor NTC Analog 79 Rapid Cycle Lockout 81 64 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Overview Parameter Settings The LTM R controller can be configured to provide thermal protection by selecting one of the following settings e Inverse Thermal see page 66 factory setting e Definite Time see page 70 Each setting represents a Trip Curve Characteristic The LTM R controller stores the selected setting in its Thermal Overload Mode parameter Only one setting can be activated at a time See the topics that immediately follow for information on the operation and configuration of each setting The Thermal Overload function has the following configurable parameter settings which apply to every trip current characteristic Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Mode Inverse thermal Inverse thermal e Definite time Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Motor auxiliary fan cooled Enable Disable Disable
323. racteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 3 or 10 for cos gt 0 6 Trip time accuracy 0 1sort 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an over power factor fault coso cosgs2 cosqgs2 Over power factor fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 129 Motor Protection Functions 130 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Chapter 4 Motor Control Functions Overview The topics in this chapter describe the LTM R controller s operating states which determine the operating modes and the fault reset mode manual remote automatic This chapter also introduces custom operating mode which you can use to customize a predefined control program What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 4 1 Control Channels and Operating States 132 4 2 Operating Modes 142 4 3 Fault Management and Clear Commands 164 1639501EN 04 09 2014 131 Motor Control Functions Section 4 1 Control Channels and Operating States Overview This section describes e how to configure control of the LTM R controller outputs and e the LTM R controller s operating states including e how the LTM R controller transitions between operating states during startup and e the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller in
324. ration of possible baud rates with Modbus network Value Description 1200 1200 Baud 2400 2400 Baud 4800 4800 Baud 9600 9600 Baud 19200 19 200 Baud 65535 Autodetection factory setting DT_ProfibusExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with PROFIBUS DP network Value Description 65535 Autobaud factory setting DT_DeviceNetExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with DeviceNet network Value Description 0 125 kBaud 1 250 kBaud 2 500 kBaud 3 Autobaud factory setting DT_CANopenExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with CANopen network Value Description 0 10 kBaud 20 kBaud 50 kBaud 125 kBaud 250 kBaud factory setting 500 kBaud 800 kBaud 1000 kBaud OO O N OD oO BR ww ny Autobaud Factory setting DT_ExtParity depends on the bus used DT_ModbusExtParity format is an enumeration of possible parities with Modbus network Value Description 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd 298 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use DT_FaultCode DT_FaultCode format is an enumeration of fault codes Fault code Description 0 No error 3 Ground cur
325. re fault enable 354 fault threshold Q 354 sensor threshold C 354 sensor type 354 warning enable 354 warning threshold C 354 warning threshold Q 354 motor temperature sensor 53 72 313 fault threshold 315 display degree CF 76 fault enable 72 269 fault threshold 77 79 269 fault threshold degree 76 315 faults count 52 n 0 277 n 1 277 PT100 75 type 44 72 73 77 79 warning 72 warning enable 269 warning threshold 77 79 269 315 warning threshold degree 76 315 1639501EN 04 09 2014 411 Index motor temperature sensor n 0 304 n 1 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 motor temperature sensor degree 312 n 0 307 308 n 1 308 n 2 308 n 3 308 N network port address setting 288 321 353 bad config 373 bad rate setting 353 baud rate 373 baud rate setting 288 327 comm loss timeout 275 288 321 communicating 313 communication loss timeout 353 compatibility code 302 config faults count 53 276 connected 313 endian setting 270 275 288 317 353 fallback action setting 353 fallback setting 288 321 fault enable 275 353 faults count 53 276 firmware version 278 302 ID code 278 302 internal faults count 53 276 monitoring 313 parity 373 parity setting 288 327 self detecting 313 self testing 313 warning enable 275 353 network port comm loss 310 NTC analog 79 O on level current 139 operating modes 142 custom 163 independent 149
326. rement either e the entire value or a selected digit within the setting exit the present level in the HMI menu structure and move up to the next level exit the selected setting without saving changes 254 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Keys Use this key to save changes and exit the selected setting delete the value of the selected setting Note after deleting a setting value you can either e use the arrow keys to input a new value then click T to save it or click to restore the deleted value 1 to Many LCD In a 1 to many configuration the Magelis XBTN410 HMI presents a flexible LCD that can display up to 4 rows of 20 characters as follows In some cases the LCD displays only 3 text lines because one line containing a fault message or page header is twice the height of normal text Pages The LCD displays pages of text There are 2 types of pages Page type Contains Displayed Menu structure page page header that is twice the height of by navigating through the HMI menu structure ordinary LCD text to the specific page links to other pages read only parameter values editable parameter settings function commands Fault message page a flashing fault message automatically wh
327. rent 4 Thermal overload 5 Long start 6 Jam 7 Current phase imbalance 8 Undercurrent 10 Test 11 HMI port error 12 HMI port communication loss 13 Network port internal error 16 External fault 18 On Off diagnostic 19 Wiring diagnostic 20 Overcurrent 21 Current phase loss 22 Current phase reversal 23 Motor temp sensor 24 Voltage phase imbalance 25 Voltage phase loss 26 Voltage phase reversal 27 Undervoltage 28 Overvoltage 29 Underpower 30 Overpower 31 Under power factor 32 Over power factor 33 LTME configuration 34 Temperature sensor short circuit 35 Temperature sensor open circuit 36 CT reversal 37 Out of boundary CT ratio 46 Start check 47 Run checkback 48 Stop check 49 Stop checkback 51 Controller internal temperature error 55 Controller internal error Stack overflow 56 Controller internal error RAM error 57 Controller internal error RAM checksum error 58 Controller internal error Hardware watchdog fault 60 L2 current detected in single phase mode 64 Non volatile memory error 65 Expansion module communication error 66 Stuck reset button 67 Logic function error 1639501EN 04 09 2014 299 Use Fault code Description 100 104 Network port internal error 109 Network port comm error 111 Faulty device replacement fault 555 Network port configuration error DT_FirmwareVersion DT_FirmwareVersion format is an XY000 array that describes a fir
328. reshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Jam Warning e Jam Fault e 1 counting statistic e Jam Faults Count Jam warning and fault ro Run state amp H p m e Imax gt Is1 12 Imax AND 13 e Imax gt Is2 g T 0 a Run state p AND 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The jam function has the following parameters Jam warning L y Jam fault Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 1 30 s in 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC 92 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Technical Characteristics The jam function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1sort 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a jam fault Start state Run state i Fault condition a a AE E cueng X Jam fault timeout lt ___ Is2 Jam fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 93 Mot
329. retains a record of the highest attained internal temperature The Controller Internal Temperature measured values have the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit C Accuracy 4 C 7 2 F Resolution 1 C 1 8 F Refresh interval 100 ms The Controller Internal Temperature function includes one editable parameter Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Controller internal temperature warning enable e Enable Enable e Disable The Controller Internal Temperature function includes the following fixed warning and fault thresholds Condition Fixed Threshold Value Sets Parameter Internal temperature warning 80 C 176 F Controller Internal Temperature Warning Internal temperature minor fault 85 C 185 F Controller Internal Fault Internal temperature major fault 100 C 212 F A warning condition ceases when LTM R Controller Internal Temperature falls below 80 C 176 F Controller internal temperature warning and fault o T gt 80 C m Controller internal temperature warning T T gt 85 C m Controller internal temperature minor fault e3 T gt 100 C m Controller internal temperature major fault T Temperature T gt 80 C 176 F Fixed warning threshold T gt 85 C 185 F Fixed minor fault threshold T gt 100 C 212 F Fixed major fault threshold Maximum Internal Controller T
330. rking correctly It triggers a Thermal Overload fault During a self test the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1 When the self test finishes this parameter is reset to 0 To ensure an accurate record of faults be sure to maintain the LTM R controller s internal clock The LTM R controller time stamps all faults using the value stored in the Date And Time Setting parameter Internal clock accuracy is 1 second per hour If power is continuously applied for 1 year the internal clock accuracy is 30 minutes per year If power is turned Off for 30 minutes or less the LTM R controller retains its internal clock settings with accuracy of 2 minutes If power is turned Off for more than 30 minutes the LTM R controller resets its internal clock to the time when power was turned Off 332 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Maintenance Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module Overview Questions to consider in advance of replacing either an LTM R controller or an LTM E expansion module are e is the replacement device the same model as the original e have the configuration settings of the LTM R controller been saved and are they available to be transferred to its replacement Be sure the motor is turned off before replacing either the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion module Replacing the LTM R Controller The time to plan for the replacement of an LTM R controller is e whe
331. rnings acknowledgement Configuration at start up See commissioning Compulsory circuit eece gt Optional circuit Control According to Motor Mode Register 704 Bit 704 0 Motor run forward command Bit 704 1 Motor run reverse command Monitoring System status register 455 Bit 455 2 System fault Bit 455 3 System warning Bit 455 8 13 Motor average current ratio Monitoring Warnings Register 460 Warning code or Register 461 462 Warning type If an error has been detected get more information with c Register 450 Fault code or Monitoring Faults i Check if the current value is correct Register 451 452 Fault type To be used if needed to unlock the system Monitoring Measurement Register 466 Average current ratio Control Acknowledgment Bit 704 3 Fault reset command 1639501EN 04 09 2014 289 Use Modbus Request and Programming Examples Modbus Request The following table indicates which Modbus functions are managed by the LTM R controller and specifies their limits Code value Function name Broadcasting Modbus standard name Hexadecimal Decimal 0x03 3 Read N output words Me Read Holding Register multiple registers 0x06 6 Write output word single Yes Preset Single Register register Write N output words
332. rpower RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overpower RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Under Power Factor RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Over Power Factor RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC Network command 172 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Protection Category Monitored Fault Control Channel Terminal Strip HMI Network Communication Loss PLC to LTMR RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC LTM E to LTMR RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC Network command 1639501EN 04 09 2014 173 Motor Control Functions Fault and Warning Codes Fault Codes Each detected fault is identified by a numerical fault code Fault code Description 0 No error 3 Ground current 4 Thermal overload 5 Long start 6 Jam 7 Current phase imbalance 8 Undercurrent 10 Test 11 HMI port error 12 HMI port communication loss 13 Network port internal error 16 External fault 18 On Off diagnostic
333. rrent Phase Imbalance 84 Current Phase Loss 87 Current Phase Reversal 89 Long Start 90 Jam 92 Undercurrent 94 Overcurrent 96 Ground Current 98 Internal Ground Current 99 External Ground Current 101 1639501EN 04 09 2014 83 Motor Protection Functions Current Phase Imbalance Description The current phase imbalance function signals e awarning when the current in any phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average current in all 3 phases e a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average current in all 3 phases for a set period of time A CAUTION RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING The Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold must be properly set to protect the wiring and motor equipment from harm caused by motor overheating e The setting you input must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes e Refer to the motor manufacturer s instructions before setting this parameter Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE Use this function to detect and guard against smaller current phase imbalances For larger imbalances in excess of 80 of the average current in all 3 phases use the current phase loss motor protection function This function has 2 adjustable fault time delays e one applies to current imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state and e one applies
334. rt MW100 4 ouh WD 290 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Example of a Write Operation Modbus Request Code 16 The example below describes a WRITE_VAR request within a TSX Micro or Premium platform in order to control an LTM R by sending the contents of internal word MW 502 fee NE I IA dh If MO AND NOT MW200 X0 THEN WRITE VAR ADR 3 0 4 SMW 704 1 MW502 1 MW200 4 RESET M10 EN_IF Address of the device with which you wish to communicate 3 device address 0 channel 4 device address on the bus Type of PL7 objects to be written MW internal word Address of the first register to be written 704 Number of consecutive registers to be written 1 Word table containing the value of the objects to be sent MW502 1 Write report MW200 4 OORUN 1639501EN 04 09 2014 291 Use Modbus Exception Management Overview The LTM R controller generally follows the Modbus requirements for the Exception Management 3 special cases apply to the LTM R controller e Bit Field Registers e Exception Code 02 Illegal Data Address e Exception Code 03 Illegal Data Value Bit Field Registers Some registers in the Register Map are bit field Based on the LTM R controller state some bits in those registers shall not be writable In this case the LTM R controller shall reject the write to those bits meaning that no exception shall be returned For example bits that can be written only in configuration mode will be
335. s Overview The LTM R controller has 3 CT windows through which you can route motor leads to contactor load connections The CT windows enable you to wire the controller in 4 different ways depending on the voltage and controller model used e internal CT wiring through the windows e internal CT wiring using multiple passes e internal CT wiring using the lug kit ref Class 9999 MLPL e external Load CT wiring This section describes each of these options Internal CT Wiring Through the Windows The following diagrams show typical wiring using the CT windows for either 3 phase or single phase motors 3n da A a 0 D L1 I L2 J L3 L I N j famm al ammit mm rm SSS lSl l EHH SiS SSS l l EHH H ooggel eeg Test Reset l VQOVOCCf JOCOO rolsrelerererororere Crelere o Test Reset l QOQVOCE CSO pg aem 196 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Internal CT Wiring Using Multiple Passes The controller can physically support up to a maximum of 5 passes of 2 5 mm 14 AWG wire through the CT windows There are 3 looping windows located under the CT windows that physically support up toa maximum of 4 wire loops Set the parameter Load CT Multiple Passes to account for the number
336. s The code can be e numerical 1 to 9 for specific hardware combinations e alphabetical A to Z for specific system behaviors If the note is Then the variable is 1 available for the LTM R LTM EV40 combination 2 always available but with a value equal to 0 if no LTM EV40 is connected 3 9 Not used If the note is Then A the variable can be written only when the motor is off 1 B the variable can be written only in configuration mode e g static characteristics c the variable can be written only with no fault D Z Not used 1 Restrictions A B and C may apply only to bits not to whole registers If you try to write a value when a restriction is applied the bit will not be changed and no exception code will be returned Exception codes are returned at register level not at bit level Unused addresses fall into 3 categories e Not significant in Read only tables means that you should ignore the value read whether equal to 0 or not e Reserved in Read Write tables means that you must write 0 in these variables e Forbidden means that read or write requests are rejected that these addresses are not accessible at all 294 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Data Formats Overview Integer Int UInt Dint IDInt Word Word n The data format of a communication variable can be integer Word or Word n as described below For more inf
337. s Group 1 Setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number of reset 5 attempts Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout 0 65 535 s 480s Auto Reset Group 2 AU G2 Group 2 faults generally do not include a predefined cooling time delay before a reset can be executed but can be reset as soon as the fault condition clears Many group 2 faults can result in some motor overheating depending upon the severity and duration of the fault condition which in turn depends upon the protection function configuration You can add a cooling time delay if appropriate by setting the Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout parameter to a value greater than 0 You may also want to limit the number of reset attempts to prevent premature wear or failure of the equipment Auto reset group 2 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Auto Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number of 0 reset attempts Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout 0 65 535 s 1 200 s Auto Reset Group 3 AU G3 Group 3 faults often apply to equipment monitoring and generally do not require a motor cooling period These faults can be used to detect equipment conditions for example an undercurrent fault that detects the loss of a belt or an overpower fault that detects an increased loading condition in a mixer You may want to configure group 3 faults in a way that differs significantly from groups 1 o
338. s a locked non configured state called the initialized state and the Controller System Config Required parameter is turned On The LTM R controller exits this state only after certain parameters called required parameters have been configured When commissioning is done the LTM R controller is no longer locked and is ready for operations For information on operating states see Operating States page 136 First Power up in the LTM CU Using the LTM CU control operator unit configuring the Menu First Setup menu parameters clears the Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization The first time the LTM R controller powers up after leaving the factory the LTM CU control operator unit LCD automatically displays the First Setup menu with a list of parameters that need to be configured immediately c First setup Load CT ratio v OK a4 Click OK When all parameters are set the last menu item to show up is End Config c First setup Local channel End Config v OK a4 Click OK c End Config o MO O Yes t Ka Q Click Yes to save the configuration When the configuration is saved the First Setup menu is no longer displayed Send a Clear All command to the product to access the first setup menu again For more information see the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User s Manual 230 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Co
339. s of the 6 bottom buttons to the label For instructions on creating and installing a customized keypad label refer to the XBT N Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI In a 1 to many configuration the keypad buttons perform the following functions Keys Use this key to enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 1 4 move to the adjacent left character within a numerical setting value execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 1 4 reset statistics to factory settings for a selected LTM R controller display the description of another fault when the LCD displays fault messages enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 5 8 move to a lower level in an LTM R controller menu structure move to the adjacent right character within a numerical setting value toggle between alternate values for Boolean settings execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 5 8 reset settings to factory settings for a selected LTM R controller display the description of another fault when the LCD displays fault messages scroll down through a page decrement by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting scroll up through a page increment by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting select a numeric setting for editing Note after a setting is selected you can increment or dec
340. s per second The load shedding function has the following parameters Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Voltage dip mode 0 None 0 None 1 Load shedding 2 Auto restart Load shedding timeout 1 9999 s in increments of 1 s 10s Voltage dip threshold 50 115 of Motor nominal voltage 70 Voltage dip restart timeout 1 9999 s in increments of 1 s 2s Voltage dip restart threshold 65 115 of Motor nominal voltage 90 1639501EN 04 09 2014 115 Motor Protection Functions Technical Characteristics The load shedding function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Timing Sequence The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the load shedding function for a 2 wire configuration with automatic restart Vav a Voltage dip restart threshold Voltage dip threshold t al y Load shedding timeout A Volt di Y y oltage dip i restart timeout 7 t Load sheddi t y oad shedding bit q Motor On Y Y Fiz gt a a gt 1 Motor running 2 Load shed motor stopped 3 Load shed cleared motor auto restart 2 wire operation 116 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Automatic Restart Description The LTM R controller provides automatic restart With the automatic restart function enabled the LTM R
341. s the TeSys DTM library The TeSys DTM library includes e TeSys T DTM e TeSys UDTM These DTM are automatically installed during the SoMove installation process Downloading SoMove SoMove can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric website www schneider electric com by entering SoMove Lite in the Search field Installing SoMove Step Action Unzip the downloaded file the SoMove file is unzipped in a folder named SoMove_Lite V X X X X where X X X X is the version number Open this folder and double click setup exe In the Choose Setup Language dialog box select the installation language Click OK In the Welcome to the Installation Wizard for SoMove Lite dialog box click the Next button oA ww N If an Install Shield Wizard dialog box appears and informs you that you must install Modbus driver click the Install button Result Modbus driver is installed automatically In the Readme and Release Notes dialog box click the Next button In the Readme dialog box click the Next button In the License Agreement dialog box e Read carefully the license agreement e Select accept the terms in the license agreement option e Click the Next button In the Customer Information dialog box e Enter the following information in the corresponding fields e First name e Last name Company name Select an installation option e Either the Anyone who uses this computer option if
342. sas 87 Current Phase Reversal 0 0 ccc ccc eee eee eee een eens 89 Long Stait oc2 aie ecienty ensa E ee ee eek eh neatad cease ead ea Ea E E EA EE eee 90 Jami rate omnes eet Graves use ete ee ee atten Sanat Cae hE a a eure ciaoeee ca ates au 92 Undercurrent oc cs6c0herbwbebedietacketiers tidoetads biadreadenis eea phaeke 94 OVErCUITent 2 22222 c2250 8d eethue eHadeeeagecsaneee ae eer gneedgureheaeaece 96 Ground Current scsi eoscw eee eee Bde eae ee eared be Rr ee Be See ee a eh 98 Internal Ground Current 0 0 2 0 0 een nent teens 99 External Ground Current 2 026204 lt 0 40 60 208 eh erer E whee ede ee ee eee ee ea 101 3 4 Voltage Motor Protection Functions 0 0000 c cette tee 103 Voltage Phase Imbalance 00 000 c cee 104 Voltage Phase Loss 2 u ccs6cc de sckeeed eh aah EARS weeded ah endo ls odacvededsiges 107 Voltage Phase ReverSal 000 cece eee eee 109 Undervoliage eccerre niia eie leader ies pews res ad hee be Wee ne eee cee ee 110 Overvoltage 0 0 eee E E E ee 112 Voltage Dip Management 0 0 cette teas 114 Load SHECGING joc tts oad one Ah ee EEO Bae CAS eel el eed ae hk ees 115 Automatic Restart ereet orines ee whee ee as HEE ea Ma wea a Wak he ad ards E 117 3 5 Power Motor Protection Functions 0 0 2 0 uaaa aaaeeeaa aaea 121 UNdEIMPOWER iss fn ee Ata Be wack eae Ba eae ede Bae TA eM Aa ee dad 122 OVEMDOWEN Ss 3 pals eae Dee De ESE RRR eed Poeddi Se ae eh eet 124
343. schedule motor maintenance such as lubrication inspection and replacement 56 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Section 2 5 System Operating Status Overview The LTM R controller monitors the motor operating state and the minimum time to wait to restart the motor The Motor states can be accessed via e a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e an HMI device e a PLC via the network port What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Motor State 58 Minimum Wait Time 58 1639501EN 04 09 2014 57 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor State Description The LTM R controller tracks the motor state and reports the following states by setting the corresponding boolean parameters Motor state Parameter Run Motor Running Ready System Ready Start Motor Starting Minimum Wait Time Description Characteristics The LTM R controller tracks the time remaining to restart the motor according to one of the following events automatic reset see page 169 thermal overload see page 65 rapid cycle lockout see page 87 load shedding see page 115 automatic restart see page 117 transition time If more than one timer is active the parameter displays the maximum timer which is the minimum wait for the fault response or the control function to reset NOTE Even with an LTM R powered off
344. scribed above and stops the flow of current to the contactor coil In order to restart the motor the fault must be reset and a new start command must be issued e For 2 wire maintained control circuits the control strategy links the state of logic output O 4 directly with the logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 e Control logic opens logic output O 4 in response to a fault e Logic output O 4 opening interrupts current to the logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 e Control logic disables the start commands opening logic outputs O 1 or O 2 In order to restart the motor the fault must be reset and the state of Start Stop operators determines the state of logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 The control circuits needed to run a motor during a motor protection fault are not shown in the wiring diagrams that follow However the control strategy is to not link the state of logic output O 4 to the state of the input commands In this way fault conditions may be annunciated while control logic continues to manage Start and Stop commands 146 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions Overload Operating Mode Description Use Overload operating mode when motor load monitoring is required and motor load control start stop is performed by a mechanism other than the LTM R controller Functional Characteristics The Overload operating mode includes the following features e The LTM R controller overload operating mode does not manage logic outputs O 1 0 2 and O
345. se with the highest voltage imbalance e L1 L2 Highest Imbalance e L2 L3 Highest Imbalance e L3 L1 Highest Imbalance 104 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Parameter Settings Voltage phase imbalance warning Start state Run state vi V1 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs1 v2 V2Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs1 v3 V3 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs1 Voltage phase imbalance fault AVmax v1 v1 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs2 gt v2 V2Vavg lx 100 Vavg gt Vs2 v3 V3 Vavg lx 100 Vavg gt Vs2 e gt AND V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage fm g Run state pe OR AND we AVmax Ln Line number or numbers with greatest deviation from Vavg Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold Vavg 3 phase voltage average T1 Fault timeout starting T2 Fault timeout running The voltage phase imbalance function has the following parameters Voltage phase amp imbalance warning AND w Ln voltage imbalance Voltage phase Ti imbalance fault motor starting Voltage phase T2 o imbalance fault motor running Ln voltage imbalance Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20
346. selected in either the Controller Currents page or the Controller Status page see Controller Currents Page page 265 The Controller page is the only page located in level 3 of the menu structure Use the Controller page to Controller Page monitor dynamically changing current voltage and power values for a single selected LTM R controller navigate to editable parameter settings for an LTM R controller navigate to read only statistics and product information for an LTM R controller execute the Self Test command for an LTM R controller The Controller page displays dynamically changing parameter values and contains the command lines as follows Level 3 Parameter name Description Controller 1 8 Page header indicating LTM R controller address 1 8 Avg Current xxxx FLC Average Current Ratio L1 Current xxxx FLC L1 Current Ratio L2 Current xxxx FLC L2 Current Ratio L3 Current xxxx FLC L3 Current Ratio GRCurr xxxx x FLCmin Ground Current Ratio Curr Ph Imb xxx lmb Current Phase Imbalance Th Capacity xxxxx Thermal Capacity Level Time To Trip xxxxSec Time To Trip Avg Voltage xxxx FLCmin Average Voltage L1 L2 Volts xxxxxV L1 L2 Voltage L2 L3 Volts xxxxxV L2 L3 Voltage L3 L1 Volts xxxxxV L3 L1 Voltage Volt Ph Imb xxx Ilmb Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Factor xx xx Power Factor Active Pwr
347. setting bits 4 8 Reserved bit 9 HMI port endian setting bit 10 Network port endian setting bit 11 HMI motor status LED color bits 12 15 Reserved 603 Ulnt HMI port address setting 604 Ulnt HMI port baud rate setting Baud 605 Reserved 606 Ulnt Motor trip class s 607 Reserved 608 Ulnt Thermal overload fault reset threshold trip level 609 Ulnt Thermal overload warning threshold trip level 610 Ulnt Internal ground current fault timeout x 0 1 s 611 Ulnt Internal ground current fault threshold FLCmin 612 Ulnt Internal ground current warning threshold FLCmin 613 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting x 0 1 s 614 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault timeout running x 0 1 s 615 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault threshold imb 616 Ulnt Current phase imbalance warning threshold imb 617 Ulnt Jam fault timeout s 618 Ulnt Jam fault threshold FLC 619 Ulnt Jam warning threshold FLC 620 Ulnt Undercurrent fault timeout s 621 Ulnt Undercurrent fault threshold FLC 622 Ulnt Undercurrent warning threshold FLC 623 Ulnt Long start fault timeout s 624 Ulnt Long start fault threshold FLC 625 Reserved 1639501EN 04 09 2014 317 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 626 Ulnt HMI display contrast setting bits 0 7 HMI display contrast setting bits 8 15 HMI display brightness setting 627 Ulnt Co
348. shows wiring using external CTs Kapna HHHH eoe eooo LTMR pp oO __ Test Reset l VOC OCE IOCOO For a description of external CT characteristics see Load Current Transformers page 17 1639501EN 04 09 2014 199 Installation CT Wiring in Presence of Variable Speed Drive When the motor is controlled by a variable speed drive VSD e The current transformers external or internal must be mounted upstream of the variable speed drive and not between the variable speed drive and the motor The CTs cannot be used between the drive outputs and the motor because the drive can output fundamental frequencies outside the 47 63 Hz range e Chokes must be mounted on the 3 phases between the current transformers external or internal and the variable speed drive to minimize the soft start harmonics current and the voltage disturbances generated by the variable speed drive 200 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers Ground Fault Current Transformer Installation The following diagram shows a typical LTM R controller installation using a ground fault current transformer GFCT w L1 L2 L3 Se AAN IHHH H COOWECCOCOCCOCS egg o Test Reset E OVER
349. statistics are listed at addresses 240 269 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 390 391 UDInt Average current n 3 x 0 01 A 392 393 UDiInt L1 current n 3 x 0 01 A 394 395 UDiInt L2 current n 3 x 0 01 A 396 397 UDiInt L3 current n 3 x 0 01 A 398 399 UDInt Ground current n 3 mA 400 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree n 3 C N 4 Fault Statistics Extension The n 4 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 270 299 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 420 421 UDInt Average current n 4 x 0 01 A 422 423 UDInt L1 current n 4 x 0 01 A 424 425 UDiInt L2 current n 4 x 0 01 A 426 427 UDInt L3 current n 4 x 0 01 A 428 429 UDInt Ground current n 4 mA 430 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree n 4 C 308 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Monitoring Variables Monitoring Overview Monitoring variables are grouped according to the following criteria Monitoring variable groups Registers Monitoring of faults 450 to 454 Monitoring of status 455 to 459 Monitoring of warnings 460 to 464 Monitoring of measurements 465 to 539 Monitoring of faults Variables for monitoring of faults are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 450 UInt Minimum wait time s 451 Ulnt Fault code code of the last fault or of the fault that takes priority See DT_FaultCode page 299
350. sted Network Port Parity Setting The parity can be selected from e Even e Odd e None When Network port baud rate setting is in Autodetection the controller is able to adapt its parity and stop bit to that of the master Even parity is the first parity to be tested In Autodetection the parity is set automatically any previous setting is ignored Parity and stop bit behavior is linked If the parity is Then the number of stop bits is even or odd 1 none 2 Network Port Comm Loss Timeout Network port comm loss timeout is used to determine the timeout value after a loss of communication with the PLC e Range 1 9 999 Network Port Fallback Setting Network port fallback setting see page 47 is used to adjust the fallback mode in case of a loss of communication with the PLC Network Port Endian Setting The Network port endian setting allows to swap the 2 words in a double word e 0 least significant word first little endian e 1 most significant word first big endian factory setting 288 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Simplified Control and Monitoring Overview This is a simplified example of the main registers which control and monitor a Motor Management Controller Modbus Registers for Simplified Operation The illustration below provides basic setup information using the following registers configuration control and monitoring system status measurements faults and wa
351. stem When it is not configured to be used as the external system ready input Logic Input 3 External Ready Enable 0 this input is user defined and only sets a bit in a register 1 4 e In 3 wire impulse control a Stop command Note that this stop command can be disabled in terminal strip control by setting the parameter Stop terminal strip disable in the Control setting register In 2 wire maintained control a user defined input that can be configured to send information to a PLC address over the network Note In Overload operating mode logic input 1 4 is not used and can be user defined 1 5 A Fault Reset command is recognized when this input receives the rising edge of a signal Note this input must first become inactive and then receive the rising edge of a subsequent signal for another reset to occur 1 6 Local Remote control of the LTM R controller s outputs e Active Remote control can be associated to any Control channel e Inactive Local control through either the terminal strip or the HMI port as determined by the Control Local Channel Setting parameter A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION IN HMI CONTROL If the terminal strip Stop is disabled the fault output terminal NC 95 96 must be wired in series with the contactor coil Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Logic Output Behavior The behavior of logic out
352. stom logic editor 1639501EN 04 09 2014 49 Metering and Monitoring Functions Section 2 3 Fault and Warning Counters Overview The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults and warnings that occur In addition it counts the number of auto reset attempts This information can be accessed to assist with system performance and maintenance Fault and warning counters can be accessed via e aPC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM e an HMI device e aPLC via the network port What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Introducing Fault and Warning Counters 51 All Faults Counter 51 All Warnings Counter 51 Auto Reset Counter 51 Protection Faults and Warnings Counters 52 Control Command Errors Counter 52 Wiring Faults Counter 52 Communication Loss Counters 53 Internal Fault Counters 53 Fault History 53 50 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Introducing Fault and Warning Counters Detecting Warnings If a warning detection function is enabled the LTM R controller detects a warning immediately when the monitored value rises above or falls below a threshold setting Detecting Faults Before the LTM R controller detects a fault certain preconditions must exist These conditions can include e the fault detecting function must be enabled e a monitored value for example current
353. t s 1 588 Ulnt Underpower fault threshold Pnom 1 589 Ulnt Underpower warning threshold Pnom 1 590 Ulnt Under power factor fault timeout x 0 1 s 1 591 Ulnt Under power factor fault threshold x 0 01 PF 1 592 Ulnt Under power factor warning threshold x 0 01 PF 1 593 Ulnt Over power factor fault timeout x 0 1 s 1 594 Ulnt Over power factor fault threshold x 0 01 PF 1 595 Ulnt Over power factor warning threshold x 0 01 PF 1 596 Ulnt Auto restart delayed timeout s 597 599 Reserved 600 Not significant 316 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 601 Word General configuration register 1 bit O Controller system config required A 0 exit the configuration menu 1 go to the configuration menu bits 1 7 Reserved Control mode configuration bits 8 10 one bit is set to 1 bit 8 Config via HMI keypad enable bit 9 Config via HMI engineering tool enable bit 10 Config via network port enable bit 11 Motor star delta B bit 12 Motor phases sequence O ABC 1 ACB bits 13 14 Motor phases B see DT_PhaseNumber page 300 bit 15 Motor auxiliary fan cooled factory setting 0 602 Word General configuration register 2 bits 0 2 Fault reset mode C see DT_ResetMode page 300 bit 3 HMI port parity setting 0 none 1 even factory
354. t 8 command a a ao bits 8 15 Reserved 701 703 Reserved 704 Word Control register 1 bit 0 Motor run forward command bit 1 Motor run reverse command bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Fault reset command bit 4 Reserved bit 5 Self test command bit 6 Motor low speed command bits 7 15 Reserved 705 Word Control register 2 bit 0 Clear all command Clear all parameters except e Motor LO1 closings count e Motor LO2 closings count e Controller internal temperature max Thermal capacity level bit 1 Clear statistics command bit 2 Clear thermal capacity level command bit 3 Clear controller settings command bit 4 Clear network port settings command bits 5 15 Reserved 706 709 Reserved 710 799 Forbidden 322 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use User Map Variables User Map Variables User Map variables are described below User map variable groups Registers User Map addresses 800 to 899 User Map values 900 to 999 Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 800 898 Word 99 User map addresses setting 899 Reserved Register Variable type Read Write variables Note page 294 900 998 Word 99 User map values 999 Reserved 1639501EN 04 09 2014 323 Use Custom Logic Variables Custom Logic Variables Custom
355. t A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures Control Voltage Characteristics The LTM R controller has the following control voltage characteristics Logic Inputs Characteristics Logic Outputs Characteristics Control voltage 24 VDC 100 240 VAC Power consumption According to IEC EN 60947 1 56 127 mA 8 62 8 mA Control voltage range According to IEC EN 60947 1 20 4 26 4 VDC 93 5 264 VAC Overcurrent protection 24 V fuse 0 5 A gG 100 240 V fuse 0 5AgG Resistance to Microbreaks 3 ms 3 ms Resistance to voltage dips According to IEC EN 61000 4 11 70 of UC min for 70 of UC min for 500 ms 500 ms Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC 100 240 VAC Current 7 mA e 3 1 mA at 100 VAC e 7 5 mA at 240 VAC Input limit values At state 1 Voltage 15 V minimum 79 V lt V lt 264 V Current 2 mA min to 15 mA max 2 mA min at 110 VAC to 3 mA min at 220 VAC At state 0 Voltage 5 V maximum 0V lt V lt 40V Current 15 mA maximum 15 mA maximum Response time Change to state 1 15 ms 25 ms Change to state 0 5 ms 25 ms IEC 61131 1 conformity Type 1 Type 1 Type of input Resistive Capacitive Rated insulation voltage 300 V AC rated thermal load 250 VAC 5A DC rated thermal load 30 VDC 5A AC 15 rating 480 VA 500 000 operations le
356. t assigned to start the motor issues a run command The run command remains active only while the input is active The signal is not latched 3 wire impulse The LTM R controller e After detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor latch the run command and e After a stop command disables the run command to disable the output relay wired in series with the coil of the contactor that turns the motor on or off e Following a stop must detect a rising edge on the input to latch the run command Control logic assignments for logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 are described in each of the predefined motor operating modes NOTE In Network control channel network commands behave as 2 wire control commands regardless of the control circuit type of the selected operating mode For information on Control Channels see Control Channels page 133 144 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Control Functions In each predefined operating mode logic inputs 1 3 1 4 1 5 and 1 6 behave as follows Logic Input Behavior 1 3 e When it is configured to be used as the external system ready input Logic Input 3 External Ready Enable 1 this input provides a feedback on the system state Ready or not e If 1 3 0 the external system is not ready System Ready bit 455 0 is set to 0 e If 1 3 1 the external system is ready System Ready bit 455 0 can be set to 1 depending on other conditions on the sy
357. t threshold and after the fault reset timeout is elapsed Reset for Emergency Restart You can use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command issued from the PLC or an HMI to re start an overloaded motor in an emergency situation This command resets the thermal capacity utilization value to 0 and bypasses the cooling period required by the thermal model before the motor can be restarted This command also resets the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout to allow an immediate restart without lock The Clear All Command does not perform a Clear Thermal Capacity Level A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command will not reset the fault response Instead e Only an action external to the LTM R controller for example a reduction in the motor load can clear the fault condition e Only a reset command from the valid reset means configured in the Fault Reset Mode parameter will reset the fault response A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION A reset command may re start the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2 wire control circuit Equipment operation must confor
358. tage is too low or off e NC 95 96 open e NO 97 98 close 1639501EN 04 09 2014 145 Motor Control Functions Control Wiring and Fault Management Overview When Overload predefined operating mode is selected the LTM R controller does not manage logic output 0 1 0 2 and 0 3 For all other predefined operating modes Independent Reverser 2 Step and 2 Speed the predefined control logic in the LTM R controller is designed to meet the objectives of many common motor starting applications This includes managing motor behavior in response to e start and stop actions and e fault and reset actions Because the LTM R controller can be used in special applications such as fire pumps that require the motor to run despite a known external fault condition the predefined control logic is designed so that the control circuit and not the predefined control logic determines how the LTM R controller interrupts current flow to the contactor coil Control Logic Action on Starts and Stops Predefined control logic acts upon start and stop commands as follows e For all 3 wire impulse control wiring diagrams when input 4 is configured as a stop command the LTM R controller must detect input current at logic input 1 4 in order to act on a start command e f logic input 1 4 is active and a user start action initiates current at logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 the LTM R controller detects the rising edge of the current and sets an
359. tained Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control wiring diagram LS Low speed O Off HS High speed 1639501EN 04 09 2014 381 Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control Start LS Start Low speed Start HS Start High speed Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Terminal strip control O Off N Network control LS Low speed HS High speed 382 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Wiring Diagrams Section C 2 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Overview This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre configured operating modes Overload Monitoring of the motor load where control start stop of the motor load is achieved by a mechanism other than the controller Independent Direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Reverser Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Tw
360. tart command input signal Ready 2 The LTM R controller confirms that all startup preconditions exist e g no Ready faults load shedding or rapid cycle timer 3 The LTM R controller closes the appropriate output contacts designated as Ready terminals 13 14 or 23 24 thereby closing the control circuit of the motor starting contactors 4 The LTM R controller detects that maximum phase current exceeds the On Start Level Current threshold 5 The LTM R controller detects that current rises above and then falls below Run the Long Start Fault Threshold before the Long Start Fault Timeout timer expires 2 Threshold Crosses In this start cycle scenario the start cycle executes successfully e Current rises above then drops below the fault threshold e The LTM R controller reports the actual start cycle time i e the time elapsed from detection of On Level Current until the maximum phase current drops below the fault threshold Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses single step Start time 20 FLC H Ready state Start state G Run state Is Long start fault threshold 1639501EN 04 09 2014 139 Motor Control Functions Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses 2 step Adjustable transition timer 1 First step Second step gt tt tt tt tt J Il 1 tt tt I li 1 tt it l l 1 l 1 pesem 1 t l I 1 I l Start time H l 20 FLC
361. te control default mode 357 key enable 357 stop key disable 357 transfer mode 351 logic file 163 logic input logic input 3 external ready 357 logic input 3 external ready enable 324 logic input behavior 144 independent operating mode 150 overload operating mode 148 reverser operating mode 152 two speed operating mode 167 two step operating mode 157 logic inputs characteristics LTM R controller 347 logic output behavior 145 independent operating mode 750 overload operating mode 148 reverser operating mode 152 two speed operating mode 162 two step operating mode 158 logic outputs characteristics LTM R controller 341 long start 90 fault enable 90 271 355 fault threshold 90 139 271 317 355 fault timeout 71 90 139 271 271 317 355 faults count 52 276 LTM E expansion module technical specifications 343 LTM R physical description 22 LTM R controller technical specifications 340 Magelis XBT L1000 programming software file transfer 252 install 250 software application files 251 Magelis XBTN410 programming 249 Magelis XBTN410 1 to many 253 command lines 257 controller page 268 controllers currents page 265 controllers status page 265 editing values 259 fault management 280 home page 264 keypad 254 LCD 255 menu structure level 2 265 menu structure overview 263 monitoring 279 navigating the menu structure 258 physical description 254 product ID page 278 remote r
362. ternally powered by the control voltage of the LTM R controller the input voltage is the same voltage as the controller supply voltage e isolated from the inputs of the LTM E expansion module The 3 Common C terminals of the LTM R controller are connected to the A1 control voltage via an internal filter as shown in the wiring diagram examples see page 192 NOTICE LOGIC INPUTS DESTRUCTION HAZARD e Connect the LTM R controller s inputs using the 3 Common C terminals connected to the A1 control voltage via an internal filter e Do not connect the Common C terminal to the A1 or A2 control voltage inputs Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage For more information see the power supply wiring see page 204 and the technical specifications of the LTM R controller see page 340 Logic Inputs of the LTM E Expansion Module The 4 logic inputs on the LTM E expansion module I 7 1 10 are not powered by the control voltage of the LTM R controller For more information refer to the technical specifications of the LTM E controller see page 343 and to the power supply description see page 204 Controller AC Inputs Setting The LTM R controller uses internal filters to obtain a correct AC signal on the inputs For more accurate results this filter can be configured by the controller AC inputs setting register see page 315 to set the voltage supply and activate the adaptive filtering int
363. the fallback strategy chosen NOTE For more information about a communication loss and the fallback strategy refer to the Fallback Condition see page 47 portion of the topic describing Communication Loss 1639501EN 04 09 2014 335 Maintenance 336 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Appendices What Is in This Appendix The appendix contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page A Technical Data 339 B Configurable Parameters 349 Cc Wiring Diagrams 363 1639501EN 04 09 2014 337 338 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Appendix A Technical Data Overview This appendix presents technical data related to the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller 340 Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module 343 Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions 345 Recommended Contactors 346 1639501EN 04 09 2014 339 Technical Data Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller Technical Specifications The LTM R controller meets the following specifications Certification UL CSA CE CTIC K CCC NOM GOST IACS E10 BV LROS DNV GL RINA ABS RMRos ATEX Conformity to Standards IEC EN 60947 4 1 UL 508 CSA C22 2 no 14 IACS E10 European Communit
364. the next lower level in the menu structure e return to a page in the next higher level in the menu structure e jump to the Home page Example The following navigation example begins and ends at the Home page Scroll within page Te Sys T a Navigate between pages IMPORTANT gt Controller Currents gt TeSys T Wa IMPORTANT yp Controller Currents D Eso CONTROLLER CURRENTS PJI 95 I5 90 Q ok 12 0 an T j 4 13 0 I7 0 gt Controller 5 Avg Current 90 FLC L1 Current 85 FLC h Statistics J gt Self Test P gt Product ID gt Home D oY 258 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Editing Values 1 to many Overview Boolean settings Numeric settings Use the HMI keypad a V and Gere buttons to edit setting values There are 3 kinds of editable settings e boolean e numeric e value list Only settings that are displayed in the LCD can be edited To display a setting navigate to the page that contains the setting With the correct page opened you may need to scroll down to display the setting A boolean value setting includes a 0 ora 1 next to the at the right end of the text line The following example shows you how to select then edit a boolean value navigate Settings Addr 1 edit Motor D save Local Control Motor 2 Local Control HMI x Transfer Mode Motor gt 3 Local Con
365. the use of an interposing relay KA1 Without interposing relay With interposing relay B1 B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs 1639501EN 04 09 2014 211 Installation The LTM R controller logic output characteristics are rated insulation voltage 300 V AC rated thermal load 250 VAC 5A DC rated thermal load 30 VDC 5 A AC 15 rating 480 VA 500 000 operations le max 2A e DC 13 rating 30 W 500 000 operations le max 1 25A If the LTM R controller logic output is not able to control directly the contactor an interposing relay is required The protection module is mandatory on the interposing relays in order to suppress the surge Recommended Contactors The tables in the appendix listing the references and characteristics of Schneider Electric contactors specify whether an interposing relay is required or not see page 346 212 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Connecting to an HMI Device Overview This section describes how to connect the LTM R controller to an HMI device such as a Magelis XBT or a TeSys T LTM CU or to a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM The HMI device must be connected to the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller or to the HMI interface port RJ45 on the LTM E expansion module The Magelis XBT HMI device must be powered separately Connect it to a controller in 1 to many mode Wiring Rules The wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance on the
366. ting bits 2 15 Reserved 560 Ulnt Ground CT primary 561 Ulnt Ground CT secondary 562 Ulnt External ground current fault timeout x 0 01 s 563 Ulnt External ground current fault threshold x 0 01 A 564 Ulnt External ground current warning threshold x 0 01 A 565 Ulnt Motor nominal voltage V 1 566 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting x 0 1 s 1 567 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running x 0 1 s 1 568 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold imb 1 569 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold imb 1 570 Ulnt Overvoltage fault timeout x 0 1 s 1 571 Ulnt Overvoltage fault threshold Vnom 1 572 Ulnt Overvoltage warning threshold Vnom 1 573 Ulnt Undervoltage fault timeout 1 574 Ulnt Undervoltage fault threshold Vnom 1 575 Ulnt Undervoltage warning threshold Vnom 1 576 Ulnt Voltage phase loss fault timeout x 0 1 s 1 577 Word Voltage dip setting 1 bits 0 1 Voltage dip mode 0 None factory setting 1 Load shedding 2 Auto restart bits 3 15 Reserved 578 Ulnt Load shedding timeout s 1 579 Ulnt Voltage dip threshold Vnom 1 580 Ulnt Voltage dip restart timeout s 1 581 Ulnt Voltage dip restart threshold Vnom 1 582 Ulnt Auto restart immediate timeout x 0 1 s 583 Ulnt Motor nominal power x 0 1 kW 1 584 Ulnt Overpower fault timeout s 1 585 Ulnt Overpower fault threshold Pnom 1 586 Ulnt Overpower warning threshold Pnom 1 587 Ulnt Underpower fault timeou
367. tion Functions Example The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PTC analog fault with automatic reset and an active Run command fy A Run state Fault condition j m a Be a Run state resume Reset s2 Fault threshold 0s3 Fault re closing threshold 95 of fault threshold 78 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor NTC Analog Description The NTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to NTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog NTC thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e amotor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance falls below a configurable warning threshold e a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance falls below a separately set fault threshold The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance exceeds 105 of the fault or warning threshold Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function is available for all operating states Functional Characteristics The NTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features e 2 configurable thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 2 function outputs e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e Motor Temp Sens
368. tion file 1 Open the saved file Select File sOpen then navigate to the file 2 Download the configuration to the new controller 3 Select Communication Store to Device Environment Like any other electronic device the LTM R controller is affected by its physical environment Provide a friendly environment by taking common sense preventive measures including e Scheduling periodic examinations of battery packs fuses power strips batteries surge suppressors and power supplies e Keeping the LTM R controller the panel and all devices clean An unobstructed flow of air will prevent dust build up which can lead to a short circuit condition e Remaining alert to the possibility of other equipment producing electromagnetic radiation Be sure no other devices cause electromagnetic interference with the LTM R controller Self Test with Motor Off Perform a self test by either e holding down the Test Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller for more than 3 seconds and up to 15 seconds or e setting the Self Test Command parameter A self test can be performed only if e no faults exist e the Self Test Enable parameter is set factory setting 1639501EN 04 09 2014 331 Maintenance The LTM R controller performs the following checks during a self test e Watchdog check e RAM check During the self test sequence the LTM R controller calibrates the thermal memory time constant which keeps track of time
369. to current imbalances occurring after startup while the motor is in run state Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state The function identifies the phase causing a current imbalance If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase current average is the same for 2 phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors Functional Characteristics The current phase imbalance function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold 2 fault time delays e Fault Timeout Starting e Fault Timeout Running e 2 function outputs e Current Phase Imbalance Warning e Current Phase Imbalance Fault e 1 counting statistic e Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases with the highest current imbalance e L1 Current Highest Imbalance e L2 Current Highest Imbalance e L3 Current Highest Imbalance 84 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Current phase imbalance warning and fault 12 limb 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current limb gt Is41 Current phase imbalance warning Start state limb gt Is2 limb Current imbalance ratio for 3 phase Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T1 Fault timeout starting T2 Fault timeout running Parameter Settings
370. tor Control Functions Clear Network Port Settings Command The Clear Network Port Settings Command restores the LTM R controller network port factory settings address and so on Network port settings are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode Static characteristics are preserved Only the network communication becomes ineffective After the IP addressing parameters are cleared power must be cycled to the LTM R controller for it 1639501EN 04 09 2014 177 Motor Control Functions 178 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Chapter 5 Installation Overview This chapter describes the physical installation and assembly of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module It also explains how to connect and wire the controller terminal block including communication port wiring in both an enclosure or a switchboard A amp DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH e Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it e Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION e The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program and apply this product e Follow all local and national safety
371. tor protection function both of which employ the Long start fault timeout setting Technical Characteristics The definite time thermal overload function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 5 of warning and fault thresholds Trip time accuracy 0 1s Example The following diagram describes a definite time thermal overload fault Start state Run state A Fault condition gt lt OG i f 22 ee eee S O time Fault timeout a ai D time Long start fault timeout OC Fault threshold OC1 or OC2 1639501EN 04 09 2014 71 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor Overview Parameter Settings The LTM R controller has 2 terminals T1 and T2 that can be connected to a motor temperature sensing element to provide protection for motor windings by detecting high temperature conditions that could lead to damage or degradation These protections are activated when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to one of the following settings PTC Binary see page 73 PT100 see page 75 PTC Analog see page 77 NTC Analog see page 79 Only one of these motor protection sensing elements can be enabled at a time NOTE Motor temperature sensor protection is based in ohms PTC Binary protection thresholds are pre set to IEC standards and are non configurable PTC Analog and NTC Analog
372. trol Term Strip 1 gt Transfer Mode 1 The Settings page opens with focus at the top line 2 Click the DOWN button to scroll down to the Local Control setting HMI The boolean value 0 and command line arrow blink indicating focus 3 Click the RIGHT arrow to toggle the Local Control setting to Term Strip and the boolean value to 1 NOTE An edited boolean value is saved when its value changes Numeric value settings are incremented or decremented and can be edited in 2 ways e by selecting the entire setting and then incrementing or decrementing its value e by selecting individual characters within the setting and then incrementing or decrementing the value of each digit 1639501EN 04 09 2014 259 Use Use the button to select the value to be edited as follows Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level 150 FLC Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level 150 FLC Long Start Addr 1 Fault Enabled 1 Fault Level Noro 1 The Long Start page opens with no setting selected for editing 2 Click the MOD button once to select the first displayed numerical field for editing 3 Click the MOD button a second time to select the next displayed numerical field for editing After a setting is selected for editing you can use the a and V buttons to increment or decrement the entire value then use the Er button to save the edit Long Start Addr 1
373. ttempt to shut itself down During a major fault communication with the LTM R controller is not possible Major internal faults include stack overflow fault stack underflow fault watchdog time out firmware checksum failure CPU failure internal temperature fault at 100 C 212 F RAM test error Minor Internal Faults Minor internal faults indicate that the data being provided to the LTM R controller is unreliable and protection could be compromised During a minor fault the LTM R controller continues to attempt to monitor status and communications but does not accept any start commands During a minor fault condition the LTM R controller continues to detect and report major faults but not additional minor faults Minor internal faults include internal network communications failure EEPROM error A D out of range error Reset button stuck internal temperature fault at 85 C 185 F invalid configuration error conflicting configuration improper logic function action for example attempting to write to a read only parameter 40 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Controller Internal Temperature Description Characteristics Parameters Block Diagram The LTM R controller monitors its Controller Internal Temperature and reports warning minor fault and major fault conditions Fault detection cannot be disabled Warning detection can be enabled or disabled The controller
374. uctions specific to your type of switchboard 1639501EN 04 09 2014 181 Installation Dimensions Overview This section presents the dimensions of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module as well as the dimensions of the clearance zone around the controller and the expansion module Dimensions are given in both millimeters and inches and apply to all LTM R and LTM E models LTM R Controller Dimensions NOTE The height of the controller may increase when using alternate wiring terminals LTM E Expansion Module Dimensions mm 182 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Clearance Zone Dimensions The maximum rated ambient temperature of the controller depends on the clearance zone dimensions They are shown in the table below L7_C7_18 C8 19 C9 1 10 C10 SSOVSSVGO lt 9 mm 0 35 in 45 C 113 F 9 40 mm 0 35 1 57 in 45 55 C 113 131 F gt 40 mm 1 57 in 60 C 140 F Fap aoe 136 5 35 1639501EN 04 09 2014 183 Installation Assembly Overview Connecting the LTM R Controller and the LTM E Expansion Module It is recommended to mount the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module side by side with the LTM E expansion module on the left side of the LTM R controller and connected by the LTMCC004 connecting jumper 1 Bens w Power 1 7
375. ult threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 110 of Motor nominal voltage Overvoltage fault timeout 0 2 25 s in increments of 0 1 s 3s Overvoltage warning enable e Disable Disable e Enable Overvoltage warning threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 110 of Motor nominal voltage 1639501EN 04 09 2014 357 Configurable Parameters Voltage Dip Parameters Setting range Factory setting Voltage dip mode e None e Load shedding e Auto restart None Voltage dip threshold 50 115 of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 65 of Motor nominal voltage Load shedding timeout 1 9999 s in increments of 1s 10s Voltage dip restart threshold 65 115 of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 90 of Motor nominal voltage Voltage dip restart timeout 0 9999 s in increments of 1 s 2s Voltage dip threshold 50 115 of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 65 of Motor nominal voltage Voltage dip restart threshold 65 115 of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 90 of Motor nominal voltage Voltage dip restart timeout 0 9999 s in increments of 1 s 2s Auto restart immediate timeout 0 0 4 s in increments of 0 1 s 0 2s Auto restart delayed timeout 0 301 s in increments of 1 s 4s 358 1639501EN 04 0
376. unication cables Length 0 3 m 1 ft VW3 A8 306 R03 Length 1 m 3 2 ft VW3 A8 306 R10 Length 3 m 3 2 ft VW3 A8 306 R30 HMI device connection cable Length 1 m 3 2 ft LTM9CU10 Length 3 m 9 6 ft LTM9CU30 216 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Installation Section 5 2 Wiring of the Modbus Network Overview This section describes how to connect an LTM R controller to an RS 485 Modbus network with an RJ45 or an open style connector It presents 3 possible network topologies A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL e The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and for certain critical functions provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop e Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions e System control paths may include communication links Consideration must be given to the implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of the link e Each implementation of an LTM R controller must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation before being placed into service Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1 For additional information refer to NEMA ICS 1 1 latest edition Safety Guidelines
377. unt 53 276 introduction 13 J jam 92 fault enable 92 271 356 fault threshold 92 271 317 356 fault timeout 92 271 317 356 faults count 52 warning enable 92 271 356 warning threshold 92 271 317 356 L L1 current n 0 307 n 1 308 n 2 308 n 3 308 n 4 308 L1 current highest imbalance 84 L1 current ratio 53 268 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 L1 L2 highest imbalance 104 L1 L2 voltage 53 n 0 277 305 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 L2 current n 0 307 n 1 308 n 2 308 n 3 308 n 4 308 L2 current highest imbalance 84 L2 current ratio 53 268 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 L2 L3 highest imbalance 104 L2 L3 voltage 53 n 0 277 305 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 1639501EN 04 09 2014 409 Index L3 current n 0 307 n 1 308 n 2 308 n 3 308 n 4 308 L3 current highest imbalance 84 L3 current ratio 53 268 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 L3 L1 highest imbalance 104 L3 L1 voltage 53 n 0 277 304 n 1 277 305 n 2 306 n 3 306 n 4 307 line currents 29 load CT multiple passes 378 primary 318 ratio 302 secondary 318 load current transformer multiple passes 350 primary 350 secondary 350 load shedding 115 275 310 timeout 115 275 316 358 load sheddings count 55 304 local control channel setting 357 local remo
378. uracy e 1 for 8 A and 27 A models 2 for 100 A models Resolution 0 01 A Refresh interval 100 ms Average Current Ratio The Average Current Ratio parameter provides the average current value as a percentage of FLC Average Current Ratio Formulas The average current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting where FLC is FLC1 or FLC2 whichever is active at that time Calculated Measurement Formula Average current ratio 100 x lavg FLC Where e FLC FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting whichever is active at the time lavg average current value in amperes Average Current Ratio Characteristics The average current ratio function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy See Average Current Characteristics above Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms 32 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Metering and Monitoring Functions Current Phase Imbalance Description The current phase imbalance function measures the maximum percentage of deviation between the average current and the individual phase currents Formulas The current phase imbalance measurement is based on imbalance ratio calculated from the following formulas Calculated Measurement Formula Imbalance ratio of current in phase 1 in li1 L1 lavg x 100 lavg Imbalance ratio of current in phase 2 in li2 L2 lavg
379. ured resistance falls below a separate fixed motor temperature sensor re closing threshold Motor temperature sensing fault thresholds are factory pre set and are not configurable Fault monitoring can be enabled or disabled The function is available for all operating states Functional Characteristics The PTC Binary motor temperature sensor function includes the following features e 2 function output e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e Motor Temp Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Block Diagram Motor temperature sensor fault warning Qe 06 gt 29000 Motor temperature sensor fault warning PTC Binary Temperature sensing element resistance Parameter Settings The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following non configurable parameter settings Parameter Fixed settings Accuracy Fault Warning threshold 2900 Q 2 Fault Warning re closing threshold 1575 Q 2 Technical Characteristics The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Detection time 0 5 0 6 s Detection time accuracy 0 1s 1639501EN 04 09 2014 73 74 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a PTC binary motor temp sensor fault with an automatic reset A Fault and warning Run state condition i Run state resume p
380. urrent Max n 1 Avg Current Average Current n 1 L1 Current L1 Current Ratio n 1 L2 Current L2 Current Ratio n 1 L3 Current L3 Current Ratio n 1 GRCurr Ground Current Ratio n 1 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 1 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 1 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 1 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 1 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 1 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 1 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 1 Frequency Frequency n 1 Active Pwr Active Power n 1 Power Factor Power Factor n 1 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 1 1639501EN 04 09 2014 277 Use Product ID 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides a description of the product number and firmware for both the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module To navigate to the Product ID page use one of the following paths Level From this page Select 1 Home page Controller currents or Controller status 2 Controller Currents page or Controller Status LTM R controller number page 3 Controller page Product ID Product ID In the Product ID page you can read the following information about the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module Level 4 Parameter name description Product ID Addr 1 8 Controller Catalog Ref Controller Commercial Reference product number Controller Firmware Controller Firmware Version Exp Module Catalog Ref Expansion Commercial R
381. urrent transformers 1 Windows for phase current measurement Front Face The LTM R controller front face includes the following features 24vDC QGOOCKCLGOVG JOG e R M AJI C 12 13 C 14 15 C 16 S88 Sy 4 LTMROSMBD ee z prup x i B53 3 5 if A D J 2 E a Test 7 Reset i 134 2 4 saa Z1 Z2 T1 T2 D1 DO S V NC IWOLKOVKG ISOSVGOSOSeg E S Test Reset button HMI port with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to an HMI PC or LTM E expansion module Network port with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to Modbus network LTM R status indicating LEDs Plug in terminal control power logic inputs and commons Plug in terminal double pole single throw DPST output relay Plug in terminal output relay Plug in terminal ground fault input and temperature sensor input Plug in terminal Modbus network COONOARhWHND 22 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Introduction Test Reset Button The Test Reset button performs a reset self test or places the LTM R controller in an internal fault state For a detailed description of the test rest button functions see Test Reset page 245 HMI Device Expansion Module PC Port This port connects the LTM R controller to the following devices over the HMI port using an RJ45 connector e an exp
382. ut controller types see LTM R Controller page 15 1639501EN 04 09 2014 197 Installation Internal CT Wiring Using a Lug Lug Kit The controller accepts the Class 9999 Type MLPL lug lug kit The following diagram shows typical wiring using the lug lug kit NOTE The lug lug kit is IPO 101 For more information on the lug lug kit refer to instruction bulletin 30072 013 e supplied with the kit or r electric us support technical library under Technical Library e available from hitp products schneide 1639501EN 04 09 2014 198 Installation External Load CT Wiring The controller can accept 5 A and 1 A secondary signals from external current transformers The recommended controller model for these currents is the 0 4 8 A model Use multiple passes through the controller CT windows if required External CTs are specified with a transformation ratio The ratio of the external CT is the ratio of the motor input current to the CT output current To enable the controller to adjust the FLC range and display the actual line current set the following parameters e Load CT Primary the first number of the CT ratio e Load CT Secondary the second number of the CT ratio e Load CT Multiple Passes the number of times the CT output wires pass through the controller s internal CT windows For more information refer to Load Current Transformer settings see page 350 The following diagram
383. ve with the TeSys T DTM SoMove with the TeSys T DTM displays a visual array of active faults and warnings including LTM R controller self diagnostic faults and warnings when these faults occur For information about this display of active faults and warnings refer to the TeSys T DTM for SoMove FDT Container Online help 328 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Maintenance Troubleshooting Self Diagnostic Tests The LTM R controller performs self diagnostic tests at power up and during operation These tests the errors they detect and the steps to take in response to a problem are described below Type Error Action Major internal faults Internal temperature fault This fault indicates a warning at 80 C a minor fault at 85 C and a major fault at 100 C Take steps to reduce ambient temperature including e add an auxiliary cooling fan remount the LTM R controller and expansion module to provide more surrounding free space If the condition persists 1 Cycle power 2 Wait 30s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller CPU failure Program checksum error RAM test error Stack overflow Stack underflow Watchdog timeout These faults indicate a hardware failure Take the following steps 1 Cycle power 2 Wait 30s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Minor internal faults Invalid configuration error Configuration checksum E
384. voltage n 3 V 1 259 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 3 V 1 306 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 260 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 3 1 261 Ulnt Active power n 3 x 0 1 kW 1 262 Ulnt Power factor n 3 x 0 01 1 263 269 Not significant N 4 Fault Statistics The n 4 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 420 to 430 Register Variable type Read only variables Note page 294 270 Ulnt Fault code n 4 271 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 4 FLC max 272 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 4 trip level 273 Ulnt Average current ratio n 4 FLC 274 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 4 FLC 275 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 4 FLC 276 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 4 FLC 277 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 4 x 0 1 FLC min 278 Ulnt Full load current max n 4 x 0 1 A 279 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 4 280 Ulnt Frequency n 4 x 0 1 Hz 2 281 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 4 x 0 1 Q 282 285 Word 4 Date and time n 4 See DT_DateTime page 297 286 Ulnt Average voltage n 4 V 1 287 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 4 V 1 288 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 4 V 1 289 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 4 V 1 290 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 4 1 291 Ulnt Active power n 4 x 0 1 kW 1 292 Ulnt Power factor n 4 x 0 01 1 293 299
385. while it is not powered If any of the above tests fails a minor internal fault occurs If not the self test continues and the LTM R controller performs e LTM E expansion module test if it is connected to an expansion module If this test fails the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault e Internal communication test If this test fails the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault e LED test turns all LEDs off then turns each LED on in sequence e HMI communication activity LED e Power LED e Fallback LED e PLC communication activity LED At the end of the test all LEDs return to their initial state e Output relay test opens all relays and restores them to their original state only after a reset command executes or power is cycled If current is measured during the relay self test the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault During the LTM R self test a self test string displays on the HMI device During a self test the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1 When the self test finishes this parameter is reset to 0 Self Test with Motor On Internal Clock Perform a self test by using e the Test Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller e Menus command from the HMI connected to the RJ45 port e SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or e PLC When the motor is On performing a self test simulates a thermal fault in order to check if the logic output 0 4 is wo
386. xxxx xkW Active Power React Pwr xxxx xk VAR Reactive Power Temp Sensor xxxx xQ Motor Temp Sensor Settings gt Links to editable settings for the LTM R controller Statistics gt Links to read only statistics for the LTM R controller Self Test v gt Executes the Self Test command See Self Test with Motor On page 332 Product ID gt Links to product reference numbers and firmware versions for the LTM R controller and expansion module Home gt Returns to the Home page 268 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Use Settings 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides several pages of editable parameter settings nested in levels 4 5 and 6 of the menu structure The settings page is your starting place for locating and editing settings including motor local control transfer mode reset fault current voltage power load shed rapid cycle lockouts communication loss The settings page is located in level 4 of the menu structure To navigate to the settings page use one of the following paths Level From this page Select 1 Home page Controller currents or Controller status 2 Controller Currents page or Controller Status page LTM R controller number 3 Controller page Settings Motor Control and Transfer Settings Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following motor local control and transfer mode settings
387. y directives CE marking satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage LV machinery and electromagnetic compatibility EMC directives Rated insulation According to IEC EN 60947 1 Overvoltage category Ill 690 V voltage Ui degree of pollution 3 According to UL508 CSA C22 2 no 14 690 V Rated impulse According to IEC60947 1 220 V power input and 4 8 kV withstand voltage 8 3 3 4 1 paragraph 2 output circuits Uimp 24 V power input and 0 91 kV output circuits Communication circuits 0 91 kV PTC and GF circuits 0 91 kV Withstand to short According to IEC60947 4 1 100 kA circuit Degree of protection According to IEC60947 1 protection against direct contact IP20 Protective treatment IEC EN 60068 TH IEC EN 60068 2 30 Cycle humidity 12 cycles IEC EN 60068 2 11 Salt spray 48h Ambient air temperature around the device Storage 40 80 C 40 176 F Operation 20 60 C 4 140 F Maximum operating altitude Derating accepted 4500 m 14 763 ft Without derating 2000 m 6 561 ft Fire resistance According to UL 94 V2 According to IEC60695 2 1 Parts supporting live components 960 C 1 760 F Other components 650 C 1 202 F Half sine mechanical According to IEC60068 2 27 15 gn shock pulse 11 ms Resistance to According to IEC60068 2 6 2 Panel mounted 4gn
388. y level enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display time to trip enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI motor temperature sensor enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display temperature sensor degree CF e C C e F HMI display average current enable e Hidden Displayed e Displayed HMI display L1 current enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display L2 current enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display L3 current enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display average current ratio enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display L1 current ratio enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed 360 1639501EN 04 09 2014 Configurable Parameters Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting LHMI display L2 current ratio enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display L3 current ratio enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display current phase imbalance enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display ground current enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display start statistics enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display average voltage enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display L1 L2 voltage enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display L2 L3 voltage enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display L3 L1 voltage enable e Hidden Hidden e Displayed HMI display voltage p

TeSys T LTM R Modbus - Motor Management Controller

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents